Konica Minolta User's Guide ColorCentro(IC-601) Ver1.0 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

Sub Category User`s Guide
Title User's Guide ColorCentro(IC-601) Ver1.0
Operating System - Not Related -
Language English
Emulation - Not Related -
Firmware Release - Not Related -
Version 1.0
Release date 2010-08-11
Attachments 
(Starting the download may take some seconds.
Please be patient.)
Download ... colorcentro_en_00_IC601.pdf - 9693.4 KB



Close Window

 

 

 

 

Autres documentations et logiciels Konica Minolta :

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 20:31  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-D-162..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  5.3M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:15  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:14  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:13  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:12  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:11  5.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:10  3.5M

Konica-Minolta-IC-305-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-1600W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C280-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C220-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350EN-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-2550-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-200-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C253P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-C252-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-600-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-8-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-C252-2-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C451-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Konica-Minolta-FAX-1610-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-600-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C280-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C353-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-1200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-451-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-750-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-5501-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-350-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160f-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-650-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-303-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Manuels

Konica-business-hub-C284-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Italie-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CN5001Pro-Allemand-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-213-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1250-P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-550-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-D131F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C30P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-ineo-283-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-654-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-165-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-160f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C5501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-421-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-500-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Cabinet-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-AU-201-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CF2001-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub423SeriesAdvancedFunctionOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35Printer_Copier_ScannerUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html

IC-601 ColorCentro (IC-601) ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 Composition of User's Guide............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 2 Overview of the Color Centro 2.1 Color Centro .................................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Roles of Color Centro ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.2 Control Panel Layout ...................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Operating environment................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 Connectable computers and operating system................................................................................. 2-6 2.3.2 Interfaces used for connection .......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Setup procedure ............................................................................................................................. 2-8 3 Precautions for Installation 3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Installer ............................................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.2.1 Operating environment of the installer............................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Settings of this machine .................................................................................................................... 3-2 4 Installation of Color Centro 4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2 Installing Color Centro ................................................................................................................... 4-2 5 Basic Information 5.1 Launch Color Centro ...................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.2 Screens of Color Centro................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 [Launcher] screen............................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Function Screens ............................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Exit from Color Centro.................................................................................................................... 5-9 6 How to Use Color Centro 6.1 Color Setting of the Main Body...................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 Color Settings .................................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Daily Management .......................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2.1 Calibration on Color Centro ............................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3 Adjustment for individual Hues...................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.1 Tone Curve Adjustment ..................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.2 Spot Color.......................................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.3 Alternative Color ................................................................................................................................ 6-4 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro .................................................................................... 6-5 6.4.1 Color Settings by using Default Profile .............................................................................................. 6-5 6.4.2 Color Settings by using the Color Configuration Management Function .......................................... 6-5 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-2 6.4.3 Color Settings by using Functions of both Profile Management and Color Default Settings............ 6-6 7 Calibration 7.1 Outline of Calibration...................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.1 [Calibration] screen ............................................................................................................................ 7-2 7.1.2 Menu of [Calibration] screen.............................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.3 Basic operation of [Calibration] screen.............................................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Select the Calibration Method ....................................................................................................... 7-5 7.3 Select the Instrument ..................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Print the Chart ................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.5 Chart Measurement ........................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.6 Remeasurement.............................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result...................................................................................................... 7-10 7.8 Register the Calibration Data ...................................................................................................... 7-12 7.9 Reset the Calibration Data........................................................................................................... 7-13 8 Tone Curve Adjustment 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment ................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.1 [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen........................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen ......................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.3 Basic operation of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen ......................................................................... 8-5 8.2 Select Sample Image...................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 [Sample Picture] screen..................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.2 Menu of [Sample Picture] screen....................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.3 Select Sample Image......................................................................................................................... 8-7 8.3 Confirm Sample Image................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.4 Load the Tone Curve ...................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4.1 [Tone Curve Management] screen..................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Management] screen..................................................................................... 8-10 8.4.3 Load the Tone Curve ....................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.5 Create the New Tone Curve......................................................................................................... 8-12 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast ................................................................................................... 8-13 8.6.1 [Brightness/Contrast] tab................................................................................................................. 8-13 8.6.2 Brightness/Contrast Adjustment...................................................................................................... 8-14 8.7 Adjust the Each Color................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.7.1 [Adjust Each Color] tab .................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.7.2 Basic operation of [Adjust Each Color] tab...................................................................................... 8-16 8.8 Confirmation Print......................................................................................................................... 8-18 8.9 Save the Tone Curve..................................................................................................................... 8-19 8.10 Tone Curve Management............................................................................................................. 8-20 8.11 Reset the Tone Curve ................................................................................................................... 8-23 9 Spot Color 9.1 Outline of Spot Color ...................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.1 [Spot Color] screen ............................................................................................................................ 9-2 9.1.2 Menu of [Spot Color] screen.............................................................................................................. 9-3 9.1.3 Basic Operation of [Spot Color] screen ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table ............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 [Spot Color Table Management] screen ............................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.2 Menu of [Spot Color Table Management] screen.............................................................................. 9-6 9.2.3 Load the Spot Color Table................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3 Create the New Spot Color Table.................................................................................................. 9-8 9.4 Select the Spot Color / Add the New Spot Color ......................................................................... 9-9 9.5 Adjust the Spot Color Manually................................................................................................... 9-10 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-3 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart ...................................................................... 9-11 9.7 Save the Spot Color Table............................................................................................................ 9-13 9.8 Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table .............................................................................. 9-14 9.9 Spot Color Table Management.................................................................................................... 9-15 9.10 Spot Color Table Management.................................................................................................... 9-19 9.11 Initialize the Spot Color Screen ................................................................................................... 9-21 10 Alternative Color 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color.......................................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.1 [Alternative Color Management] screen........................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.2 Menu of [Alternative Color Management] screen ............................................................................ 10-4 10.1.3 Basic Operation of [Alternative Color Management] screen............................................................ 10-4 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color .................................................. 10-5 10.3 Adjust the Input Color................................................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Adjust the Output Color................................................................................................................ 10-8 10.5 Change the Priority of the Alternative Color ............................................................................ 10-11 10.6 Register the Alternative Color ................................................................................................... 10-12 10.7 Alternative Color Management.................................................................................................. 10-13 11 Profile Management 11.1 Outline of Profile Management.................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.1 [Profile Management] screen ........................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.2 Menu of [Profile Management] screen ............................................................................................. 11-4 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management ............................................................................................... 11-5 11.2.1 Copy from the Image Controller ...................................................................................................... 11-5 11.2.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................... 11-5 11.2.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................... 11-6 11.2.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-7 11.2.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ........................................................................................ 11-8 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management ............................................................................................. 11-9 11.3.1 Copy from the Image Controller ...................................................................................................... 11-9 11.3.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................... 11-9 11.3.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-10 11.3.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-11 11.3.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-12 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile ................................................................................................ 11-13 11.4.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-13 11.4.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-14 11.4.3 Select the Measurement Method................................................................................................... 11-15 11.4.4 Chart Measurement ....................................................................................................................... 11-16 11.4.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting ............................................................................................................... 11-17 11.4.6 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-18 11.4.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 11-19 11.5 Printer Profile Management ....................................................................................................... 11-20 11.5.1 Copy from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-20 11.5.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 11-21 11.5.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-22 11.5.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-23 11.5.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-24 11.6 Create the Printer Profile ........................................................................................................... 11-25 11.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-26 11.6.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-26 11.6.3 Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting................................................................................ 11-27 11.6.4 Chart Measurement ....................................................................................................................... 11-28 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-4 11.6.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting ............................................................................................................... 11-30 11.6.6 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-30 11.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 11-31 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management ......................................................................... 11-32 11.7.1 Copy from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-32 11.7.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 11-32 11.7.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-33 11.7.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-34 11.7.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-34 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile.............................................................................. 11-36 11.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-36 11.8.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-37 11.8.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 11-38 11.8.4 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 11-40 11.8.5 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-41 11.8.6 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 11-42 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile................................................................................... 11-43 11.9.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-43 11.9.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-44 11.9.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve............................................................................................ 11-45 11.9.4 Complete the Profile ...................................................................................................................... 11-49 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management ...................................................................... 11-50 11.10.1 Copy from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-50 11.10.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 11-50 11.10.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-51 11.10.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-52 11.10.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-52 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile........................................................................... 11-54 11.11.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-54 11.11.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-55 11.11.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 11-56 11.11.4 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 11-58 11.11.5 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-59 11.11.6 Confirm the Calculation Result ...................................................................................................... 11-60 11.11.7 Select the Task .............................................................................................................................. 11-60 11.11.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 11-61 11.11.9 Complete the Profile ...................................................................................................................... 11-64 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile............................................................................... 11-65 11.12.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler and Select the Task ........................................................................ 11-65 11.12.2 Confirm the Procedure................................................................................................................... 11-66 11.12.3 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-67 11.12.4 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 11-68 11.12.5 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve............................................................................................ 11-68 11.12.6 Complete the Profile ...................................................................................................................... 11-73 12 Color Default Settings 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings................................................................................................. 12-2 12.1.1 [Color Default Settings] screen ........................................................................................................ 12-2 12.1.2 Menu of [Color Default Settings] screen .......................................................................................... 12-5 12.1.3 Basic operation of [Color Default Settings] screen.......................................................................... 12-5 12.2 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration..................................................................... 12-6 12.3 Default Manual Settings ............................................................................................................... 12-7 12.3.1 Set the Default Settings of the RGB-CMYK Conversion ................................................................. 12-7 12.3.2 Set the Default Settings of the CMYK-CMYK Conversion .............................................................. 12-7 12.3.3 Set the Other Default Settings ......................................................................................................... 12-7 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-5 12.4 Set Color Verification.................................................................................................................... 12-9 12.5 Return to Factory Default........................................................................................................... 12-10 12.6 Color Default Settings ................................................................................................................ 12-11 13 Color Configuration Management 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management ............................................................................. 13-2 13.1.1 Outline of Profile Set ........................................................................................................................ 13-2 13.1.2 Outline of Color Configuration ......................................................................................................... 13-2 13.1.3 [Color Configuration Management] screen...................................................................................... 13-3 13.1.4 Menu of [Color Configuration Management] screen........................................................................ 13-6 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration ........................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.1 Set the Name of Color Configuration............................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.2 Select the Profile Set ....................................................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.3 Set the Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting. .................................................... 13-7 13.2.4 Set the Color Conversion Option..................................................................................................... 13-8 13.2.5 Register the Color Configuration ..................................................................................................... 13-9 13.3 Edit the Color Configuration ...................................................................................................... 13-10 13.4 Color Configuration Management............................................................................................. 13-11 13.4.1 Change the Default Color Configuration........................................................................................ 13-11 13.4.2 Copy the Color Configuration ........................................................................................................ 13-11 13.4.3 Delete the Color Configuration ...................................................................................................... 13-11 13.4.4 Import (Register) / Export the Color Configuration ........................................................................ 13-12 13.4.5 Reset the Default Color Configuration ........................................................................................... 13-13 13.5 Create the Profile Set ................................................................................................................. 13-14 13.5.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-15 13.5.2 Specify the Profile Set Name......................................................................................................... 13-15 13.5.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 13-16 13.5.4 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 13-17 13.5.5 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 13-19 13.5.6 Confirm the Calculation Result ...................................................................................................... 13-19 13.5.7 Select the Task .............................................................................................................................. 13-20 13.5.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 13-20 13.5.9 Complete the Profile Set ................................................................................................................ 13-21 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set................................................................................. 13-22 13.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-23 13.6.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination ............................................................................... 13-24 13.6.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 13-25 13.6.4 Recalculate Profile Set................................................................................................................... 13-26 13.6.5 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 13-26 13.6.6 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 13-28 13.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 13-29 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set................................................................................... 13-30 13.7.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-30 13.7.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination ............................................................................... 13-31 13.7.3 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 13-32 13.7.4 Complete the Profile Set ................................................................................................................ 13-35 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set............................................................................. 13-36 13.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-36 13.8.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination ............................................................................... 13-37 13.8.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve............................................................................................ 13-38 13.8.4 Complete the Profile Set ................................................................................................................ 13-42 13.9 Profile Set Management............................................................................................................. 13-43 13.9.1 Export Profiles................................................................................................................................ 13-43 13.9.2 Copy the Profile Set ....................................................................................................................... 13-44 13.9.3 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 13-45 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-6 13.9.4 Refresh the List (Reload)................................................................................................................ 13-46 13.9.5 Confirm the Detail Info ................................................................................................................... 13-46 13.9.6 Change the Profile Set Information................................................................................................ 13-47 13.9.7 Export the Profile Set ..................................................................................................................... 13-48 13.10 Environmental Setting ................................................................................................................ 13-49 14 Other Functions 14.1 Re-login on Connection Switching.............................................................................................. 14-2 14.2 List Operation................................................................................................................................ 14-3 14.2.1 Sorting by List Item.......................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2.2 Move of Row.................................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2.3 Display/Non-Display List Item.......................................................................................................... 14-3 14.3 Print Set Up Information............................................................................................................... 14-4 14.4 Suspend and Restart .................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.1 Suspend the Operation.................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.2 Restart the Suspended Operation ................................................................................................... 14-5 15 Troubleshooting 15.1 Cannot start Color Centro............................................................................................................ 15-2 15.2 Cannot Adjust Color ..................................................................................................................... 15-3 16 Appendix 16.1 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 16-2 16.2 Index............................................................................................................................................... 16-6 1 Introduction ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-2 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 Composition of User's Guide Printed manual Overview [Operation Quick Guide] This guide mainly describes how to use frequently used functions. Please refer to this guide for quick comprehension of various features available on the machine. [Safety Information] This guide describes trademarks, licenses and copyrights concerning this machine. It also provides precautions and requests that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this guide before using the machine. User's guide CD manuals Overview [User's Guide - Copier] This guide describes an outline of the machine and copy operations. • Configuration and specifications of the main body and options • Turning on/off the machine • Paper information • Making a basic copy and setting procedures • Supplies, disposals, and handling of output paper • Quality adjustments • Applications, output settings, and job list • Troubleshooting [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference] This guide provides you with detailed information on machine management and how to customize the machine according to your daily use. • Both Sides Adjustment, Curl Adjustment • Controller settings • Adjustment, Utility Menu Screen • Network settings, PageScope Web Connection • Web Utilities [User's Guide - Printer (IC-601)] This guide describes the setting of the printer driver and utility tool. • Adobe PS driver • PostScript3 Plug-in driver • Web Connection [User's Guide - ColorCentro (IC-601)] This guide describes the management of color when using IC-601 image controller. • Calibration • Tone Curve Adjustment • Adjusting spot color • Setting alternative color • Profile Management • Setting color defaults • Managing color configuration ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide - Network Scanner (IC-306)] This guide describes the operation of the IC-306 network scanner function. • Scan to E-Mail • Scan to HDD • Scan to FTP • Scan to SMB • Scan to Queue [User's Guide - Network Scanner (IC-601)] This guide describes the operation of the IC-601 network scanner function. • Scan to E-Mail • Scan to HDD • Scan to FTP • Scan to SMB [User's Guide - Security] This guide describes the security functions. Please refer to this guide for how to use the Enhanced Security mode, and for detailed machine operation in Enhanced Security mode. User's guide CD manuals Overview ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. Safety Information 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check symbol indicates that it is a precondition for steps or information that you should be noted before performing the steps. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. % The relevant image is shown. The operation procedures are described using instruction. ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 d Reference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text Key names, part names, product names and option names on the Control Panel are indicated in bold text. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Paper size The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Paper indication w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview of the Color Centro ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-2 2.1 Color Centro 2 2 Overview of the Color Centro This chapter describes the overview and connection environment of "Color Centro" that is an attached utility to the image controller to provide the printer function of the main body. 2.1 Color Centro Color Centro is an application which allows you to execute color management of the image controller. For details of the image controller, refer to "User's Guide - Printer (IC-601)". 2.1.1 Roles of Color Centro Color Centro is an application to realize suitable color printing of the main body, which edits and manages some profiles and color tables which are used for translation processes and color adjustment in the image controller. This application enables to use the following 7 functions; Function Description 1 Calibration You can create an adjustment data for the main body by measuring its output condition. 2 Tone Curve Adjustment You can manually adjust the output density against the input density instructions for each color of CMYK. 3 Spot Color You can manually adjust hue of Spot Color (Special color or named color) with the density of CMYK. 4 Alternative Color You can manually adjust the hue of specific RGB or CMYK color with the density of CMYK. You can also select an alternative color from Spot Color. 5 Profile Management You can copy, create, edit, import or export profiles of 5 types. 6 Color Default Settings You can manually set Color Default Settings of RGB, CMYK, and others. You can also confirm the default color configuration. 7 Color Configuration Management You can make and edit Color Configurations or Profile Sets. ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-3 2.1 Color Centro 2 Image Controller Main Body Job RIP Printing Processing Print Out Color Conversions Profile Spot Color Alternative Color Color Adjustments Calibration Tone Curve Adjustment Processing Color Centro + Color Default Settings + Color Configuration Management ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-4 2.2 Control Panel Layout 2 2.2 Control Panel Layout No. Item Description 1 Keypad Enters values for various settings, including print quantity and password. 2 Reset Restores machine to the initial settings. 3 Power LED Lights up in red when the main power switch is turned on, then turns green when the sub power switch is turned on. 4 Data LED Flashes while receiving print data. 5 Interrupt Stops copying/printing/scanning in progress to allow a simple copying job. 6 Stop Ceases the machine operation; deletes the stored memory. 7 Proof Copy Displays the adjustments made on the Quality Adjustment Screen to check. 8 Start Activates various machine operations. 9 Start LED Lights in blue when machine operation is available. It turns orange if any operation cannot be started. 10 C (Clear) Allows change in entered numeric value. 11 Access Sets the machine to allow the operation only when a user/account name and password are entered, if user authentication or account track function is activated. 12 Mode Check Displays settings of the print job in progress or those already set to check. ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-5 2.2 Control Panel Layout 2 7 CAUTION Do not press hard or pointed objects against the touch panel on the control panel. - Otherwise, the glass may be scrached or break and you may be injured. Use fingers to operate the touch panel. 7 CAUTION Stop the operation immediately when the Service Call Screen is displayed and copying cannot be continued any more. - Otherwise, an unexpected trouble may be caused. Write down the report code as stated on the second line of the message, turn off the sub power switch and main power switch in this order, and then disconnect from the power socket. Contact your service representative and inform them of the report code. NOTICE Be sure not to turn off the main power switch in usual operation. Be sure not to turn off the main power switch before turning off the sub power switch. Be sure not to turn off the main power switch while the following messages are displayed after turning off the sub power switch. [Cooling in progress / Power will be off when completed] [Power off in progress / Please do not turn the main power switch off] Turning off the main power switch with these messages displayed may cause serious machine trouble such as toner fixation. d Reference Refer to User's Guide (POD Administrator's Reference) for how to turn off the power. 13 Utility/Counter Displays the Utility Menu Screen and various counters. 14 Mode Memory Registers/Recalls the desired copy settings. Also recalls previous job settings. 15 Accessibility Adjusts the response time in touch panel and control panel key operation. 16 Help Displays the Help Screen that provides information on how to operate the screen currently displayed on the touch panel. Also provides information on various supplies and disposals when pressed with the Machine Screen displayed. 17 Brightness adjustment dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch panel by being turned. 18 Power Save Enables temporary use of the machine when the Power Save LED is lit. Also, activates power-saving mode when pressed while the machine is inactive. 19 Power Save LED Lights when any power-saving mode is activated, or machine power is off due to the timer function. 20 Touch panel Displays various screens to allow the function setting. No. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-6 2.3 Operating environment 2 2.3 Operating environment This section describes the system requirements for using Color Centro and the interfaces used for connection. 2.3.1 Connectable computers and operating system Make sure that the computer to be connected meets the following conditions. Windows 2.3.2 Interfaces used for connection To connect Color Centro to the image controller, use the Ethernet via a network connection. It supports 1000Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 10Base-T standards. Connection diagram The printer cables are connected to the Ethernet port of the image controller. Back side of the machine Operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008/7 (including 64 bit version) CPU Intel Pentium4 3GHz or more HDD 3GB or more Memory 1GB or more / Memory capacity as recommended for your operating system Sufficient memory resource is required for your operating system and the applications to be used. Drive CD-ROM drive Display 1024x768 pixels or more ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-7 2.3 Operating environment 2 1. Ethernet port (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T) 1 ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-8 2.4 Setup procedure 2 2.4 Setup procedure To use Color Centro, you must complete the setup in advance. The setup refers to a series of procedures for connecting the image controller to the computer and installing Color Centro to the computer. Perform the setup using the following procedures. 1 Connect this machine to the computer. 2 Check that the computer to be used is connected to the network. 3 Specify the IP address of the image controller. 4 Install Color Centro. % Specify the network port for the printer driver according to the connection method or protocol. Reference - When you execute the calibration using the measurement instrument, install the driver of the measurement instrument. After installing, execute the measurement test and confirm that there is no problem on the connection. d Reference For details on the connectable interfaces, refer to page 2-6. For details on the network settings and confirmation of IP address of the image controller, refer to [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference]. 3 Precautions for Installation ColorCentro (IC-601) 3-2 3.1 Introduction 3 3 Precautions for Installation The following describes the information necessary to install Color Centro. 3.1 Introduction This chapter describes the information you should keep in mind before installing Color Centro. Before the procedure for installing Color Centro, confirm the operating system of your computer and the network environment. 3.2 Installer You can confirm the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0, which is necessary for the start of Color Centro, by using this installer. When the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is not installed, the installation screen of the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is displayed at the installation of Color Centro. In this case, install the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 following the instruction on the screen. 3.2.1 Operating environment of the installer Reference - Installing the driver to Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008/7-based computers requires the administrator authority. - The installer supports installation in both IPv4/IPv6 environments of Windows Vista/Server 2008//7 only. Note that it does not support [Secure Printing] (IPPS) in Windows Vista/Server 2008/7 and [Internet Printing] (IPP) in the IPv6 environment. 3.2.2 Settings of this machine Before you can use this machine through the network connection, you must configure the network settings for this machine. Operating system Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later) Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 or later) Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows XP Professional e64 Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Server 2003, Standard e64 Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Server 2003, Enterprise e64 Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Vista Business (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Vista Enterprise (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Vista Ultimate (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Standard (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Standard without Hyper-V (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Enterprise without Hyper-V(Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows 7 Professional * Windows 7 Enterprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * • * Supports 32-bit (e86)/64-bit (e64) environment. CPU Intel Pentium4 3GHz or more HDD 3GB or more Memory 1GB or more / Memory capacity as recommended for your operating system Sufficient memory resource is required for your operating system and the applications to be used. Display 1024x768 or more ColorCentro (IC-601) 3-3 3.2 Installer 3 TCP/IP Settings for the machine In [TCP/IP Settings] of this machine, specify the IP address. d Reference For details on TCP/IP Settings of this machine, refer to [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference]. 4 Installation of Color Centro ColorCentro (IC-601) 4-2 4.1 Introduction 4 4 Installation of Color Centro This chapter describes the procedure for installing Color Centro using the installer. 4.1 Introduction Before installing Color Centro, confirm the description of page 3-2. 4.2 Installing Color Centro 1 Insert the installation CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. % Make sure that the installer starts, and then go to Step 2. % If the installer does not start, double-click [Setup.exe] on the CD-ROM, and then go to Step 2. % When installing the driver on a Windows Vista/Server 2008/7-based computer, click [Allow] or [Continue] if the [User Account Control] window appears. 2 Select a language, and then click [OK]. 3 Click [Next]. [License Agreement] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 4-3 4.2 Installing Color Centro 4 4 Confirm the content. When you agree all the terms, click [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next]. % If you disagree, you will not be able to install the driver. % In the language display box, you can change the language used with the license agreement as required. 5 Select the destination folder and click [Next]. % By default, Color Centro is installed to C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\Color Centro. % If you want to change the destination folder, click [Change] and select the desired location on the displayed screen and click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 4-4 4.2 Installing Color Centro 4 6 Click [Install]. 7 Click [Finish]. The installation is complete. % After completing installation, the short cut icon appears on the desktop. 5 Basic Information ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-2 5.1 Launch Color Centro 5 5 Basic Information This chapter describes launch procedure, exit procedure, and screens of Color Centro. 5.1 Launch Color Centro This section describes how to launch Color Centro. To use Color Centro, it is necessary to connect to the image controller. You can not launch Color Centro without connecting to the image controllers. By connecting to the image controller, Color Centro can acquire the information of the main body. You can switch the connection when there are two or more image controllers. 5.1.1 Login To launch Color Centro, login procedure is necessary first. 0 To login, the IP address and the port number are necessary. When the port number is unknown, confirm the JSP settings of the image controller. (default: 30081) 0 Confirm that the image controller can communicate. 0 Color Centro is the Java Application. When the Java application is blocked by the firewall, [Windows Security Alert] screen is displayed. In this case, select the option corresponding to your network environment, and click [Allow access] to allow the communication by Java application on your network. 1 Select [Start] ->[All Programs] -> [KONICA MINOLTA] -> [Color Centro] -> [KONICA MINOLTA Color Centro]. % Or double-click the short cut key on the Desktop screen. [Login] screen and [Launcher] screen appears. % [Launcher] screen is not available until login is completed. 2 Enter the IP address and the port number (30081 - 30090) of the image controller to which you want to connect Color Centro into [Destination] of [Login] screen, and click [OK]. Color Centro launches, and [Launcher] becomes available. % If the IP address is 192.168.0.1 and the port number is 30081, separate the IP address and the port number with a colon, and enter "192.168.0.1:30081". ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-3 5.1 Launch Color Centro 5 % You can select the IP address and the port number which were used before, from [Current Destination]. The input number is kept even after exiting Color Centro. % When you have connected to the image controller already, the IP address and the port number of the image controller you connected are displayed on [Current Destination]. % When you click [Cancel], the login process is canceled and you can't start Color Centro. % When you click [Help], the [Help] screen appears. d Reference For how to operate to switch the image controller, refer to page 14-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-4 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 5.2 Screens of Color Centro This section describes the screens of Color Centro. 5.2.1 [Launcher] screen This section describes [Launcher] screen which appears after launching Color Centro. [Launcher] screen is the top screen which displays the screen to use the functions of Color Centro. Menu of [Launcher] screen The menu items of the [Launcher] screen are as follows; Item Description [Calibration] When you click, [Calibration] screen to execute the calibration appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Tone Curve Adjustment] When you click, [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen to adjust the tone curve appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Spot Color] When you click, [Spot Color] screen to adjust the spot color appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Alternative Color] When you click, [Alternative Color] screen to adjust the alternative color appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Profile Management] When you click, [Profile Management] screen to manage the profiles appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Default Settings] When you click, [Color Default Settings] screen to set the color default settings appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Configuration Management] When you click, [Color Configuration Management] screen to manage the Color Configuration appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] Displays [Login] screen. You can connect to the image controller which is different from the image controller currently connected. [Print Set Up Information] You can print the settings of the image controller currently connected. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-4. [Exit] Closes Color Centro. For how to operate it, refer to page 5-9. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-5 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 5.2.2 Function Screens This section describes the following 7 screens displayed from [Launcher] screen. - [Calibration] screen - [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen - [Spot Color] screen - [Alternative Color] screen - [Profile Management] screen - [Color Default Settings] screen - [Color Configuration Management] screen These screens can be displayed at the same time, but the multiple screens of the same function can't be displayed at the same time. The [Launcher] screen is displayed while these screens are displayed. Every function screen is launched from [Launcher] screen. When you want to close these screens, select [File] menu - [Close], respectively. [Calibration] screen Using this screen, you can execute the calibration of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Edit] [Calibration] Displays [Calibration] screen to execute the calibration. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Tone Curve Adjustment] Displays [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen to adjust the tone curve. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Spot Color] Displays [Spot Color] screen to adjust the spot color. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Alternative Color] Displays [Alternative Color] screen to adjust the alternative color. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Default Settings] Displays [Color Default Settings] screen to set the color default settings. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Configuration Management] Displays [Color Configuration Management] screen to manage the Color Configuration. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Profile Management] Displays [Profile Management] screen to manage the profiles. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. Menu Menu Items Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-6 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen Using this screen, you can adjust the tone curve processing of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Spot Color] screen Using this screen, you can adjust the spot color table and spot color of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-7 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 [Alternative Color] screen Using this screen, you can adjust the alternative color table of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Profile Management] screen Using this screen, you can manage the color profiles. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-8 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 [Color Default Settings] screen Using this screen, you can set the color default settings used by the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Configuration Management] screen Using this screen, you can manage the combination of profiles of several types as the Profile Set used by the image controller, and you can manage the color settings used by the image controller as the Color Configuration. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-9 5.3 Exit from Color Centro 5 5.3 Exit from Color Centro This section describes how to exit from Color Centro. The procedures to exit from Color Centro are as follows; % On [Launcher] screen, select [File] menu - [Exit]. Color Centro is terminated. % Similar operation can be done when you click [x] of the [Launcher] screen. % The connection of the image controller currently connected is terminated. % If function screens launched from [Launcher] screen are under use, the confirmation message appears. In this case, click [OK] if you want to close all the screens. 6 How to Use Color Centro ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-2 6.1 Color Setting of the Main Body 6 6 How to Use Color Centro 6.1 Color Setting of the Main Body For proper use of Color Centro, this section describes the color settings of the main body. The color printing of the main body is processed according to the adjustment which is executed by both of the printer engine and the image controller. The adjustment on the printer engine mainly functions as the outputting adjustment for the paper, but the adjustment on the image controller functions, not only as the adjustment related to the data translation process, but also as the color settings related to the entire system. Color Centro is an application which enables you to execute the color settings for the image controller which functions as mentioned above. 6.1.1 Color Settings Color Centro connects to the image controller and allows you to execute the color settings for the image controller. By using Color Centro, you can execute the color settings on the following 7 screens: - [Calibration] screen - [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen - [Spot Color] screen - [Alternative Color] screen - [Profile Management] screen - [Color Default Settings] screen - [Color Configuration Management] screen In those, the Calibration is the base of various color settings. This is because it measures the output condition of the main body to set the data this becomes the reference value of the entire system for the color printings. It also readjusts the main body, comparing with the reference value. In the following cases, the color settings by use of Color Centro are indispensable; - when the main body is installed - when the paper is changed - when the color management policy is changed (e.g. from sRGB to AdobeRGB etc) To consistently maintain proper color output, daily management is necessary. And, when the special hue is used, the adjustment for individual hue is necessary. For detailed information on daily management, refer to page 6-3. For detailed information on the adjustment for individual hue, refer topage 6-4. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-3 6.2 Daily Management 6 6.2 Daily Management Daily color management is necessary to consistently maintain proper color output. In the following cases, you should execute the color settings using Color Centro. - 30 minutes after turning on the power of the main body in the morning. - Every time 1000 sheets are output. - The screen settings or paper type have changed. - When it is worried that the change of environment conditions has a bad influence on hue. - Before output whose hue is very important. Especially, you should execute a calibration process at least once a day. We recommend executing any of workflows described on page 6-5 or combination of those for daily management of color settings. 6.2.1 Calibration on Color Centro The calibration is a function to specify the data which become the basis values for the entire system about color printing and also to adjust the basis value. Therefore, calibration is one of the main operations of daily maintenance. There are two methods for calibration of the main body. One is the automatic calibration by the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body. The other is the manual calibration using Color Centro and the instrument. When you print the job in which the color accuracy is important, or you change the paper type, set the reference value of the entire system by calibration. When the RU option isn't installed to the main body, execute the calibration by Color Centro. When it is installed, select the calibration method. In addition, fine adjustment of the reference value is necessary along with the time passage. Determining the necessity of the fine adjustment of the reference value from the view point of the actual printed color, execute the calibration. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-4 6.3 Adjustment for individual Hues 6 6.3 Adjustment for individual Hues Color Centro can execute not only the color settings for the entire system, but also adjustment for individual hues. Color Centro allows you to execute the following adjustments; - The Tone Curve Adjustment: You can adjust the input/output density curve per each color of CMYK. - Spot Color: You can adjust the conversion of special color. - Alternative Color: You can adjust the conversion of alternative color. 6.3.1 Tone Curve Adjustment The Tone Curve Adjustment is adjustment for output density curve of each color of CMYK. This function of Color Centro enables to adjust the brightness and the contrast for the entire image. Operation of adjustment can be done with dragging the slider or the point of curve. You can operate viewing the preview of the adjustment result. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. 6.3.2 Spot Color In the image controller, some spot color tables, "DIC", "CF", and "HKS" are registered at factory shipping. Use of the Spot Color Adjustment function of Color Centro enables to create the new spot color table, duplicate the registered spot color table, and edit it. By this function, to replace the spot color which is specified by the application with CMYK values which Color Centro defines is enabled and the outputting is executed. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. 6.3.3 Alternative Color One alternative color table per color (RGB color/CMYK color) is stored in the image controller. The alternative color table replaces the specific RGB color/CMYK color within job with CMYK color (alternative color). Use of the Color Centro enables to set and adjust the alternative color table in the image controller. Color Centro also enables to select the alternative color from the spot color. By this function, you can adopt the spot color to the alternative color as the processing of the image controller when the spot color can't be specified by the application. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-5 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro 6 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro This section describes color setting workflows by Color Centro. To consistently maintain proper color output, we recommend to execute any of the following workflows or combination of those for daily management of color settings. 6.4.1 Color Settings by using Default Profile The procedure of the simplest workflow is below: In this workflow, color setting is executed by using the default profile registered into the image controller at factory shipping. 1 Set the default profile. % Use the profile registered into the image controller at factory shipping. If you create a new profile, the measurement instrument is necessary. % The default profile is set by using Color Default Settings function or Color Configuration Management function. % For detailed information of Color Default Setting function, refer to page 7-2. % For detailed information of Color Configuration Management function, refer to page 7-2. 2 Execute the calibration. % When the main body has a scanner part, you can execute the calibration using its scanner part. Unless, prepare the measurement instrument and use it. % For detailed information of Calibration function, refer to page 7-2. 3 Execute the fine adjustment using Tone Curve Adjustment function, Spot Color Adjustment function, Alternative Adjustment function, etc. % For detailed information of Tone Curve Adjustment function, refer to page 7-2. % For detailed information of Spot Color Adjustment function, refer to page 7-2. % For detailed information of Alternative Adjustment function, refer to page 7-2. 4 Repeat above steps as needed. The default color settings which are set on this function are applied to the job without settings by the printer driver and to the direct printing job. 6.4.2 Color Settings by using the Color Configuration Management Function The procedure of a recommended workflow, which makes use of functions of Color Centro efficiently, is below: This workflow needs the measurement instrument. Workflow Description Color Settings by using Default Profile This is the simplest workflow. If you don’t have much knowledge about profile, we recommend to use this workflow. For detailed information, refer to page 6-5. Color Settings by using the Color Configuration Management Function This is a recommended workflow which makes use of functions of Color Centro efficiently. You can execute the proper color settings with an easy procedure. For detailed information, refer to page 6-5. Color Settings by using Functions of both Profile Management and Color Default Settings This is a workflow which is to examine proper setting as setting the individual profile using functions of Color Centro. When you get proper result of the examination, we recommend that you shift to a workflow described in page 6-5 to execute the color settings more efficiently. For detailed information, refer to page 6-6. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-6 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro 6 1 Execute the calibration with the measurement instrument, and register the calibration data into the image controller. % For detailed information on how to select the calibration method, refer topage 7-2. % Here, execute the calibration as the preparation of creation of the profile. When the fine adjustment is necessary along with the time passage, execute the calibration each time. 2 Adjust the color setting of the image controller using a profile set in Color Configuration Management function. % You can create or edit profile, Profile Set and Color Configuration as required. % For detailed information on how to confirm the name of Default Color Configuration, refer topage 7-2. By Using Color Configuration Management function, it is useful that you can create a Profile Set that collects profiles which correspond to each paper type, and Color Configuration which consolidates several Profile Sets. "Select Nearest Profile Set", one of the Color Configuration Management functions, allows to select the Profile Set easily. 6.4.3 Color Settings by using Functions of both Profile Management and Color Default Settings The procedure of a workflow, which is to examine proper setting as setting an individual profile using functions of Color Centro, is below: This workflow needs the measurement instrument. 1 Execute the calibration with the measurement instrument, and register the calibration data into the image controller. % For detailed information of Calibration function, refer to page 7-2. % Here, execute the calibration as the preparation of creation of the profile. When the fine adjustment is necessary along with the time passage, execute the calibration each time. 2 Create necessary profile using Profile Management function. % For detailed information of Profile Management function, refer to page 7-2. 3 Set the default of the color settings of the image controller by selecting created profile in Color Default Setting function. % For detailed information of Color Default Setting function, refer to page 7-2. 4 Repeat above steps as needed. When you repeat the process of both profile creation and default color setting and get proper color settings, you can execute the color settings efficiently by setting the Color Configuration and Profile Set using Color Configuration Management function. We recommend that you shift to a workflow described inpage 6-5 to execute the color settings more efficiently. 7 Calibration ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-2 7.1 Outline of Calibration 7 7 Calibration 7.1 Outline of Calibration Use of the Calibration function of Color Centro enables to print the measuring chart, measure the chart by measuring instrument, create the calibration data, and register the calibration data to the image controller. The image controller can save one calibration data. To maintain consistent color printing, it is necessary to register the adequate calibration data according to the environment and the condition of the main body. Executing adequate calibration increases the stability of color printing of the main body on print job. The calibration is a function to specify the data which become the reference values for the entire system about color printing and also to adjust the reference value. Therefore, calibration is one of the main operations of daily maintenance. 7.1.1 [Calibration] screen The calibration function of Color Centro uses [Calibration] screen. [Calibration] screen appears by clicking [Calibration] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The [Calibration] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [Use "Color Density Control" (RU)] When it is checked, it gives priority to the use of the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body for calibration. When you check this, make settings on the main body beforehand. For manual calibration, remove the check mark. [1. Instrument] Select [Scan Calibration], [i1Pro], [i1iSis No Filter], [i1iSis (UV Filter)], or [Spectrolino]. [2. Chart Output] - [Output] Executes chart printing. [3. Chart Measurement] - [Measure] Executes chart measurement. [Display Mode] - [Measurement Result] When [Measurement Result] is checked, the result curve of measurement is displayed on curve view area. When both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered] are checked, both curves appear. When there is no check mark on both, no curve appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-3 7.1 Outline of Calibration 7 List Items The list items of the measurement result list on the [Calibration] screen are as follows; List Operations The list of the [Calibration] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. 7.1.2 Menu of [Calibration] screen The menu items of the [Calibration] screen are as follows; 7.1.3 Basic operation of [Calibration] screen This section describes basic operation of [Calibration] screen. 1 Select the calibration method. % For detailed information on how to select the calibration method, refer topage 7-5. 2 Select the instrument. % For detailed information on how to select the instrument, refer to page 7-6. 3 Print the measurement chart. % For detailed information on how to print the measurement chart, refer to page 7-7. 4 Execute chart measurement. If necessary, execute remeasurement of chart. % For detailed information on how to execute chart measurement, refer to page 7-8. [Display Mode] - [Registered] When [Registered] is checked, the registered curve in the image controller is displayed on curve view area. When both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered] are checked, both curves appear. When there is no check mark on both, no curve appears. (curve view area) According to settings of [Display Mode], the result curve and/or the registered curve is/are displayed on curve view area. (measurement result list) Displays the measurement result list. [Create] Registers the measurement result in the image controller. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description Item Description [No.] Displays the number of the measurement result list. (measurement date/time) Displays the measurement date/time. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reset] Resets the calibration data in the image controller to the settings of factory shipping. Discards the current measurement result and settings displayed on this screen, and resets the screen. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-4 7.1 Outline of Calibration 7 % For detailed information on how to execute remeasurement of chart, refer to page 7-9. 5 Confirm the measurement result. % For detailed information on how to confirm the measurement result, refer topage 7-10 6 Register the calibration data. % For detailed information on how to save, refer to page 7-12. 7 If necessary, reset the [Calibration] screen. % For detailed information on how to reset, refer to page 7-13. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-5 7.2 Select the Calibration Method 7 7.2 Select the Calibration Method There are two methods for calibration of the main body. One is the automatic calibration by the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body. The other is the manual calibration using Color Centro and the instrument. When you print the job in which the color accuracy is important, or you change the paper type, set the reference value of the entire system by calibration. When the RU option isn't installed to the main body, execute the calibration by Color Centro. When it is installed, select the calibration method. In addition, fine adjustment of the reference value is necessary along with the time passage. Determining the necessity of the fine adjustment of the reference value from the view point of the actual printed color, execute the calibration. This section describes how to calibrate using the instrument on Color Centro. Calibration on Color Centro When you use the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body, you can't execute calibration with the instrument because the internal sensor generates calibration data automatically. When you set both of the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body and instrument at the same time, outputting might be different with those you expected. Therefore, set as follows; 1 Set the main body function of the color density control to OFF, and remove the check from [Use "Color Density Control" (RU)] on [Calibration] screen. [1. Instrument] becomes available, and you can execute the calibration with instrument. % At the first display of [Calibration] screen, [Use "Color Density Control" (RU)] is not checked. % The last status of this check mark is succeeded to the next launch of this screen. % Go to the step described on page 7-6. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-6 7.3 Select the Instrument 7 7.3 Select the Instrument This section describes how to select the instrument for measurement. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 1 From [Calibration] screen - [1. Instrument], select [Scan Calibration], [i1Pro], [i1iSis No Filter], [i1iSis (UV Filter)], or [Spectrolino]. % When you select [Scan Calibration], you can execute the calibration with the scanner of the main body. In this case, [Output], [Measure ], and [Register to controller] are not available. In addition, [Display Mode] becomes [Registered] and you can't change it. % When you have connected to the main body on which the scanner part isn't installed, [Scan Calibration] is not available. % When you use Spectroscan or i1iO, remove the measurement head from its stage. Then, you can use it as [Spectroline] or [i1Pro]. % Go to the step described on page 7-7. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-7 7.4 Print the Chart 7 7.4 Print the Chart To execute calibration with the instrument, the chart (measurement patch chart) corresponding to the selected instrument is necessary. This section describes how to print the chart. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 1 Click [2. Chart Output] - [Output]. [Print Chart] screen appears. 2 Specify [Paper Tray], [Paper Size], and [Copies]. % According to the instrument, adequate [Paper Size] differs. % When you select [Spectrolino] or [i1Pro] as the instrument, select [A3] or [Tabloid]. % When you select [i1iSis No Filter] or [i1iSis (UV Filter)], select [A3], [A4], [Tabloid] or [Letter]. % Specify the number (from [1] to [5]) in [Copies]. 3 Select [Paper Type] and [Screen Setting]. % For [Paper Type], you can select [Plain Paper], [Fine], [Color Specific], [Coated GL], [Coated ML], [Coated GO], or [Coated MO]. % From [Screen Setting], you can select [Dot1], [Dot2], [Line1], [Line2], or [Stochastic]. 4 Click [Print]. Chart printing is executed. % On the chart, Print Date, Output Number of Sets, and No. are printed. % Go to the step described on page 7-8. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-8 7.5 Chart Measurement 7 7.5 Chart Measurement This section describes how to measure the printed chart with the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. 0 You can't change the instrument while measuring. 1 Connect the instrument to your computer. 2 Click [3. Chart Measurement] - [Measure]. [Measurement] screen appears. 3 From [Calibration Target], select the paper type. 4 Click [Start]. Measurement starts. After finishing measurement, the result of measurement is displayed in the list, and patches are colored in the preview area. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [OK] becomes available. % Before measurement, patches are displayed in gray, but after measurement, patches are displayed in color. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. % When you click a color patch of the preview area, the corresponding line is selected in the measurement result list. On the other hand, when you select the line in the measurement result list, the corresponding color patch is selected in the preview area. 5 Click [OK]. [Measurement] screen closes, and [Calibration] screen appears. The measurement result appears in the list of [Calibration] screen. % When you click [Cancel], the measurement result is discarded and [Measurement] screen is closed to return to [Calibration] screen. % The list of [Calibration] screen displays all measurement results, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. % When you execute remeasurement, go to the step described on page 7-9. % When you view the measurement result, go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-9 7.6 Remeasurement 7 7.6 Remeasurement This section describes how to obtain the multiple measurement results with succeeding measurement. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. 0 You can't change the instrument while measuring. 1 Click [3. Chart Measurement] - [Measure]. [Measurement] screen appears. 2 From [Calibration Target], select the paper type. 3 Click [Start]. Measurement starts. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [OK] becomes available. % When you click a color patch of the preview area, the corresponding line is selected in the measurement result list. On the other hand, when you select the line in the measurement result list, the corresponding color patch is selected in the preview area. 4 Click [OK]. [Measurement] screen closes, and [Calibration] screen appears. The measurement result selected on [Measurement] screen appears in the list of [Calibration] screen. % The measurement result is added to the list of [Calibration] screen at each remeasurement. % The measurement results can be recorded up to 10 in the list of [Calibration] screen. % At 11th measurement, the first measurement result is discarded. % When you click [Cancel], the measurement result is discarded and [Measurement] screen is closed to return to [Calibration] screen. % The list of [Calibration] screen displays all measurement results, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. 5 After measurement, click the line of measurement result to adopt from the list. % Go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-10 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result 7 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result All measurement results appear in the list of [Calibration] screen. The list displays all measurement results, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. This section describes how to confirm the measurement result. d Reference For detailed information on how to reset [Calibration] screen, refer to page 7-13. To Confirm the Measurement Result Curve 1 Check [Display Mode] - [Measurement Result]. 2 From the list, select the measurement result of which you want to display curve. The selected measurement result is displayed on the curve view area. % Go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-11 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result 7 To Confirm Registered Curve % Check [Display Mode] - [Registered] when you want to view the registered curve in the image controller. The registered curve in the image controller is displayed on the curve view area. % When both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered] are checked, both curves appear. % When there is no check mark on both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered], no curve appears. % Go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-12 7.8 Register the Calibration Data 7 7.8 Register the Calibration Data The image controller can save one calibration data. The calibration data acquired by measurement can be adopted to the output by registration in the image controller. This section describes how to register the calibration data. 1 From the list of [Calibration] screen, select the measurement result to register. % Measurement results other than the selected one on the [Calibration] screen are discarded when the [Calibration] screen closes. 2 Click [Registration]. Registration in image controller is executed. After completing registration, [Complete] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [Register] from the right click menu on the selected line. 3 Click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-13 7.9 Reset the Calibration Data 7 7.9 Reset the Calibration Data The list displayed on the [Calibration] screen remains, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. This section describes how to reset [Calibration] screen and clear the list of measurement result. 1 From the [File] menu, select [Reset]. The confirmation message appears. 2 Click [OK]. The measurement results are cleared, and the calibration data which was set at factory shipping appears. 8 Tone Curve Adjustment ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-2 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 8 Tone Curve Adjustment 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment The Tone Curve Adjustment is adjustment for output density curve of each color of CMYK. This function of Color Centro enables to adjust the brightness and the contrast for the entire image. Operation of adjustment can be done with dragging the slider or the point of curve. You can operate viewing the preview of the adjustment result. The tone curve can be registered/saved to both of the image controller and computer. The tone curve registered to the image controller can be adopted to the output. You can specify the tone curve to use as default from among registered tone curves when you use "Color Default Settings" function or "Color Configuration Management" function. You can also specify the tone curve to use from the printer driver for each job. 8.1.1 [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen The tone curve adjustment function of Color Centro uses [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen appears by clicking [Tone Curve Adjustment] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (sample image name) The name of sample image selected using [Select Sample] appears at the left box of the [Select Sample]. At the first launching of this screen, "Preset [Human]" appears in there. From subsequent launching, the name of sample image selected before appears. [Select Sample] Displays [Sample Picture] screen, and select sample image. (tone curve name) The name of tone curve loaded using [Load Tone Curve] appears at the left box of the [Load Tone Curve]. [Load Tone Curve] Displays [Tone Curve Management] screen, and select the tone curve to load. You can operate to manage the tone curve on [Tone Curve Management] screen. [Before Adjustment] Displays the image before adjustment. [After Adjustment] Displays the image after adjustment. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-3 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 [<<], [<], [>], and [>>] When multiple images are included in the Hold job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen, click the button to display the first image, the previous image, the next image, and the last image. When you select [Hold] on [Sample Picture], these are available. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [CCW] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to left. [CW] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to right. [Scale Down] Displays the image shrinked. You can scale down the image size until the whole image appears. [Scale Up] Displays the image enlarged. You can scale up the image size selecting the magnification from among 4 levels which are 2, 4, 8, and 16 times. (curve view area) Reflects the setting of [Brightness/Contrast] tab and [Adjust Each Color] tab. You can adjust the tone curve by adding the point on the curve and moving the added point. (vertical axis box) Displays the output density (%) of the selected point on the curve view area. You can specify the value to move the selected point. (horizontal axis box) Displays the input density (%) of the selected point on the curve view area. You can specify the value to move the selected point. [Brightness/Contrast] tab Displays the sheet to adjust brightness and contrast. For detailed information, refer to page 7-10. [Brightness/Contrast] tab [Reset] Discards the current settings of [Brightness/Contrast] tab, and returns to the last saved settings. [Adjust Each Color] tab Displays the sheet to adjust each color. For detailed information, refer to page 7-12. [Adjust Each Color] tab [Reset] Discards the current settings of [Adjust Each Color] tab, and returns to the last saved settings. [Proof Print] Adopts the setting and execute printing to confirm the result of adjustment. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Save] Saves the result of adjustment. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-4 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 8.1.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen The menu items of the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen are as follows; Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [New Tone Curve] Creates the new tone curve. [Tone Curve Management] Displays [Tone Curve Management] screen to select the tone curve which you want to load. You can operate to manage the tone curve on [Tone Curve Management] screen. [Select Sample] Displays [Sample Picture] screen to select sample image. [Proof Print] Adopts the setting and execute printing to confirm the result of adjustment. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [View] [Previous Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the previous page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Next Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the next page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [First Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the first page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Last Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the last page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Rotation (Clockwise)] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to right. [Rotation (Counter clockwise)] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to left. [Scale Up] Displays the image enlarged. You can scale up the image size selecting the magnification from among 4 levels which are 2, 4, 8, and 16 times. [Scale Down] Displays the image shrinked. You can scale down the image size until the whole image appears. [Display only before adjustment] Displays only the image of [Before Adjustment] on the screen. [Display only after adjustment] Displays only the image of [After Adjustment] on the screen. [Display before and after the adjustment] Displays both of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] on the screen. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-5 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 8.1.3 Basic operation of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen This section describes basic operation of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. 1 Select the sample image to confirm the conditions where the tone curve is adopted. % For detailed information on how to select the sample image, refer to page 7-5. 2 Confirm the sample image displayed at [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. % For detailed information on how to confirm the sample image, refer topage 7-7. 3 Load the tone curve to make adjustment. Or, create the new tone curve. % For detailed information on how to load the tone curve, refer topage 7-8. % For detailed information on how to create the tone curve, refer topage 8-12. 4 If necessary, adjust the brightness and the contrast, or set each color adjustment. Or, click on the curve to add the point and drag the added point to adjust the curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the brightness and the contrast, refer topage 7-10. % For detailed information on how to set each color adjustment, refer topage 7-12. % For detailed information on how to operate the point, refer topage 8-16. 5 Save the adjusted tone curve. % For detailed information on how to save, refer to page 8-19. 6 If necessary, execute some management operations for the tone curve. % For detailed information on how to manage, refer to page 8-20. 7 If necessary, reset the tone curve. % For detailed information on how to reset, refer to page 8-23. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-6 8.2 Select Sample Image 8 8.2 Select Sample Image When you adopt the tone curve to the sample image, you can confirm the conditions of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. You can select the image which was set at factory shipping, as the sample image. This section describes how to select the sample image. The sample image is selected on [Sample Picture] screen. 8.2.1 [Sample Picture] screen The [Sample Picture] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [Preset] Allows you to use the image which was set at factory shipping, as a sample image. [Hold (Cont...)] Allows you to use a hold job in the image controller which is connected currently, as the sample. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) (list) According to the selection of [Preset] / [Hold (Cont...)], displays either of the list of images which were set at factory shipping or the list of hold jobs of the image controller which is connected currently. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) (image preview area) Displays the image selected from the list. [<], (input box), [>] When multiple images are included in the Hold job of the image controller, click the button to display the previous image or the next image. Or, displays the image on the preview area when the number of it is entered into the input box. When you select [Hold] on Sample Picture, these are available. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [OK] Uses the selected image as the sample image. [Sample Picture] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. Displays the selected image in [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. [Cancel] Discards the current settings and closes [Sample Picture] screen to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-7 8.2 Select Sample Image 8 8.2.2 Menu of [Sample Picture] screen The menu items of the [Sample Picture] screen are as follows; 8.2.3 Select Sample Image This section describes how to select the sample image. 1 Click [Select Sample] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Sample Picture] screen appears % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Select Sample]. 2 From the list, select the image for use as the sample image. According to the selection, the preview appears. 3 Confirm the image and click [OK]. [Sample Picture] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The name of the sample image appears on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen and the specified image is displayed on [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. % When you click [Cancel], the current settings are discarded and [Sample Picture] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. % When you confirm the image, go to the step described on page 7-7. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Reloads the information of the image controller connected currently. [Cancel] Discards the current settings, and closes the screen. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-8 8.3 Confirm Sample Image 8 8.3 Confirm Sample Image The sample image specified on [Sample Picture] is displayed on [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] of [Tone Curve Adjustment]. The sample images are enlarged/shrinked automatically to display the whole image in the area of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. At this time, the proportion of height and width isn't changed. This section describes how to confirm the sample image displayed on [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. To confirm the image by moving within the preview area % Drag the mouse within the area of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. The preview moves to the direction of dragging within the area of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. % Both preview of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] move at the same time. To confirm the image by rotating the preview % Click [CCW] or [CW]. Both preview of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] rotate to the specified direction. % When you click additionally, those rotate to the specified direction according to additional click times. At this time, the image isn't enlarged/shrinked. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [CCW] or [CW]. To confirm the image by enlarging/shrinking the preview % Click [Scale Up] or [Scale Down]. Both preview of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] are enlarged/shrinked. % []You can scale up the image size selecting the magnification from among 4 levels which are 2, 4, 8, and 16 times. % []You can scale down the image size until the whole image appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Scale Up] or [Scale Down]. % Similar operation can be done when you press [+] key or [-] key on the keyboard. To display/hide images of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] % Select [File] menu - [Display only before adjustment], [Display only after adjustment], or [Display Both]. According to the selection, [Before Adjustment] and/or [After Adjustment] appear(s). After confirming, when you load the tone curve, go to the step described on page 8-9. When you create the new tone curve, go to the step described on page 8-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-9 8.4 Load the Tone Curve 8 8.4 Load the Tone Curve In the image controller, there is the tone curve registered at factory shipping. You can also register the tone curve which you adjusted on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. Color Centro can load these tone curves and also make adjustment. The tone curve registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the tone curve registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate, refer to page 8-20. This section describes how to load the tone curve. You can select the tone curve to load on [Tone Curve Management] screen. 8.4.1 [Tone Curve Management] screen [Tone Curve Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (tree view) Displays the places where the tone curve are saved ([Controller], [Local], and [Network]) in the tree format. (list) According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved tone curves. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected tone curve from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Delete] Deletes the tone curve selected from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the tone curve which is selected from the list. [Export]/[Register] Exports the selected tone curve on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. Registers the tone curve selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Open] Loads the selected tone curve on the list to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Cancel] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-10 8.4 Load the Tone Curve 8 List Items The list items of the measurement result list on the [Tone Curve Management] screen are as follows; When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red "@" mark is added before the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. List Operations The list of the [Tone Curve Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Tone Curve Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Tone Curve Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]). 8.4.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Management] screen The menu items of the [Tone Curve Management] screen are as follows; Item Description [File Name] Displays the saved file name of the tone curve when [Local] or [Network] is selected on the tree view. [Tone Curve Name] Displays the tone curve name. [Created Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the new tone curve was created. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the tone curve was updated. [Memo] Displays the memo which was set to the tone curve. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Sort] Sorts the content of the list by the selected list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the torn curve which is selected from the list. [Delete] Deletes the tone curve selected from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected tone curve from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Export] Exports the selected tone curve on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Create] Registers the tone curve selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-11 8.4 Load the Tone Curve 8 8.4.3 Load the Tone Curve This section describes how to load the tone curve. The tone curve registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the tone curve registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate, refer to page 8-20. 1 Click [Load Tone Curve] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Tone Curve Management] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Tone Curve Management]. 2 From the tree view, select the place to save the tone curve. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the tone curve to load. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Open]. [Tone Curve Management] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment ] screen. Selected tone curve is loaded and the settings appear to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. % When you click [Cancel], [Tone Curve Management] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. % When you adjust the tone curve, go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-12 8.5 Create the New Tone Curve 8 8.5 Create the New Tone Curve This section describes how to create the new tone curve. 1 Select [File] menu - [New Tone Curve] on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. On the left of [Load Tone Curve], "New" appears. % The name of the new tone curve is set at saving. % Go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-13 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast 8 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast You can adjust the tone curve using brightness/contrast adjustment, each color adjustment, and curve view on [Torn Curve Adjustment] screen. The result of adjustment is reflected to the preview area immediately. As for the tone curve adjustment, it is efficient to adjust the brightness/contrast of all colors at first, and adjust each color next. This section describes how to adjust the brightness/contrast of the tone curve. 8.6.1 [Brightness/Contrast] tab The brightness/contrast adjustment uses [Brightness/Contrast] tab of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The [Brightness/Contrast] tab is composed as follows; The result of adjustment of [Brightness/Contrast] can be adjusted additionally by operations to points on the curve in the curve view area of [Tone Curve Adjustment]. For detailed information on how to operate the point, refer topage 8-16. Item Description [Brightness] slider Adjusts the brightness by moving the slider to left/right. [Brightness] box Specifies the value to apply as the brightness. [Contrast] slider Adjusts the contrast by moving the slider to left/right. [Contrast] box Specifies the value to apply as the contrast. [Undo] Sets [Brightness] box and [Contrast] box set to "0", and resets the settings of [Brightness/Contrast] tab. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-14 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast 8 8.6.2 Brightness/Contrast Adjustment This section describes how to adjust with [Brightness/Contrast] tab. The brightness adjustment function is to adjust the tone curve by changing the middle point value of the brightness of the entire image. The brightness adjustment is the adjustment of the output value at base point where the input value (horizontal axis) in curve view area is 50%. When the slider is moved to the right (when the input value to the input box is large) the images is made brighter, and when the slider is moved to the left (when the input value to the input box is small) the image is made darker. The contrast adjustment function is to adjust the gradation for the bright part and the dark part of the entire image. The contrast adjustment is the adjustment of the output value at base point where the input values (horizontal axis) in curve view area are 25% and 75%. When the slider is moved to the right (when the input value to the input box is large) the contrast is made stronger, and when the slider is moved to the left (when the input value to the input box is small) the contrast is made weaker. The adjustment using [Brightness/Contrast] tab adjusts each color of CMYK collectively. For detailed information on how to set each color adjustment, refer topage 7-12. 1 Click [Brightness/Contrast] tab on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Brightness/Contrast] tab appears. 2 Drag the [Brightness] slider to left/right. You can also specify by entering the value (from "-25" to "25") into [Brightness] box. The value of the adjustment is reflected to curve view area and to preview of [After Adjustment]. 3 Drag and move the [Contrast] slider to left/right. You can also specify by entering the value (from "-25" into "25") to [Contrast] box. The value of the adjustment is reflected to curve view area and to preview of [After Adjustment]. 4 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 2 and step 3 as required. % When you adjust each color, go to the step described on page 7-12. % When you execute confirmation print to confirm the result of tone curve adjustment, go to the step described on page 7-13. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-15 8.7 Adjust the Each Color 8 8.7 Adjust the Each Color You can adjust the tone curve using brightness/contrast adjustment, each color adjustment, and curve view on [Torn Curve Adjustment] screen. The result of adjustment is reflected to the preview area immediately. As for the tone curve adjustment, it is efficient to adjust the brightness/contrast of all colors at first, and adjust each color next. This section describes how to adjust each color. 8.7.1 [Adjust Each Color] tab The each color adjustment uses [Adjust Each Color] tab of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The [Adjust Each Color] tab is composed as follows; Item Description [Combination] Lets you select [CMYK], [CMY/K], or [C/M/Y/K]. When you select [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated tone curve of CMYK. When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated tone curve of CMY and the tone curve of K. When you select [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the tone curves of each color of CMYK. [View] Displays a check box to display/hide the tone curve per item of the combination selected from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], the number and target (color) of the check box differ. [Adjustment] Displays a radio button to select whether you execute the tone curve adjustment or not per item of the combination selected from [Combination]. According to the selection of [Combination], the number and target (color) of the radio button differ. [Undo] Discards the current settings of [Adjust Each Color] tab, and returns to the last saved settings. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-16 8.7 Adjust the Each Color 8 8.7.2 Basic operation of [Adjust Each Color] tab This section describes how to adjust with [Adjust Each Color] tab. Select the Combination The selected combination, the view settings and the settings of adjustment target on [Adjust Each Color] tab define the range of the adjustment by operation of points in the curve view area. Specify on each color whether you want to display the tone curve or hide and whether you execute adjustment or not, using [View] check box and [Adjustment] radio button which displayed per item of the combination selected from [Combination]. When [View] is checked, the tone curve of the color checked is displayed on curve view area. When [Adjustment] is selected, the tone curve of the color selected can be adjusted by operation of points in the curve view area. When check mark of [View] for one color was not selected and you select [Adjustment] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. Basic operation 1 Click [Adjust Each Color] tab on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Adjust Each Color] tab appears. 2 Select [CMYK], [CMY/K], or [C/M/Y/K] from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. 3 When you want to display the tone curve of one color, check the check box of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the tone curve of one color, select the radio button of that color. 5 Adjust the tone curve by operation of points in the curve view area. % For detailed information on how to operate the point, refer topage 8-16. % When you execute confirmation print to confirm the result of tone curve adjustment, go to the step described on page 7-13. Adjust with Point/Reference Point When you select [Adjust Each Color] tab, you can use the point/reference points to adjust. The point (small, black square) appears at both ends of the curve view area. You can adjust the tone curve by dragging and moving this point. You can also add the point by clicking on the curve. You can adjust the tone curve by dragging and moving this added point (small, red square). In addition, the position of 25%, 50%, and 75% may be added automatically on the curve as reference points according to the settings of [Brightness/Contrast] tab. You can also adjust the tone curve by dragging and moving the reference point. Those points and reference points can be used for adjustment of the tone curve as follows; How to drag Description Before Adjustment After Adjustment Drag the points (at both ends) upward or downward You can change the entire inclination. Then, you can adjust the whole range of the output values. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-17 8.7 Adjust the Each Color 8 You can set the complex tone curve by moving/adding the point mentioned above. - You can add the point up to 13. - You can't select the multiple points at the same time. - Similar operation can be done when you press up/down key on the keyboard in stead of dragging. - When you select the added point and you press [Delete] key on the keyboard, you can delete the selected point. However, you can't delete the beginning point and the ending point. - The input boxes of vertical/horizontal axises display the value of the selected point. When you select the point and you enter the value into the input boxes respectively, you can move the selected point to specified position. Drag the added points which are adjacent to the both end points, to the left or to the right. The 0 point (beginning point) and 100 point (ending point) can't be moved to the left or the right, but the adjacent point can be moved to 1% or 99%. When you drag the added point which is adjacent to the end point, you can set the adjacent section from the both ends near the same height (output value). Drag the added/ reference point upward/ downward/ left/right Dragging the added/ reference points upward/downward/ left/right, you can set the circular arc or an S-shaped curve that is centering on this point. When the whole curve is made to circular arc, the brightness goes up. When the S-shaped curve is enlarged, the contrast becomes strong. You can drag to left or right, within the range from the next of the previous point (value of the position is 1% greater) to before the next point (value of the position is 1% less). How to drag Description Before Adjustment After Adjustment ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-18 8.8 Confirmation Print 8 8.8 Confirmation Print This section describes how to execute confirmation print to confirm the result of tone curve adjustment. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) 1 Click [Confirmation Print] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Confirmation Print]. 2 Specify [Paper Tray], [Paper Size], and [Orientation ]. 3 When you select the hold job in which multiple images are included, as a sample image, specify the page number in [Print Page] to execute confirmation print. % When you select another image, [Print Page] is "1" and you can't change it. % The confirmation print outputs only 1 page. 4 Check [Print Image of Before Adjustment ], when you want to print the image before adjustment. 5 Click [Confirmation Print]. Confirmation printing is executed. % When you save the adjusted tone curve, go to the step described on page 8-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-19 8.9 Save the Tone Curve 8 8.9 Save the Tone Curve This section describes how to save the adjusted tone curve. When you register the settings to the image controller, the adjusted tone curve can be adopted to the output. When the tone curve is saved in [Local] or [Network], the tone curve is saved as the tone curve profile (Extension: ".xml"). 1 Click [Save] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Save] screen appears. 2 Specify the name of the tone curve to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. 3 From the tree view of [Destination Folder], select the place to save the tone curve. The list appears according to the selection. % When Controller is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. 4 If necessary, enter the description to [Memo]. 5 Click [Save]. When you select [Controller] as the destination folder, the tone curve is saved in the image controller. When you select [Local] or [Network] as the destination folder, the tone curve is saved as the tone curve profile (Extension: ".xml"). % When there is the tone curve with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % You can specify the tone curve to use as default from among registered tone curves in the image controller when you use "Color Default Settings" function or "Color Configuration Management" function. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-20 8.10 Tone Curve Management 8 8.10 Tone Curve Management This section describes how to manage the saved tone curve. The management of the tone curve uses [Tone Curve Management] screen. For detailed information of [Tone Curve Management], refer topage 8-9. Copy the Tone Curve You can make a duplication of the tone curve in the image controller, to the image controller. The tone curve registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the tone curve registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. 1 From the tree view of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the tone curve to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 4 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't specify the same name with those registered in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The duplication of the tone curve is generated in the image controller. Export the Tone Curve You can export the tone curve of the image controller to [Local] or [Network] as the tone curve profile (Extension: .xml). 1 From the tree view of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the tone curve to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Export]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-21 8.10 Tone Curve Management 8 [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 4 Specify the saving place and file name for the tone curve to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place as profile is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Management] screen. Register the Tone Curve to the Image Controller You can register the tone curve of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. When you register the tone curve to the image controller, the adjusted tone curve can be adopted to the output. 1 From tree view of [Tone Curve Management], select [Local] or [Network] where the tone curve profile (Extension: ".xml") is saved. The list appears according to the selection. 2 From the list, select the tone curve to register. 3 Click [Registration]. [Register] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Register] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Register] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Register]. 4 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't specify the same name with those registered in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The tone curve is registered to [Controller]. [Register] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-22 8.10 Tone Curve Management 8 Delete the Tone Curve You can delete the tone curve. 1 From the tree view and the list of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select the tone curve to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple tone curves. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected tone curve is deleted. % When you select the multiple tone curves, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the tone curve you have deleted. Change the Tone Curve Information You can change the tone curve information (Saved Name, Memo). 1 From the tree view and the list of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select the tone curve to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 3 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % When you change the saved name of the tone curve in the image controller, you can't specify the same name with those registered in the image controller. 4 Click [OK]. The tone curve information is changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-23 8.11 Reset the Tone Curve 8 8.11 Reset the Tone Curve This section describes how to reset the adjustment result of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. 0 Reset is executed immediately. 1 Click [Undo of ][Brightness/Contrast] tab or [Adjust Each Color] tab on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The current settings are discarded immediately and, the last saved tone curve appears. 9 Spot Color ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-2 9.1 Outline of Spot Color 9 9 Spot Color 9.1 Outline of Spot Color The spot color is called a special color, meaning the color with a specific name. In general, the name of the ink provided by the ink manufacturer becomes a name of the spot color. In the image controller, some spot color tables, "DIC", "CF", and "HKS" are registered at factory shipping. Within the spot color table, each spot color and the definition values of it are stored. The definition values are used to output after converting the spot color specified by the application to CMYK. Use of the Spot Color Adjustment function of Color Centro enables to create the new spot color table, duplicate the registered spot color table, and edit it. By this function, to replace the spot color which is specified by the application with CMYK values which Color Centro defines is enabled, and the outputting is executed. 9.1.1 [Spot Color] screen The spot color adjustment function of Color Centro uses [Spot Color] screen. [Spot Color] screen appears by clicking [Spot Color] button on [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The [Spot Color] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (table name) The name of spot color table loaded using [Table] appears in the left box of the [Table]. On launching this screen, "Unselected" appears there. [Table] Displays [Spot Color Table Management] screen to allow you to select the spot color table to load. You can operate to manage the spot color table on [Spot Color Table Management] screen. (spot color name) The name of spot color selected from the list appears in the left box of the [Rename]. [Rename] Changes the spot color name currently selected from the list. (spot color list) Displays the content of the selected spot color table as a list. [Add] Creates the new spot color. [Delete] Deletes the spot color selected from the spot color list. [Copy] Duplicates the spot color selected from the spot color list with the changed name. [Manual Adjustment] - [C], [M], [Y], [K] Allows you to adjust manually the selected spot color using [C], [M], [Y], and [K]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-3 9.1 Outline of Spot Color 9 List Items The list items of the list on the [Spot Color] screen are as follows; The list is displayed in order of [Color Name]. 9.1.2 Menu of [Spot Color] screen The menu items of the [Spot Color] screen are as follows; [Before Adjustment] Displays the conditions of spot color before adjustment. [After Adjustment] Displays the conditions of spot color after adjustment. [Test Print] Prints the spot color selected currently; both of the color before adjustment and the color after adjustment. [Adjustment by Printing the Chart] - [Step] Specifies the degree of color patch variation on the chart for adjustment. The chart of color patch variation at the specified degrees is displayed on the preview area. [Print Chart] Executes chart printing. (chart view area) Displays the preview of the chart according to the setting of [Step]. Displays the preview again after chart printing according to the settings of [No.] and [Group]. [No.] Specifies the color number on the printed chart. [Group] Specifies the color group on the printed chart. [OK] Updates the chart preview after confirming the input values of [No.] and [Group]. [Save] Saves the spot color with the set content. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description Item Description [Saved] Displays marks when the adjustment result of spot color isn't saved. [Before Adjustment] Displays the color before adjustment. [After Adjustment] Displays the color after adjustment. [Color Name] Displays the spot color name. [C(%)], [M(%)], [Y(%)], [K(%)] Displays the CMYK values of the spot color. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [New Table] Creates the new spot color table. [Table] Displays [Spot Color Table Management] screen to select the spot color table to load. You can operate to manage the spot color table on [Spot Color Table Management] screen. [Reset] Discards the current measurement result and settings displayed on this screen, and resets the screen. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-4 9.1 Outline of Spot Color 9 9.1.3 Basic Operation of [Spot Color] screen This section describes basic operation of [Spot Color] screen. 1 Load the spot color table to make adjustment. Or, create the spot color table. % For detailed information on how to load the spot color table, refer topage 7-5. % For detailed information on how to create the spot color table, refer topage 9-8. 2 Select the spot color to make adjustment. Or, create the spot color. % For detailed information on how to add the spot color, refer topage 7-7. 3 Execute adjustment manually. % For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color manually, refer topage 7-8. 4 Execute adjustment using the chart printed with spot color. % For detailed information on how to adjust the chart, refer topage 7-10. 5 Save the adjusted spot color table. % For detailed information on how to save, refer to page 7-12. 6 If necessary, change the priority. % For detailed information on how to change the priority, refer topage 7-13. 7 If necessary, execute some management operations for the spot color table and spot color. % For detailed information on how to manage, refer to page 9-15 and page 9-19. 8 If necessary, initialize the [Spot Color] screen. % For detailed information on how to initialize, refer to page 9-21. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-5 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table 9 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table In the image controller, there is the spot color table registered at factory shipping. You can also register the spot color table which you adjusted on [Spot Color] screen. Use of the Spot Color Adjustment function of Color Centro enables to load the spot color table and adjust the spot color in the loaded spot color table. This section describes how to load the spot color table. You can select the spot color table to load on [Spot Color Table Management] screen. 9.2.1 [Spot Color Table Management] screen [Spot Color Table Management] screen is composed as follows; List Items The list items of the list on the [Spot Color Table Management] screen are as follows; Item Description (tree view) Displays the places where the spot color tables are saved ([Controller], [Local], and [Network]) in the tree format. (list) According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved spot color tables. [Priority] Using and , specifies the priority within the multiple spot color tables with same table name registered in the image controller. [Factory Default] Resets the priority to the factory default. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected spot color table from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Delete] Deletes the spot color table selected from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Table Name, Memo) of the spot color table which is selected from the list. [Export]/[Register] Exports the selected spot color table on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. Registers the spot color table selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Open] Loads the selected spot color table on the list to [Spot Color] screen. [Cancel] Discards the current settings and closes the screen. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description [File Name] Displays the saved file name of the spot color table when [Local] or [Network] is selected on the tree view. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-6 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table 9 When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, the list is displayed per group of [Table Name] in which the spot color tables have the same name. Within the group, displays in order of priority. You can change the order of priority. For detailed information on how to change the order of priority, refer topage 7-13. When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. List Operations The list of [Spot Color Table Management] screen can be sorted by [Table Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]). For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Spot Color Table Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Table Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name](in case of [Local] or [Network]). When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Table Name] per group. 9.2.2 Menu of [Spot Color Table Management] screen The menu items of the [Spot Color Table Management] screen are as follows; [Table Name] Displays the spot color table name. [Created Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the new spot color table was created. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the spot color table was updated. [Memo] Displays the memo which was set to the spot color table. Item Description Menu Menu Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Sort] Sorts the content of the list by the selected list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Table Name, Memo) of the spot color table which is selected from the list. [Delete] Deletes the spot color table selected from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected spot color table from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Export] Exports the selected spot color table on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Create] Registers the spot color table selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Close] Discards the current settings and closes the screen. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-7 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table 9 9.2.3 Load the Spot Color Table This section describes how to load the spot color table. The spot color table registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the spot color table registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate, refer to page 8-20. 1 Click [Table] on [Spot Color] screen. [Spot Color Table Management] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Table]. 2 From the tree view, select the place to save the spot color table. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the spot color table to load. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Open]. [Spot Color Table Management] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color] screen. Selected spot color table is loaded and the spot color appears to [Spot Color] screen. % When you click [Cancel], [Spot Color Table Management] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-8 9.3 Create the New Spot Color Table 9 9.3 Create the New Spot Color Table You can create the new spot color table and add the new spot color. This section describes how to create the new spot color table. To create the new spot color table, use [Spot Color] screen. 1 Select [File] menu - [Create New Table] on [Spot Color]] screen. On the left of [Table], "New" appears. 2 Add the new spot color. % For detailed information on how to add the spot color, refer topage 7-7. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-9 9.4 Select the Spot Color / Add the New Spot Color 9 9.4 Select the Spot Color / Add the New Spot Color This section describes how to select the spot color and how to add the new spot color. Select the Spot Color % Select the spot color to adjust from the list of [Spot Color]. On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. % When you want to save the current settings and you want to create the new spot color on base of the selected spot color, make the duplication of it and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate/delete/rename the spot color in the spot color table, refer topage 9-19. % For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer topage 7-8 and page 7-10. Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New] on [Spot Color] screen. [New] screen appears. 2 Specify the name of the new spot color to [Color Name] and click [OK]. On the left of [Rename], the name specified appears. % The CMYK values of the new color are all "0". Then, [C(%)], [M(%)], [Y(%)] and [K(%)] of the list display "0". % For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer topage 7-8 and page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-10 9.5 Adjust the Spot Color Manually 9 9.5 Adjust the Spot Color Manually You can adjust the CMYK values of the spot color on [Spot Color] screen. The result of adjustment is reflected to the preview area immediately. You can also print to confirm the colors of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. This section describes how to adjust the spot color manually. To adjust the spot color manually, use [Spot Color] screen. 1 Specify the CMYK values to [Manual Adjustment] - [C], [M], [Y] and [K] for the spot color selected from the list on [Spot Color] screen. According to the settings, the preview area of [Manual Adjustment] - [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] are updated. % For each color, specify the value (from "0" to "100"). % When you input below the decimal point, the value rounded down is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you change the value of [C(%)], [M(%)], [Y(%)] and [K(%)] of the list on [Spot Color] screen. 2 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 1 as required. 3 Click [Test Print]. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 4 Specify [Paper Tray] and [Paper Size]. 5 Click [Print]. Test printing is executed. 6 Confirm the test printing and repeat step 1 to step 5 as required. % When you execute fine adjustment, go to the step described on page 7-10. % When you save the adjusted spot color, go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-11 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart 9 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart You can execute fine adjustment of the spot color after CMYK adjustment using the printed chart. This section describes how to adjust with the printed chart. To print the chart, use [Spot Color] screen. On [Adjustment by Printing Chart], you can print the chart on which the value of the selected spot color is regarded as the center value. You can print the color chart where the color is varied with 8 steps based on the center value of CMYK values specified by the degree of variation (%), per 9 groups where the conversion method of CMYK differs. From the printed chart, specify the No. of the color patch and Group to adopt those to the spot color and fix the CMYK values. 1 Specify the step number to [Adjustment by Printing the Chart] - [Step] (from "1" to "10"). The chart in which the CMYK values are varied per the specified value is displayed on the preview area. 2 Click [Print Chart]. [Print Chart] screen appears. 3 Specify [Paper Tray], [Paper Size]. 4 Click [Print]. Chart printing is executed. % When you click [Print Chart], [No.] and [Group] become available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-12 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart 9 5 Confirm the printed chart. 6 Specify the number of the color patch and group which you adopt the spot color to [No.] and [Group], and click [OK]. The specified color is displayed on [After Adjustment]. 7 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 6 as required. % When you save the adjusted spot color, go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-13 9.7 Save the Spot Color Table 9 9.7 Save the Spot Color Table This section describes how to save the adjusted step color table. To save the spot color table, use [Spot Color] screen. When you save the spot color table to the image controller, the spot color table is registered into the image controller. When you register the spot color table, the adjusted spot color table can be adopted to the output according to the priority of the spot color table. When the spot color table is saved in [Local] or [Network], the spot color table is saved as the spot color table profile (Extension: ".spo"). 1 Click [Save] on [Spot Color] screen. [Save] screen appears. 2 Specify the name of the spot color table to [Table Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can save the spot color table of the same name with those registered in the image controller. When you add the new spot color, it is added on the same table. When you adjust the existed color, it is updated. When you delete the existed color, it is deleted from the table. 3 From the tree view of [Destination Folder], select the place to save the spot color table. The list appears according to the selection. % When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 4 If necessary, enter the description into [Memo]. 5 Click [Save]. When you select [Controller] as the destination folder, the spot color table is saved in the image controller. When you select [Local] or [Network] as the destination folder, the spot color table is saved as the spot color table profile (Extension: ".spo"). % The priority of the newly saved spot color table becomes the top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, go to the step described on page 7-13. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-14 9.8 Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table 9 9.8 Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table This section describes how to change the priority of the spot color table among the multiple spot color tables of the same name (group) which are registered in the image controller. To change the priority, use [Spot Color Table Management] screen. The priority defines which spot color table is adopted to the spot color specified by the application. 1 Click [Table] on [Spot Color] screen. [Spot Color Table Management] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Table]. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the spot color table to change the priority. % The list is displayed per group of the same [Table Name]. Within the group, tables are displayed in order of priority. % "*" mark is added after the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click or to change the position of the selected spot color table. The position of the selected spot color table moves within the group of [Table Name]. % Click [Factory Default] when you want to reset the priority settings of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In this case, the priority of the spot color table created by user is not changed. 5 Close [Spot Color Table Management] screen after changing the priority. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-15 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 9.9 Spot Color Table Management This section describes how to manage the saved spot color table. The management of the spot color table uses [Spot Color Table Management] screen. For detailed information of [Spot Color Table Management], refer topage 9-2. Copy the Spot Color Table The spot color table registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the spot color table registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. 1 From the tree view of [Spot Color Table Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the spot color table to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 4 Specify [Table Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters). % You can save the spot color table of the same name with those in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The duplication of the spot color table is generated in the image controller. % The priority of the duplicated spot color table becomes the top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, refer to page 7-13. Export the Spot Color Table as Profile You can export the spot color table of the image controller to [Local] or [Network] as the spot color table profile (Extension: ".spo"). 1 From the tree view of [Spot Color Table Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the spot color table to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can export the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 3 Click [Export]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-16 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 4 Specify the saving place and file name for the spot color table to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place as profile is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color Table Management] screen. Register the Spot Color Table to the Image Controller You can register the spot color table of [Local] or [Network] in "Controller" (Extension: [.spo]). When you register the spot color table profile as the spot color table, the adjusted spot color table can be adopted to the output according to the priority of the spot color table. 1 From tree view of [Spot Color Table Management], select [Local] or [Network] where the spot color table profile is saved. The list appears according to the selection. 2 From the list, select the spot color table profile to register. 3 Click [Registration]. [Register] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, [Register] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Register] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Register]. 4 Specify [Table Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters). % You can save the spot color table of the same name with those registered in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The spot color table is registered to [Controller]. [Register] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color Table Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-17 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 % The priority of the registered spot color table become top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, refer to page 7-13. % When the profile is created by exporting the spot color table registered at factory shipping and you register it, the registered spot color table becomes available for adjustment. Delete the Spot Color Table You can delete the spot color table. 1 From the tree view and the list of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select the spot color table to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected spot color table is deleted. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the spot color table you have deleted. Change the Spot Color Table Information You can change the spot color table information. 1 From the tree view and the list of [Spot Color Table Management] screen, select the spot color table to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, [Change Table Information] isn't available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-18 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 3 Edit [Table Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha- numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 4 Click [OK]. The spot color table information is changed. % The priority of the spot color table of which information was changed becomes the top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, refer to page 7-13. Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table You can reset the priority settings of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 1 Click [Spot Color Table Management] - [Factory Default]. Confirmation screen appears. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Yes] when you want to reset the priority settings of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. The priority is reset to the factory default. In this case, the priority of the spot color table created by user is not changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-19 9.10 Spot Color Table Management 9 9.10 Spot Color Table Management This section describes how to manage the spot color stored in the spot color table. The management of the spot color uses [Spot Color] screen. For detailed information of [Spot Color] screen, refer to page 9-2. Rename the Spot Color 1 Select the spot color to rename from the list of [Spot Color] On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. 2 Click [Rename] on [Spot Color] screen. [Rename] screen appears. 3 Specify the changed name to [Color Name], and click [OK]. On the left of [Rename], the name specified appears. % You can't store the spot color of the same name with other spot color in the spot color table. % To save the changed name, save the spot color table. For detailed information on how to save the spot color table, refer topage 7-12. Copy the Spot Color You can duplicate the spot color within the same spot color table. When you adjust the spot color, original settings of the spot color is overwritten. When you want to save the current settings, make the duplication of it. 1 Select the spot color to duplicate from the list of [Spot Color]. On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. 2 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot colors, [Copy] isn't available. 3 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can't save the spot color of the same name with the spot color in the spot color table. 4 Click [OK]. The duplication of the spot color is generated in the spot color table. % To save the copied spot color, save the spot color table. For detailed information on how to save the spot color table, refer topage 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-20 9.10 Spot Color Table Management 9 Delete the Spot Color You can delete the spot color within the spot color table. 1 Select the spot color to delete from the list of [Spot Color]. On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected spot color is deleted. % When you select the multiple spot colors, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the spot color you have deleted. % To fix the deleting of the spot color, save the spot color table. For detailed information on how to save the spot color table, refer topage 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-21 9.11 Initialize the Spot Color Screen 9 9.11 Initialize the Spot Color Screen The loaded spot color table and the result of spot color adjustment displayed on the [Spot Color] screen remain, until the time when screen is closed or reset. This section describes how to initialize [Spot Color] screen and how to erase the loaded information and the result of adjustment, without saving. 1 Select the spot color to initialize from the list of [Spot Color]. 2 From the [File] menu, select [Initialize]. The confirmation message appears. 3 Click [OK]. The result of adjustment is erased from the screen. 10 Alternative Color ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-2 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color 10 10 Alternative Color 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color One alternative color table per color (RGB color/CMYK color) is stored in the image controller. The alternative color table replaces the specific RGB color/CMYK color within job with CMYK color (alternative color). You can set the alternative colors (64 for RGB and 64 for CMYK) to the alternative color table which is in the controller. (total 128) Use of the Color Centro enables to set and adjust the alternative color table in the image controller. Color Centro also enables to select the alternative color from the spot color. By this function, you can adopt the spot color to the alternative color as the processing of the image controller when the spot color can't be specified by the application. When you use the spot color as the alternative color, adjust the spot color to use beforehand. For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer topage 7-2. 10.1.1 [Alternative Color Management] screen The alternative color management function of Color Centro uses [Alternative Color Management] screen. [Alternative Color Management] screen appears by clicking [Alternative Color] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The composition of [Alternative Color Management] screen differs per tab. When [RGB] tab is selected, [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; When [CMYK] tab is selected, [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-3 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color 10 List Items The composition of the list on [Alternative Color Management] screen differs per tab. When [RGB] tab is selected, the list on [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [RGB] Displays the screen to set the alternative color for specific RGB color within the job. [CMYK] Displays the screen to set the alternative color for specific CMYK color within the job. (list) Displays the content of the alternative color table that is in the connecting image controllers for RGB or CMYK (it depends on [RGB] / [CMYK] tab selection). [Show Device Value] Allows you to set when you select [CMYK] tab. When you check, you can specify the color with the device value (from 0 to 255; 256 steps). When you remove the check, you can specify the color with % (from 0 to 100). [Original] Displays the original color to which the alternative color can be set. [After Adjustment] Displays the color of the alternative color. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. [R], [G], [B] Displays the RGB values of the original color. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the alternative color. [Select from Spot Color] Click to set the alternative color from the spot color. [Priority] Allows you to set the priority when there are multiple alternative colors for one original color using and . [Add] Adds the new alternative color setting. [Delete] Deletes the alternative color setting you selected from the alternative color table. [Copy] Duplicate the alternative color setting. [Create] Registers the adjustment result in the image controller. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description [Original] Displays the original color to which the alternative color can be set. [R], [G], [B] Displays the RGB values of the original color. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-4 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color 10 When [CMYK] tab is selected, the list on [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; Displays the alternative color for the same original color in order of priority. You can change the order of priority. For detailed information on how to change the order of priority, refer topage 7-13. 10.1.2 Menu of [Alternative Color Management] screen The menu items of the [Alternative Color Management] screen are as follows; 10.1.3 Basic Operation of [Alternative Color Management] screen This section describes basic operation of [Alternative Color Management] screen. 1 Select the input color of the alternative color setting. Or, create the new input color of the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to select the input color, refer to page 10-5. 2 Set the input color of the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to set the input color, refer to page 7-7. 3 Specify the output color of the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to specify the output color, refer to page 10-8. 4 If necessary, change the priority. % For detailed information on how to change the priority, refer topage 7-13. 5 Register the alternative color setting. % For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 6 If necessary, execute some management operations for the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to manage, refer to page 10-13. [After Adjustment] Displays the color of the alternative color. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the alternative color. Item Description [Original] Displays the original color to which the alternative color can be set. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the original color. [After Adjustment] Displays the color of the alternative color. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the alternative color. Item Description Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Reload the information of the image controller connected currently. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-5 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color 10 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color When you adjust the existed alternative color setting, select the original color (input color) to which the alternative color can be set. When you add the new alternative color setting to the existed alternative color table, add the new input color. This section describes how to select the input color and how to add the new input color. Select the Input Color This section describes how to select the original color (input color) to which the alternative color can be set. 1 Click [RGB] tab or [CMYK] tab on [Alternative Color Management] screen. The list of each tab is displayed. % When you select the RGB input color, click [RGB] tab. % When you select the CMYK input color, click [CMYK] tab. 2 From the list, click the line of the alternative color (input color) which you adjust. The color which is displayed in [Original] of the selected line, is selected as the input color. % When you adjust the selected input color, go to the step described on page 7-7. % When you adjust the alternative color without adjustment of the input color, go to the step described on page 10-8. % The list displays the content of the alternative color table that is in the connecting image controllers for RGB or CMYK (it depends on [RGB] / [CMYK] tab selection). % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. % When you want to save the current alternative color setting and you want to create the new setting on base of the selected setting, make the duplication of it and adjust the duplication. For details on how to copy the alternative color and how to delete it, refer to page 10-13. Add the New Alternative Color 1 Click [RGB] tab or [CMYK] tab on [Alternative Color Management] screen. The list of each tab is displayed. % When you add the RGB input color, click [RGB] tab. % When you add the CMYK input color, click [CMYK] tab. 2 Click [New] on [Alternative Color Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-6 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color 10 One line is added on the list. At the added line of the list, the RGB values displayed are all "255" and the CMYK values displayed are all "0". % When you adjust the added input color, go to the step described on page 7-7. % When you adjust the alternative color without adjustment of the input color, go to the step described on page 10-8. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-7 10.3 Adjust the Input Color 10 10.3 Adjust the Input Color This section describes how to adjust the selected original color (input color) and how to adjust the added input color. When you don't need to adjust the selected input color or added input color, go to the step described on page 10-8. When you want to save the current input color setting and you want to create the new setting on base of the selected setting, make the duplication of it and adjust the duplication. For details on how to copy the alternative color setting and how to delete it, refer to page 10-13. 1 When you select [CMYK] tab and select the input color, check [Show Device Value]. % When you check, you can specify the input color with the device value (from "0 " to "255"; 256 steps) % When you remove the check, you can specify the color with %. 2 Specify the RGB/CMYK values which are set in the input color to the input boxes under [Adjust] - [Original]. According to the settings, the preview area of [Adjust] - [Original] and [Original] on the list are updated. % When you select [RGB] tab, specify the value from "0" to "255" for each color. % When you select [CMYK] tab and check [Show Device Value], specify the value from "0" to "255" for each color. % When you select [CMYK] tab and remove the check of [Show Device Value], specify the value from "0" to "100" for each color. % When you input below the decimal point, the value rounded down is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you change the RGB/CMYK values on the right of [Original] of the list. 3 Confirm the preview of [Original], and repeat from step 1 to step 2 as required. % When you adjust the output color to alternate, go to the step described on page 10-8. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-8 10.4 Adjust the Output Color 10 10.4 Adjust the Output Color This section describes how to adjust the output color. To adjust the output color, there are two methods. One is a method of specifying the value and the other is a method of selecting from the spot color. Specify the Value 1 Specify the CMYK values which are set to the output color to the input boxes under [Adjust] - [After Adjustment]. According to the settings, the preview area of [Adjust] - [After Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] on the list are updated. % When you select [CMYK] tab and remove the check of [Show Device Value], specify the value from "0" to "100" for each color. % When you input below the decimal point, the value rounded down is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you change the CMYK values on the right of [After Adjustment] of the list. 2 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 1 as required. % When you register the adjustment result, go to the step described on page 10-12. Select from Spot Color You can adopt the spot color to the alternative color as the processing of the image controller when the spot color can't be specified by the application. When you use the spot color as the alternative color, adjust the spot color to use beforehand. For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer to page 9-2. 1 Click [Select from Spot Color]. [Select from Spot Color] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-9 10.4 Adjust the Output Color 10 2 Click [Table]. [Spot Color Select] screen appears. 3 From the tree view, select the place to save the spot color table. The list appears according to the selection. 4 From the list, select the spot color table to select the spot color. 5 Click [OK]. [Spot Color Select] screen is closed to return to [Select from Spot Color] screen. Selected spot color table is loaded, and the spot color appears on [Select from Spot Color] screen. 6 From the list, select the spot color to specify as the output color. The selected spot color is displayed to [Color]. 7 Click [OK]. [Select from Spot Color] screen is closed to returns to [Alternative Color Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-10 10.4 Adjust the Output Color 10 % When you click [Cancel], [Select from Spot Color] screen is closed to return to [Alternative Color Management] screen. 8 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat from step 1 to step 7 as required. % When you change the priority of the alternative color settings, go to the step described on page 7-13. % When you register the adjustment result, go to the step described on page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-11 10.5 Change the Priority of the Alternative Color 10 10.5 Change the Priority of the Alternative Color This section describes how to change the priority of the alternative color settings in the alternative color table. The priority defines which alternative color setting is adopted to output when there are multiple alternative color settings for one input color. When only one alternative color settings is for one input color, the priority setting isn't necessary. 1 From the list of [ Alternative Color Management] screen, select the alternative color setting to change the priority. % Displays the alternative color for the same input color in order of priority. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 2 Click or to change the position of the selected alternative color setting. The position of the selected alternative color moves. % When you register the adjustment result, go to the step described on page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-12 10.6 Register the Alternative Color 10 10.6 Register the Alternative Color This section describes how to register the alternative color settings displayed on [Alternative Color Management] to the alternative color table which is used by the image controller. When you register the settings to the image controller, the adjusted alternative color can be adopted to the output. 1 Click [Register] on [Alternative Color Management] screen. The alternative color settings are registered to the alternative color table which is in the controller. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-13 10.7 Alternative Color Management 10 10.7 Alternative Color Management This section describes how to manage the alternative color. Copy the Alternative Color You can duplicate the alternative color settings displayed on [Alternative Color Management] within the same alternative color table. When you adjust the alternative color using the existed alternative color setting, original settings of the alternative color is overwritten. When you want to save the current settings, make the duplication of it. 1 Select the alternative color setting to duplicate from the list of [Alternative Color Management]. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 2 Click [Copy]. The duplication of the alternative color setting is generated in the alternative color table. % When you select the multiple alternative color settings, [Copy] isn't available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-14 10.7 Alternative Color Management 10 Delete the Alternative Color Setting You can delete the alternative color setting. 1 Select the alternative color setting to delete from the list of [Alternative Color Management]. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected alternative color setting is deleted. % When you select the multiple alternative color settings, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the alternative color setting you have deleted. 11 Profile Management ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-2 11.1 Outline of Profile Management 11 11 Profile Management 11.1 Outline of Profile Management Use of the Color Centro enables to manage several profiles which are saved to the Local computer, Network computer, and the image controller, and are necessary for the color printing. The types of profile which Color Centro manages are as follows; - RGB Source Profile - CMYK Target Profile - Printer Profile - RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile - CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile In addition, Color Centro can register 50 profiles at the maximum to the image controller when the size of each profile is 10 MB or less. Color Centro manages profiles, and also it creates and edits those by starting the "Color Centro Profiler" utility. 11.1.1 [Profile Management] screen The profile management function of Color Centro uses [Profile Management] screen. [Profile Management] screen appears by clicking [Profile Management] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. [Profile Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [RGB Source Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved RGB source profile. [CMYK Target Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved CMYK target profile. [Printer Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved printer profile. [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved RGBCMYK device link profile. [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved CMYK-CMYK target profile. (tree view) Displays the places where the profiles are saved ([Controller], [Local], and [Network]) in the tree format. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-3 11.1 Outline of Profile Management 11 List Items According to the selection of the tree view and profile type, the list items displayed on [Profile Management] screen are changed. The list items of the measurement result list on the [Profile Management] screen are as follows; When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the profile which was registered at factory shipping (default registered color profile). In addition, a red "@" mark is added before the name of the profile which is set as default on the current color setting. List Operations The list of the [Profile Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Profile Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Profile Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]). (list) According to the selection of the buttons and the tree view on the screen, displays the saved profiles. [New] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and creates the new profile. [Edit] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and edits the selected profile from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected profile from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Delete] Deletes the profile selected from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the profile which is selected from the list. [Export]/[Register] Exports the selected profile on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. Registers the profile selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description Item Description [Profile Name] (in case of [Controller]) / [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]) Displays the profile name (in case of [Controller]) or the file name of the profile. [Created Date/Time] (in case of [Controller]) Displays the created date/time of the profile. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the profile was updated. [Profile Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]) Displays the profile name. [Paper Type] (in case of [Printer Profile]) Displays the paper type which the printer profile corresponds. [Memo] Displays the description of the profile. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-4 11.1 Outline of Profile Management 11 11.1.2 Menu of [Profile Management] screen The menu items of the [Profile Management] screen are as follows; Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Profile Type] From the displayed sub menu, allows you to select the profile type to display on the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Sort] Sorts the content of the list by the selected list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the profile which is selected from the list. [Delete] Deletes the profile selected from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected profile from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [New] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and creates the new profile. [Edit] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and edits the selected profile from the list. [Export] Exports the selected profile on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Import] Imports the profile selected on the list to [Controller], when [Local] or [Network] is selected on the tree view. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-5 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export, and import the RGB source profile. 11.2.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the RGB source profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB source profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB source profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the RGB source profile is generated in the image controller. 11.2.2 Delete You can delete the saved RGB source profile. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB source profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-6 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 % You can delete the multiple RGB source profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the RGB source profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected RGB source profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the RGB source profile you have deleted. 11.2.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved RGB source profile. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB source profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the RGB source profile which was registered at factory shipping. 5 Click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-7 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 The RGB source profile information is changed. 11.2.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the RGB source profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB source profile to register. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the RGB source profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-8 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 11.2.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the RGB source profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the RGB source profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the RGB source profile to import. 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB source profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The RGB source profile is registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-9 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export, and import the CMYK target profile. 11.3.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the CMYK target profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK target profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK target profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the CMYK target profile is generated in the image controller. 11.3.2 Delete You can delete the saved CMYK target profile. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK target profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-10 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 % You can delete the multiple CMYK target profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the CMYK target profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected CMYK target profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the CMYK target profile you have deleted. 11.3.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved CMYK target profile. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK target profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the CMYK target profile which was registered at factory shipping. 5 Click [OK]. The CMYK target profile information is changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-11 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 11.3.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the CMYK target profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK target profile to register. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the CMYK target profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-12 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 11.3.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the CMYK target profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the CMYK target profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the CMYK target profile to import. 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK target profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The CMYK target profile is registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-13 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile This section describes how to create the new CMYK target profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the CMYK target profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.4.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the CMYK target profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement Setting Chart Measurement UCR/GCR Level Setting Entering Comment Calculation Complete * Calculation is executed. * Use Measurement Instrument. * You can skip the Chart Measurement by Measurement Data File. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-14 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-14. 11.4.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of CMYK target profile you create to [CMYK Target Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-15 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the CMYK target profile you create and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Select Measurement Method screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-15. 11.4.3 Select the Measurement Method 1 Select [New Measurement] or [Use Existing Measurement File]. % When you select [New Measurement], go to the step 4. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File], go to the step 2. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-16 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 [Open] screen appears. 3 Select the measurement data file (.mcd) and click [Open]. The name of measurement data file appears in [Existing Measurement File]. 4 Click [Next]. % When you select [New Measurement], Chart Measurement screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-16. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File], the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-17. 11.4.4 Chart Measurement On the Chart Measurement screen, select the instrument and start the measurement. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. 1 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 2 Click [Start] to start measurement. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-17 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 3 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. 4 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. Returns to the Chart Measurement screen after saving the measurement result file. 5 Click [Next]. the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-17. 11.4.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting On the UCR/GCR Setting screen, select the UCR/GCR level concerning the generation of the Black separation on CMYK separation process. 1 Select the UCR/GCR level from [UCR/GCR Setting] of the UCR/GCR Setting screen. % You can set the amount of CMY to be replaced with Black. % [Level 1 - Minimum Black Skeleton (Recommended)] decreases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. % [Level 5 - Max Black: Full Black] increases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. 2 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-18. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-18 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 11.4.6 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-19 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 11.4.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile On the Calculation Result screen, displays the list of the setting of the generated CMYK-CMYK target profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. % When you launch Color Centro Profiler by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] of [Profile Management], Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. % When you create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile with Color Centro Profiler, the Profile Determination screen appears. % When you create or edit the profile set with Color Centro Profiler, the wizard screen (the Profile Determination screen) appears, respectively. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-20 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5 Printer Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export and import the printer profile. 11.5.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the printer profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the printer profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can't save the printer profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Select [Paper Type Link]. 7 Edit [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. 8 Click [OK]. The duplication of the printer profile is generated in the image controller. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-21 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.2 Delete You can delete the saved printer profile. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the printer profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple printer profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the printer profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected printer profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the printer profile you have deleted. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-22 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved printer profile. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the printer profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters as required. % You can't save the printer profile of the same name with those in the image controller. % But, you can't change the table name of the printer profile which was registered at factory shipping. 5 Select [Paper Type Link], as required. 6 Edit [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. 7 Click [OK]. The printer profile information is changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-23 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the printer profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the printer profile to register. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the printer profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-24 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the printer profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the printer profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the printer profile to import. 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can't save the printer profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Select [Paper Type Link]. 7 Edit [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. 8 Click [OK]. The printer profile is registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-25 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 11.6 Create the Printer Profile This section describes how to create the new printer profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the printer profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement/Paper Info/other Settings Model Confirmation Chart Measurement UCR/GCR Level Setting Entering Comment Calculation Complete * Calculation is executed. * Use Measurement Instrument. * You can skip the Chart Measurement by Measurement Data File. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-26 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 11.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the printer profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-26. 11.6.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of printer profile you create to [Printer Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-27 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the printer profile you create and click [Open]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-27. 11.6.3 Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting On the Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting screen, you can select the measurement method and set the related paper setting. 1 From [Measurement Setting], select [New Measurement] or [Use Existing Measurement File]. % When you select [New Measurement], go to the step 5. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File], go to the step 2. 2 Click [Browse]. [Open] screen appears. 3 Select the measurement data file (.mcd) and click [Open]. The name of measurement data file appears in [Existing Measurement File]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-28 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 4 When you set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Glossy Mode], and [Paper Weight] using the tray information and paper profile of the main body, you can display [Get paper Information] screen by clicking [Get Tray/Paper Profile information]. % When you connect to the image controller which is for the selected printer, [Get Tray/Paper Profile information] is available. % When you use [Get Tray/Paper Profile information], go to the step 6. % When you set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode] manually, go to step 7. 5 On [Get paper Information] screen, select [Get Tray Information] or [Get Paper Profile] and select the tray information or paper profile which you use then click [OK]. The information you get is displayed to [Tray / Paper Profile Information]. [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode] are set automatically. 6 Select paper type, paper color, paper weight and glossy mode which you use from [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Weight Unit], [Glossy Mode] and [Paper Weight]. % When you use [Get Tray/Paper Profile information], you can't set manually [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. 7 Click [Next]. % When you select [New Measurement] from [Measurement Setting], the Chart Measurement screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-28. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File] from [Measurement Setting], the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-30. 11.6.4 Chart Measurement On the Chart Measurement screen, select the instrument and start the measurement. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-29 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 1 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 2 Specify the copy number of the chart outputting to [Copies]. 3 Click [Output] to print the chart. 4 Click [Start] to start measurement. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 5 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. 6 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. Returns to the Chart Measurement screen after saving the measurement result file. 7 Click [Next]. the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-30. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-30 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 11.6.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting On the UCR/GCR Setting screen, select the UCR/GCR level concerning the generation of the Black separation on CMYK separation process. 1 Select the UCR/GCR level from [UCR/GCR Setting] of the UCR/GCR Setting screen. % You can set the amount of CMY to be replaced with Black. % [Level 1 - Minimum Black Skeleton (Recommended)] decreases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. % [Level 5 - Max Black: Full Black] increases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. 2 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-30. 11.6.6 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-31 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 % Go to the step described on page 11-31. 11.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile On the Calculation Result screen, displays the list of the setting of the generated printer profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. % When you launch Color Centro Profiler by clicking [Printer Profile] of [Profile Management], Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. % When you create the RGB-CMYK device link profile with Color Centro Profiler, the Profile Determination screen appears. % When you create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile with Color Centro Profiler, the Profile Determination screen appears. % When you create or edit the profile set with Color Centro Profiler, the wizard screen (the Profile Determination screen) appears, respectively. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-32 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export and import the RGBCMYK device link profile. 11.7.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the RGB-CMYK device link profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the RGB-CMYK device link profile is generated in the image controller. 11.7.2 Delete You can delete the saved RGB-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-33 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the RGB-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected RGB-CMYK device link profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the RGB-CMYK device link profile you have deleted. 11.7.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved RGB-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the RGB-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-34 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 5 Click [OK]. The RGB-CMYK device link profile information is changed. 11.7.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the RGB-CMYK device link profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the RGB-CMYK device link profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. 11.7.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the RGB-CMYK device link profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the RGB-CMYK device link profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to import. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-35 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The RGB-CMYK device link profiles are registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-36 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to create the new RGB-CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the RGB-CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the RGB-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-37 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-37. 11.8.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of RGB-CMYK device link profile you create to [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-38 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the RGB-CMYK device link profile you create and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-38. 11.8.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, specify the printer profile and the RGB source profile which are used by RGB-CMYK device link profile. In addition, you can create the printer profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by RGB-CMYK device link profile. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-26 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-39 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the RGB source profile which is used by RGB-CMYK device link profile. When you use [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB] which are preset to the image controller, select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. When you specify the other RGB source profile, select [Other] and click [Browse]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you select [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB], go to step 5. 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [RGB Source Profile] - [Browse], select the RGB source profile used and click [Open]. The selected RGB source profile is displayed below [Other] of [RGB Source Profile]. 5 Click [Next]. The Customize Color Conversions screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-40. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-40 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8.4 Customize the Color Conversions On the Customize Color Conversions screen, you can set the rendering intent. 1 From [RGB-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Perceptual] is the setting to represent the color near to the color which is before conversion. % [Saturation] is the setting to represent the color which maintains as much as possible the brightness of the color which is before conversion. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 3 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 4 Confirm the result of test printing. 5 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-41. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-41 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8.5 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-42. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-42 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8.6 Confirm and Complete the Profile On the Calculation Result screen, displays the list of the setting of the generated RGB-CMYK device link profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-43 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to edit the RGB-CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. Color Centro Profiler enables the adjustment of the point color per object and the adjustment of the profile curve. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can edit the RGB-CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.9.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can edit the RGB-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to edit. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Edit]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Point Color/ Profile Curve Adjustment Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-44 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 4 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-44. 11.9.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of RGB-CMYK device link profile you edit to [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the RGB-CMYK device link profile with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the RGB-CMYK device link profile in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-45 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the RGB-CMYK device link profile you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-45. 11.9.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve On the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen, you can execute the adjustment of the specified color outputting and profile curve. 1 When you execute the adjustment of the point color and the adjustment of the profile curve, click [Adjust]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-46 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 The Adjustment screen appears. 2 If necessary, adjust the point color as follows; % When you add the new point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you edit the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you delete the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-48. 3 If necessary, execute the adjustment of the profile curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the profile curve, refer topage 11-48. 4 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 5 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Adjustment screen. 6 Confirm the result of test printing and click [OK]. The Adjustment is closed to return to the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen. 7 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Complete screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-49. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-47 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New]. A numbered line is added on [Adjustment Point]. 2 Specify the value (0 to 255) of the added point color of the added line to [R], [G] and [B]. Or, select the color from [Color Setting] screen displayed by clicking [Color Palette]. And click [OK]. The new input color is displayed on [Pointed Color]. 3 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color (below the [Result]) and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 4 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Edit the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to edit. The input color is displayed on the lower of the Sample Color (below [Result]). 2 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-48 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 3 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Delete the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to delete. 2 Click [Delete]. The selected adjustment point is deleted. Adjust the Profile Curve 1 From [Adjustment Curve], select [Input] or [Output]. % When you execute the adjustment of input curve, select [Input]. % When you execute the adjustment of output curve, select [Output]. 2 Select the combination of colors from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. % When you select [Input], select [R/G/B] or [RGB]. % When you select [Output], select [C/M/Y/K], [CMY/K] or [CMYK]. % When you select [R/G/B] or [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the profile curves of each color. % When you select [RGB] or [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated profile curves of RGB or CMYK. % When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated profile curve of CMY and the profile curve of K. 3 When you want to display the profile curve of one color, check [View] of that color. % When you want to hide the profile curve of one color, remove the check mark from [View] of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the profile curve of one color, select [Adj.] of that color. % When check mark of [View] for one color is not selected and you select [Adj.] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. 5 To execute the adjustment of the profile curve, you can drag and move the beginning point/ending point (at both ends of the profile curve) and adjustment points (added by the clicking on the profile curve). % The selected adjustment point appears as a small red square. % By clicking [Previous] or [Next], you can switch the point selection to the previous or the next. % You can move the selected point by entering the coordinate values into the input boxes which are on the center of vertical/horizontal axises. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-49 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % When you want to delete the added point, drag it to the adjacent point or drop it outside of the profile curve area. % When you want to reset the adjusted setting, click [Undo] of [Profile Curve Adjustment]. 11.9.4 Complete the Profile After completing calculation, the Complete Profile screen appears. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-50 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export, and import the CMYKCMYK device link profile. 11.10.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the CMYK-CMYK device link profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the CMYK-CMYK device link profile is generated in the image controller. 11.10.2 Delete You can delete the saved CMYK-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-51 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected CMYK-CMYK device link profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the CMYK-CMYK device link profile you have deleted. 11.10.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved CMYK-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the CMYK-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-52 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 5 Click [OK]. The CMYK-CMYK device link profile information is changed. 11.10.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. 11.10.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the CMYK-CMYK device link profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to import. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-53 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The CMYK-CMYK device link profiles registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-54 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to create the new CMYK-CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.11.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Task Selection Measurement Feedback Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-55 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-55. 11.11.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of CMYK-CMYK device link profile you create to [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-56 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the CMYK-CMYK device link profile you create and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-56. 11.11.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, specify the printer profile and the CMYK target profile which are used by CMYK-CMYK device link profile. In addition, you can create the printer profile and the CMYK target profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by CMYK-CMYK device link profile. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-26 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-57 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the CMYK target profile which is used by CMYK-CMYK device link profile. When you use the existed CMYK target profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new CMYK target profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-14 to page 11-19. 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] - [Browse], select the CMYK target profile used and click [Open]. The selected CMYK target profile is displayed to [Selected Profile] of [CMYK Target Profile]. 5 Click [Next]. The Customize Color Conversions screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-58. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-58 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.4 Customize the Color Conversions On the Customize Color Conversions screen, you can set the rendering intent, the preserve mid-tone and preserve solid. 1 From [CMYK-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Relative Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion regarding the paper color as completely white. The paper color parts are represented as colorlessness after color conversion. % [Absolute Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion maintaining the measurement value of the paper color. The paper color parts are represented with the color near the actual paper color after color conversion. When you select [Absolute Colorimetric], [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] are not available. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 When you set the preserve mid-tone for one color, check [Preserve Mid-Tone] of that color. % [Preserve Mid-Tone] is a setting to recompose the color after the color conversion as the same one color which has composed the color before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y] and [K] is the setting for the color composed of C/M/Y/K only. % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 3 When you set the preserve solid for one color, check [Preserve Solid] of that color. % [Preserve Solid] is a setting to represent the solid part after the color conversion with the same color which is used for the solid part before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y], and [K] is the setting about the color composed of C/M/Y/K only, % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 4 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-59 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 5 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 6 Confirm the result of test printing. 7 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-59. 11.11.5 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-60. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-60 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.6 Confirm the Calculation Result Calculation Result screen displays the list of the setting of the generated CMYK-CMYK device link profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Select Task screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-60. 11.11.7 Select the Task On the Select Task screen, you can select whether to finish or to execute Measurement Feedback. 1 Select [Finish] or [Execute Measurement Feedback]. % The measurement feedback is the operation to improve the accuracy of the CMYK-CMYK conversion. 2 Click [Next]. % When you select [Finish], the Complete screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-64. % When you select [Execute Measurement Feedback], the Measurement Feedback screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-61. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-61 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback On the Measurement Feedback screen, you can execute the operation to improve the accuracy of the CMYKCMYK conversion. By repeating measurement with the instrument, you can acquire the best measurements to apply it to the profile. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. 1 To start the measurement feed back, click [Adjust]. [Feedback] screen appears. 2 Click [Measure]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-62 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Measurement] screen appears. 3 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 4 Specify the copy number of the chart outputting to [Copies]. 5 Click [Output] to print the chart. 6 Click [Start] to start measurement. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 7 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. 8 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. [Measurement] screen returns after saving the measurement result file. 9 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen returns. On [Feedback] screen, the measurement data is displayed. 10 Click [Execute Feedback]. Profile is calculated. After completing calculation, [Measurement] screen appears. 11 Repeat from step 4 to step 9. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. The attained level which indicates the improvement of the accuracy is displayed on [Attained Level] % The attained level is indicated in 3 levels. The maximum level of the attained level is indicated as "***". ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-63 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 12 Confirm [Attained Level] and repeat the operation from step 10 to step 11 up to the target level. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. % You can repeat these operations 8 times at the maximum. % When you reach the maximum level and click [Execute Feedback], the warning screen is displayed. When you execute the feedback, click [OK]. When you finish the feedback, click [Cancel]. 13 Confirm [Attained Level] is reached to the target level, and select the number of the feedback (n times) which acquires the value to adopt for profile from [Measurement Feedback to Apply]. 14 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 15 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 16 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 17 Confirm the result of test printing and click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-64. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-64 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.9 Complete the Profile On the Complete the Profile screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-65 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to edit the CMYK -CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. Color Centro Profiler enables the measurement feedback, the adjustment of the point color per object and the adjustment of the profile curve. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can edit the CMYK -CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.12.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler and Select the Task You can edit the CMYK-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to edit. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Edit]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Point Color/ Profile Curve Adjustment Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete Task Selection Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement Feedback Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete * Calculation is executed. * According to task selection, wizard branches. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-66 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. Select Task screen appears. 4 Select [Execute Measurement Feedback] or [Execute "Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment] and click [Next]. The Confirmation of procedure screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-66. 11.12.2 Confirm the Procedure According to the selection of the task, the content of the Confirmation of procedure differ. This section describes the example on which you select [Execute the Measurement Feedback]. 1 Confirm the content of the Confirmation of procedure screen, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-67. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-67 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.12.3 Set the Profile Name and the Destination The content of [Name Settings] do nor differ even if you select either on the Select Task screen. 1 Specify the name of CMYK-CMYK device link profile on [CMYK-CMYK device link Name] of [Name Settings] screen to edit. % When you save the CMYK -CMYK device link profile with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the CMYK -CMYK device link profile in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the CMYK -CMYK device link profile you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. According to the selection on the Select Task screen, the Measurement Feedback screen or the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % When you select [Execute Measurement Feedback] on the Select Task screen, the Measurement Feedback screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-68. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-68 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % When you select [Execute "Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment"] on the Select Task screen, the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-68. 11.12.4 Execute the Measurement Feedback On the Measurement Feedback screen, you can execute the measurement with the instrument. The operation of the Measurement Feedback screen is the same with page 11-61. % Execute the step described on page 11-61. The Complete Profile screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-73. 11.12.5 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve On the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen, you can execute the adjustment of the specified color outputting and profile curve. 1 When you execute the adjustment of the point color and the adjustment of the profile curve, click [Adjust]. The Adjustment screen appears. 2 If necessary, adjust the point color as follows; % When you add the new point color, execute the operation described on page 11-70. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-69 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % When you edit the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-70. % When you delete the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-71. 3 If necessary, execute the adjustment of the profile curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the profile curve, refer topage 11-71. 4 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 5 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Adjustment screen. 6 Confirm the result of test printing and click [OK]. The Adjustment is closed to return to the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen. 7 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Complete screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-73. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-70 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New]. A numbered line is added on [Adjustment Point]. 2 Specify the value (0 to 100) of the added point color of the added line to [C], [M], [Y] and [K]. The new input color is displayed on [Pointed Color]. 3 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color (below the [Result]) and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 4 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Edit the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to edit. The input color is displayed on the lower of the Sample Color (below [Result]). 2 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-71 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 3 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Delete the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to delete. 2 Click [Delete]. The selected adjustment point is deleted. Adjust the Profile Curve 1 From [Adjustment Curve], select [Input] or [Output]. % When you execute the adjustment of input curve, select [Input]. % When you execute the adjustment of output curve, select [Output]. 2 Select the combination of colors from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. % When you select [Input] or [Output], in both cases, select [C/M/Y/K], [CMY/K] or [CMYK]. % When you select [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the profile curves of each color of CMYK. % When you select [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated tone profile of CMYK. % When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated profile curve of CMY and the profile curve of K. 3 When you want to display the profile curve of one color, check [View] of that color. % When you want to hide the profile curve of one color, remove the check mark from [View] of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the profile curve of one color, select [Adj.] of that color. % When check mark of [View] for one color was not selected and you select [Adj.] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. 5 To execute the adjustment of the profile curve, you can drag and move the beginning point/ending point (at both ends of the profile curve) and adjustment points (added by the clicking on the profile curve). % The selected adjustment point appears as a small red square. % By clicking [Previous] or [Next], you can switch the point selection to the previous or the next. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-72 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % You can move the selected point by entering the coordinate values into the input boxes which are on the center of vertical/horizontal axises. % When you want to delete the added point, drag it to the adjacent point or drop it outside of the profile curve area. % When you want to reset the adjusted setting, click [Undo] of [Profile Curve Adjustment]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-73 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.12.6 Complete the Profile On the Complete the Profile screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management ] screen. 12 Color Default Settings ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-2 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 12 Color Default Settings 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings Use of the Color Centro enables to adjust the default color settings of the image controller. The default color settings which are set on this function are applied to the job without settings by the printer driver, to the direct printing job and to the job in which the default settings of the image controller is used. By using Color Centro, you can create and edit the color profile. You can also manage, create and edit the Color Configuration. For detailed information, refer to page 7-2. This chapter describes how to change the default settings of the color profile by using Color Centro. 12.1.1 [Color Default Settings] screen The color default setting function of Color Centro uses [Color Default Settings] screen. [Color Default Settings] screen appears by clicking [Color Default Settings] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The composition of [Color Default Settings] screen differs per tab. When [RGB] tab is selected, [Color Default Settings] screen is composed as follows; When [CMYK] tab is selected, [Color Default Settings] screen is composed as follows; ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-3 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 When [Other Settings] tab is selected, [Color Default Settings] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [Default Color Configuration Settings] Displays the Default Color Configuration of the image controller. The Default Color Configuration is set on the Color Configuration Management function. For detailed information, refer to page 7-2. [RGB] Displays the screen for the RGB data processing. [CMYK] Displays the screen for the CMYK data processing. [Other Settings] Displays the screen for the common processing of RGB/CMYK. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-4 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 [RGB] [No Color Conversion] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select this when the image controller doesn't execute the color conversion for the RGB data or uses the embedded RGB profile as default. [Use RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the RGB-CMYK device link profile as default. When you check, select the RGBCMYK device link profile for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. [Use RGB Source Profile] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the RGB source profile as default. When you check, select the RGB source profile. [Rendering] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select the default rendering setting for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. [RGB Simulation] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Check when you use the RGB simulation as default. [CMYK] [No Color Conversion] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Select this to use the embedded CMYK target profile as default. [Use CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the CMYK-CMYK device link profile as default. [Use CMYK Target Profile] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the CMYK target profile as default. [Paper Simulation] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the Paper Simulation as default. [Other Settings] [Printer Profile] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Specifies the default printer profile. [Paper Type Link] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you enable the paper type link as default. [Tone Curve] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Specifies the default tone curve. [Pure Black] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Specifies whether to use the pure black or not. Specifies the pure black setting. [Gray Replacement] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you use the gray replacement as default. [Black Overprint] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the black overprint as default. [Composite Overprint] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the composite overprint as default. [Use Spot Color] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you use the spot color as default. [Other Settings] [Use Alternative Color Conversion] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the alternative color conversion as default. [Create] Registers the adjustment result in the image controller. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-5 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 12.1.2 Menu of [Color Default Settings] screen The menu items of the [Color Default Settings] screen are as follows; 12.1.3 Basic operation of [Color Default Settings] screen This section describes basic operation of [Color Default Settings] screen. 1 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration. % For detailed information on how to confirm the name of Default Color Configuration, refer topage 10-5. 2 Set the default settings of the RGB-CMYK conversion manually. % For detailed information on how to set the RGB-CMYK conversion, refer to page 12-7. 3 Set the default settings of the CMYK-CMYK conversion manually. % For detailed information on how to set the CMYK-CMYK conversion, refer to page 12-7 4 Set the default settings of other settings manually. % For detailed information on how to set the other settings, refer topage 12-7 5 Set the color bar and the color setting information which is printed on the job outputting. % For detailed information on how to set the color bar and the color setting information, refer to page 12-9 6 If necessary, reset the color default setting to the factory default. % For how to operate it, refer to page 9-21. 7 Register the settings in the image controller. % For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Return to Factory Default] Resets the color default setting to the factory default. [Refresh] Reloads the information of the image controller connected currently. [Color Verification] Allows you to set the color bar and the color setting information which is printed on the job outputting. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-6 12.2 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration 12 12.2 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration This section describes how to confirm the name of Default Color Configuration. 1 Confirm [Default Color Configuration Settings] on [Color Default Setting] screen. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Default Settings when the Color Default Settings has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-7 12.3 Default Manual Settings 12 12.3 Default Manual Settings This section describes how to set the Color Default Settings of the image controller manually. The Color Default Settings function is used on screens displayed par 3 tabs. 12.3.1 Set the Default Settings of the RGB-CMYK Conversion On [RGB] tab - [Color Default Settings] screen, you can set the default settings for the conversion processing when the input data is RGB. 1 Click [RGB] tab. [RGB] tab appears. 2 When you don't execute the color conversion, select [No Color Conversion]. 3 When you use RGB-CMYK device link profile, check [Use RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile]. Then, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. 4 When you use RGB source profile, check [Use RGB Source Profile]. Then, select the RGB source profile to use. 5 From [Rendering] - [Image], select the rendering method for Image. 6 From [Rendering] - [Graphic], select the rendering method for Graphic. 7 From [Rendering] - [Text], select the rendering method for Text. 8 Check [Use RGB Simulation] when you use RGB Simulation. % Go to the step described on page 12-7. 12.3.2 Set the Default Settings of the CMYK-CMYK Conversion On [CMYK] tab - [Color Default Settings] screen, you can set the default settings for the conversion processing when the input data is CMYK. 1 Click [CMYK] tab. [CMYK] tab appears. 2 When you don't execute the color conversion, select [No Color Conversion]. 3 When you use CMYK-CMYK device link profile, check [Use CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile]. Then, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. 4 When you use CMYK target profile, check [Use CMYK Target Profile]. Then, select the CMYK target profile to use. 5 Check [Use Paper Simulation] when you use RGB Simulation. % Go to the step described on page 12-7. 12.3.3 Set the Other Default Settings On [Other Settings] tab - [Color Default Settings] screen, you can set the default settings for the other conversion processing. 1 Click [Other Settings] tab. [Other Settings] tab appears 2 Select the printer profile from [Printer Profile]. 3 Check [Paper Type Link] when you enable the paper type link function. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-8 12.3 Default Manual Settings 12 4 From [Tone Curve], select the default tone curve. 5 Select the setting of Pure Black from [Pure Black]. 6 Check [Gray Replacement] when you use Gray Replacement. 7 Check [Use Black Overprint] when you use Black Overprint. 8 Check [Black Overprint] when you use Black Overprint. 9 Check [Use Spot Color] when you use Spot Color. 10 Check [Use Alternative Color Conversion] when you use Alternative Color Conversion. % When you register the settings to the image controller, go to the step described on page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-9 12.4 Set Color Verification 12 12.4 Set Color Verification This section describes how to set the color bar and the color setting information. 1 From [File] menu, select [Color Verification]. [Color Verification] appears. 2 Click [The Color Setting Information] when you set the content of the color setting information for printing. % When you check [Date/Time], [Job Name], [User name], [Calibration Date/Time], [Printer Name], [RGB Color Conversion], [CMYK Color Conversion], [Tone Curve Name], [Spot Color], [Alternative Color Function], [Black Handling], or [Composite Overprint], you can set as the printing items on the job outputting. % From [Number of Lines], select the number of lines (1 to 5 lines). % From [Print Position], select the radio button to set the printing position. 3 When you set the color bar, check [Color Bar] and set the printing items. % Select [Use Registered Image] when you use the color patch which was registered at factory shipping. % Select [New Registration] when you use the eps file you specify, % When you select [New Registration] and check [User name], [Calibration Date/Time], [Printer Name], [RGB color Conversion], [CMYK Color Conversion], [Tone Curve Name], [Spot Color], [Alternative Color Function], [Black Handling] or [Composite Overprint], you can set as the printing items on the job outputting. % From [Print Position], select the radio button to set the printing position. 4 When you want to discard the current settings and use the registered settings at factory shipping, click [Initialize]. 5 When you register the settings of the color information and the color bar, click [Register]. [Color Verification] is closed to return to [Color Default Settings] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-10 12.5 Return to Factory Default 12 12.5 Return to Factory Default This section describes how to return the Color Default Settings of the image controller to the factory default. The factory default settings are as follows; 1 From the [File] menu, select [Initialize]. The confirmation message appears. 2 Click [OK]. Resets the priority to the factory default. % When you want to register the initialized settings of Color Default, go to the step described on page 10-12. [RGB] tab Check Job [No Color Conversion] OFF [Use RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] OFF [Use RGB Source Profile] ON [Rendering] Saturation RGB Simulation OFF [CMYK] tab Check Job [No Color Conversion] OFF [Use CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] OFF [Use CMYK Target Profile] ON [Paper Simulation] OFF [Other Settings] tab Check Job [Printer Profile] Fir Coat Paper [Paper Type Link] OFF [Tone Curve] Default Tone Curve [Pure Black] Text/Graphic [Gray Replacement] OFF [Black Overprint] ON [Composite Overprint] OFF [Use Spot Color] OFF [Use Alternative Color Conversion] OFF ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-11 12.6 Color Default Settings 12 12.6 Color Default Settings This section describes how to register the settings of [Color Default Settings] to the image controller as the default settings. 1 Click [Register] on [Color Default Settings] screen. Registration in image controller is executed. 13 Color Configuration Management ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-2 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 13 Color Configuration Management 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management Use of the Color Centro enables to set and manage "Profile Set" which is consolidated with several device link profiles and several device profiles which are used for one paper type. In addition, you can set and manage "Color Configuration" which is consolidated with several Profile Sets (used for all paper types) and other information of color settings. These functions of Color Centro allow you to execute the color setting adequately by only specifying the Color Configuration without executing the complex and various settings. 13.1.1 Outline of Profile Set The objects which compose the job are images, graphics and texts. In addition, there are RGB objects and CMYK objects. For use of this main body, you can set the device link profiles which are appropriate for all these objects. In addition to the profiles, on the color printing, to consider about the adequate hue corresponding to the paper type and outputting is also necessary. Therefore, the color setting needs the complex operations. For more efficient color settings, Color Centro manages the Profile Set which is integrated with all profiles (9 types) which are used for one paper type. The Profile Set includes the property information of the Profile Set (created date, updated date, etc.) besides the paper information and profile information. Color Centro manages the Profile Set by using the database. 13.1.2 Outline of Color Configuration To correspond to the multiple paper types, Color Configuration is consolidated with the multiple Profile Sets. When you specify one Color Configuration, to correspond to all paper types which are used on the printing job is enabled. The Color Configuration includes the basic color settings and the tone curve information as follows; Several Profiles Property Information Paper Information Profile Set RGB Source Profile CMYK Target Profile Printer Profile RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile (Image) RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile (Graphic) RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile (Text) CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile (Image) CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile (Graphic) CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile (Text) Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Color Paper Catalogue Name Basic Color Settings Tone Curve Information Spot Color Tone Curve Adjustment (ON/OFF) Black Overprint (ON/OFF) Tone Curve Name to use Alternative Color ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-3 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 The Color Configuration includes the property information of the Color Configuration (created date, updated date, etc.) besides the mentioned above. Color Centro manages the Color Configuration by using the database. The Profile Set can be used on the multiple Color Configuration and multiple Color Configurations can be registered. "Select Nearest Profile Set", one of the Color Configuration Management functions allows to select the Profile Set easily and you can set the Color Configurations easily, too. When you register several Color Configurations correspond to various cases, you can apply the color settings which are corresponding to the all paper types used in the job only by selecting. (The default color settings, which are set on the Color Default Settings of Color Centro, are applied to the job without settings by the printer driver and to the direct printing job.) 13.1.3 [Color Configuration Management] screen The Color Configuration management function of Color Centro uses [Color Configuration Management] screen. RGB Simulation (ON/OFF) Pure Black (OFF/Text/Text & Graphic) Grey Replacement (ON/OFF) Composite Overprint (OFF/Image Quality/Speed) Basic Color Settings Tone Curve Information Spot Color (ON/OFF) Black Overprint (ON/OFF) Alternative Color (ON/OFF) RGB Simulation (ON/OFF) Pure Black (OFF/Text/Text & Graphic) Gray Replacement Composite Overprint (OFF/High Quality/High Speed) Use Tone Curve Adjustment (ON/OFF) Tone Curve Name Default Profile Set Paper Type Default Basic Color Setting Information Tone Curve Setting Information Several Profiles Property Information Paper Infomration Profile Set (maximum 16) Color Configuration ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-4 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 [Color Configuration Management] screen appears by clicking [Color Configuration Management] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. [Color Configuration Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (Color Configuration list) Displays the Color Configuration of the image controller connected currently. [Color Configuration] - [New] Creates the new Color Configuration. [Color Configuration] - [Edit] Edits the Color Configuration. [Color Configuration] - [Delete] Deletes the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Color Configuration] - [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected Color Configuration from the list within [Controller]. [Selected Color Configuration Name] Displays the name of Color Configuration selected from the list. (Profile Set list) Displays the Profile Set of the image controller connected currently. [Profile Set] - [New] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and creates the new Profile Set. [Profile Set] - [Edit] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and edits the selected Profile Set. [Profile Set] - [Search] Searches the Profile Set and displays the search result to the list. [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] - [Setting] Allows you to set the default Profile Set of the Color Configuration. [Color Conversion Option Settings] - [Setting] Allows you to set the color conversion option of the Color Configuration. [Create] Registers the settings in the image controller. [Cancel] Discards the current settings. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-5 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 List Items The Color Configuration list and Profile Set list are displayed on [Color Configuration Management] screen. The list items of the Color Configuration list are as follows; The list items of the Profile Set list are as follows; On the Profile Set list, "*" mark is added after the name of the Profile Set which was registered at factory shipping (default registered Profile Set). List Operations The list of the [Color Configuration Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Color Configuration Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Color Configuration Name] (in case of Color Configuration list), or [Profile Set Name] (in case of Profile Set list). The list of the [Color Configuration Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. The list of the [Color Configuration Management] screen can switch the display of the list item to non-display. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. Item Description [Color Configuration Default] Displays the check mark when the Color Configuration is used as default. [Color Configuration Name] Displays the name of Color Configuration. [Created Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the new Color Configuration was created. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the Color Configuration was updated. [Memo] Displays the description of the profile. Item Description [ON] Displays the check mark when the Profile Set is used by the Color Configuration. [Default Profile Set] Displays the check mark when the Profile Set is used as default. [Profile Set Name] Displays the name of Profile Set. [Registered Name of Paper Profile] Displays the registered name of paper profile. [Paper Type Default] Displays the name of paper type setting used as default. [Paper Type] Displays the paper type. [Paper Weight] Displays the paper weight. [Paper Color] Displays the paper color. [RGB Source Type] Displays the RGB source type of the Profile Set. [CMYK Target Type] Displays the CMYK target type of the Profile Set. [Created Date/Time] Displays the created date/time of the Profile Set. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the Profile Set was updated. [Memo] Displays the description of the profile. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-6 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 13.1.4 Menu of [Color Configuration Management] screen The menu items of the [Color Configuration Management] screen are as follows; Menu Menu Items Description [File] [New] Creates the new Color Configuration. [Edit] Edits the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Delete] Deletes the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Set to Default Color Configuration] Sets the selected Color Configuration from the list to the Default Color Configuration. [Back to the Factory Default] Resets the Default Color Configuration to the factory default. [Import/Export] Imports (Registers) or Export the Color Configuration. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-7 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration 13 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration This section describes how to create the new Color Configuration. 13.2.1 Set the Name of Color Configuration 1 Click [New] of the Color Configuration list. The added line is displayed at the bottom of the Color Configuration list and "New Created Configuration Name" is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [New]. 2 Specify the name of the new Color Configuration to [New Created Configuration Name]. % Go to the step described on page 13-7. 13.2.2 Select the Profile Set % When you want to use the Profile Set, check [Use] on the Profile Set list. % For detailed information on how to create the new Profile Set, refer to page 13-14. % For detailed information on how to edit the Profile Set, refer to page 13-22page 13-30page 13-36. % Go to the step described on page 13-7. 13.2.3 Set the Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting. Specify the name of Profile Set to use as default in the new Color Configuration you create. 1 Click [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] - [Setting]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-8 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration 13 [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] screen appears. % [Default Profile Set], [Profile Set Name], [Paper Type Default] and [Paper Type] are displayed on the list on the left of the screen. % [Registered Name of Paper Profile], [Paper Weight], [Paper Color], [RGB Source Type], [CMYK Target Type], [Created Date/Time], [Updated Date/Time] and [Memo] are displayed on the list on the right of the screen. % The list on the left of the screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. % Both lists can switch the display of the list item to non-display. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. 2 To set the Profile Set manually, remove the check mark of [Select Nearest Profile Set]. To set the Profile Set automatically, check [Select Nearest Profile Set]. % When you check [Select Nearest Profile Set], go to step 4. 3 When you set the Profile Set manually, check [Default Profile Set] of the name of Profile Set to set as default. 4 Click [OK] and return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. % Go to the step described on page 13-8. 13.2.4 Set the Color Conversion Option Specify the Color Conversion setting to use as default for the Color Configuration you create. 1 Click [Color Conversion Option Settings] - [Setting]. [Color Conversion Settings] appears. 2 Select the setting of Pure Black from [Use Pure Black]. 3 Check [Use Gray Replacement] when you use Gray Replacement. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-9 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration 13 4 Check [Use Black Overprint] when you use Black Overprint. 5 Select the setting of Composite Overprint from [Use Composite Overprint]. 6 Check [Use Spot Color] when you use Spot Color. 7 Check [Use Alternative Color Conversion] when you use Alternative Color Conversion. 8 Check [Use RGB Simulation] when you use RGB Simulation. 9 Check [Use Tone Curve Adjustment] and specify the torn curve when you use Tone Curve Adjustment. 10 If necessary, enter the description to [Memo]. 11 Click [OK] and return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. % Go to the step described on page 13-9. 13.2.5 Register the Color Configuration This section describes how to register the settings to the image controller. 1 Click [Register] on [Color Configuration Management] screen. % When there is the Color Configuration with the same name, it is registered as another name automatically. In this case, the confirmation message appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-10 13.3 Edit the Color Configuration 13 13.3 Edit the Color Configuration This section describes how to edit the Color Configuration. 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration to edit. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Color Configuration] - [Edit]. The name of the selected Color Configuration is displayed to [Editing Color Configuration Name]. 3 When you want to use the Profile Set, check [Use] on the Profile Set list. % For detailed information on how to create the new Profile Set, refer to page 13-14. % For detailed information on how to edit the Profile Set, refer to page 13-22page 13-30page 13-36. 4 Click [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] - [Setting] and set Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-7. 5 Click [Color Conversion Option Settings] - [Setting] and specify the Color Conversion Option Settings. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-8. 6 Registers the settings in the image controller. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-9. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-11 13.4 Color Configuration Management 13 13.4 Color Configuration Management This section describes how to manage the Color Configuration. 13.4.1 Change the Default Color Configuration 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration you use as default. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Color Configuration] - [Edit]. The name of the selected Color Configuration is displayed to [Editing Color Configuration Name]. 3 From [File] menu, select [Set to Default Color Configuration]. [Color Configuration Default] of the selected Color Configuration is checked. 4 Register the settings in the image controller. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-9. 13.4.2 Copy the Color Configuration 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration to copy. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Copy]. % When you select the multiple Color Configurations, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. The duplication of the Color Configuration is generated in the image controller. 13.4.3 Delete the Color Configuration You can delete the Color Configuration. 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-12 13.4 Color Configuration Management 13 3 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected Color Configuration is deleted. % When you select the multiple Color Configurations, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the Color Configuration you have deleted. 13.4.4 Import (Register) / Export the Color Configuration Export the Color Configuration 1 From the [File] menu, select [Import/Export]. [Import/Export] screen appears. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the Color Configuration to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, click [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Export] screen appears. % When you select multiple Color Configurations, those are exported in order of the displayed list. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the Color Configuration to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Import/Export] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-13 13.4 Color Configuration Management 13 % When you select multiple Color Configurations, [Export] screen is displayed at the frequency which is equal to the number of the selected Color Configurations. In this case, go to the step 5. Import (Register) the Color Configuration 1 From the [File] menu, select [Import/Export]. [Import/Export] screen appears. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the Color Configurations are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the Color Configuration to import. 4 Click [Import]. % Similar operation can be done when you select [Import] from the right click menu on the selected line. % When you select multiple Color Configurations, those are imported in order of the displayed list. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. The tone curve is registered to [Controller]. [Import/Export] screen is closed to return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. 13.4.5 Reset the Default Color Configuration 1 From [File] menu, select [Back to the Factory Default]. The confirmation message appears. 2 Click [OK]. The current Default Color Configuration is reset to the Default Color Configuration which was registered at factory shipping. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-14 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5 Create the Profile Set This section describes how to create the new Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the Profile Set. The created Profile Set is saved to the image controller. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. Confirmation of Procedure Name Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Task Selection Measurement Feedback Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-15 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the Profile Set by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [New] on [Color Configuration Management] screen. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard.[Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 2 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-14. 13.5.2 Specify the Profile Set Name 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you create to [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-16. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-16 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, specify the printer profile, the CMYK target profile and the RGB source profile which are used by Profile Set. In addition, you can create the printer profile and the CMYK target profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-27 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the CMYK target profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed CMYK target profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new CMYK target profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-14 to page 11-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-17 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] - [Browse], select the CMYK target profile used and click [Open]. The selected CMYK target profile is displayed to [Selected Profile] of [CMYK Target Profile]. 5 Specify the RGB source profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB] which are preset to the image controller, select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. When you specify the other RGB source profile, select [Other] and click [Browse]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 6. % When you select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], go to step 7. 6 On the screen displayed by clicking [RGB Source Profile] - [Browse], select the RGB source profile used and click [Open]. The selected RGB source profile is displayed below [Other] of [RGB Source Profile]. 7 Click [Next]. The Customize Color Conversions screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-17. 13.5.4 Customize the Color Conversions On the Customize Color Conversions screen, you can set the rendering intent of CMYK-CMYK conversion, the preserve mid-tone / preserve solid of CMYK object (CYMK image, CMYK graphic and CMYK text) and the rendering intent of RGB object (RGB image, RGB graphic and RGB text). 1 From [CMYK-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Relative Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion regarding the paper color as completely white. The paper color parts are represented as colorlessness after color conversion. % [Absolute Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion maintaining the measurement value of the paper color. The paper color parts are represented with the color near the actual paper color after color conversion. When you select [Absolute Colorimetric], [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] are not available. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve mid-tone for one color, check [Preserve Mid-Tone] of that color. % [Preserve Mid-Tone] is a setting to recompose the color after the color conversion as the same one color which has composed the color before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y] and [K] is the setting for the color composed of C/M/Y/K only. % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-18 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 3 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve solid for one color, check [Preserve Solid] of that color. % [Preserve Solid] is a setting to represent the solid part after the color conversion with the same color which is used for the solid part before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y], and [K] is the setting about the color composed of C/M/Y/K only, % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 4 From [RGB-CMYK Conversion] of [ RGB Image] , [RGB Graphic] and [RGB Text] on the Customize Color Conversions screen, select the rendering intent for each object. % [Perceptual (RGB Image)] is the recommended setting of RGB Image to represent the color near to the color which is before conversion. % [Saturation (RGB Graphic, Text)] is the recommended setting of RGB Graphic/Text to represent the color which maintains as much as possible the brightness of the color which is before conversion. 5 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 6 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 7 Confirm the result of test printing. 8 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-19 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.5 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed in the Profile Set you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the Profile Set on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile Set is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-19. 13.5.6 Confirm the Calculation Result Calculation Result screen displays the list of the setting of the generated Profile Set. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Select Task screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-20. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-20 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.7 Select the Task On the Select Task screen, you can select whether to finish or to execute Measurement Feedback. 1 Select [Finish] or [Execute Measurement Feedback]. % The measurement feedback is the operation to improve the accuracy of the CMYK-CMYK conversion. 2 Click [Next]. % When you select [Finish], the Complete screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-64. % When you select [Execute Measurement Feedback], the Measurement Feedback screen appears. Go to the step described on page 13-20. 13.5.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback On the Measurement Feedback screen, you can execute the measurement with the instrument. The operation of the Measurement Feedback screen is the same with page 13-32. % On the Measurement Feedback screen, execute the step described on page 13-32. The Complete Profile Set screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-64. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-21 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.9 Complete the Profile Set On the Complete the Profile Set screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-22 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set This section describes how to edit the component profile of Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can edit the component profile of Profile Set. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Recalculation Setting Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-23 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can edit the Profile Set by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the list, select the Profile Set to edit and click [Modify]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard.[Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-24. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-24 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you edit in [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the Profile Set with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the Profile Set in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the Profile Set you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-25. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-25 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, as required, change the printer profile, the CMYK target profile and the RGB source profile which are used by Profile Set. In addition, you can create the printer profile and the CMYK target profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-27 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the CMYK target profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed CMYK target profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new CMYK target profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-14 to page 11-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-26 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] - [Browse], select the CMYK target profile used and click [Open]. The selected CMYK target profile is displayed to [Selected Profile] of [CMYK Target Profile]. 5 Specify the RGB source profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB] which are preset to the image controller, select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. When you specify the other RGB source profile, select [Other] and click [Browse]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 6. % When you select [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB], go to step 7. 6 On the screen displayed by clicking [RGB Source Profile] - [Browse], select the RGB source profile used and click [Open]. The selected RGB source profile is displayed below [Other] of [RGB Source Profile]. 7 Click [Next]. The Recalculate Profile Set screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-26. 13.6.4 Recalculate Profile Set On the Recalculate Profile Set screen, you can set to recalculate Profile Set and replace the device link profiles. 1 Check [Recalculate] of the device link profile which you want to recalculate. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of the device link profile which you want to replace, select the device link profile to use. % The device link profiles can be set per object. 3 Click [Next]. % The Customize Color Conversions screen appears when you have set to recalculate or replace the device link profile which was made on Color Centro Profiler. In this case, go to the step described on page 13-26. The Comment screen appears when you have set to recalculate or replace the device link profile which was not made on Color Centro Profiler or when you have not set to recalculate and replace. In this case, go to the step described on page 13-28. 13.6.5 Customize the Color Conversions When you have set to recalculate or replace the device link profile which was made on Color Centro Profiler, set the color conversions on the Customize Color Conversions screen. On the Customize Color Conversions screen, according to the setting on the Recalculate Profile Set screen, you can set the rendering intent of CMYK-CMYK conversion, the preserve mid-tone / preserve solid of CMYK ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-27 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 object (CYMK image, CMYK graphic and CMYK text) and the rendering intent of RGB object (RGB image, RGB graphic and RGB text). 0 You can't set the rendering intent when you replace all objects with the device link profile which was made / was not made on Color Centro Profiler. 1 From [CMYK-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Relative Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion regarding the paper color as completely white. The paper color parts are represented as colorlessness after color conversion. % [Absolute Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion maintaining the measurement value of the paper color. The paper color parts are represented with the color near the actual paper color after color conversion. When you select [Absolute Colorimetric], [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] are not available. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve mid-tone for one color, check [Preserve Mid-Tone] of that color. % [Preserve Mid-Tone] is a setting to recompose the color after the color conversion as the same one color which has composed the color before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y] and [K] is the setting for the color composed of C/M/Y/K only. % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 3 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve solid for one color, check [Preserve Solid] of that color. % [Preserve Solid] is a setting to represent the solid part after the color conversion with the same color which is used for the solid part before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y], and [K] is the setting about the color composed of C/M/Y/K only, % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 4 From [RGB-CMYK Conversion] of [ RGB Image] , [RGB Graphic] and [RGB Text] on the Customize Color Conversions screen, select the rendering intent for each object. % [Perceptual (RGB Image)] is the recommended setting of RGB Image to represent the color near to the color which is before conversion. % [Saturation (RGB Graphic, Text)] is the recommended setting of RGB Graphic/Text to represent the color which maintains as much as possible the brightness of the color which is before conversion. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-28 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 5 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 6 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 7 Confirm the result of test printing. 8 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-28. 13.6.6 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed in the Profile Set you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the Profile Set on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile Set is calculated and generated. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-29 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-42. 13.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile Calculation Result screen displays the list of the setting of the generated Profile Set. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile Set screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-30 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set You can improve the accuracy of the Profile Set by using the Measurement Feedback screen. On the Measurement Feedback screen, by repeating measurement with the instrument, you can acquire the best measurements to apply it to the profile. Although you can execute the measurement feedback when you edit the profile/Profile Set, this section describes how to execute the measurement feedback for Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can execute the measurement feedback. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 13.7.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. * As required, execute the measurement per object. * Calculation is executed. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement Feedback Calculation Complete ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-31 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 2 From the list, select the Profile Set to execute the measurement feedback and click [Measurement Feedback]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard.[Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-31. 13.7.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you edit in [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the Profile Set with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the Profile Set in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-32 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the Profile Set you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Measurement Feedback screen appears. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-32. 13.7.3 Execute the Measurement Feedback You can execute the measurement feedback per CMYK object (CMYK Image, CMYK Graphic and CMYK Text). It is executed on The Measurement Feedback screen. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. 1 To start the measurement feed back, click [Adjust] of the CMYK object to execute. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-33 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 [Feedback] screen appears. 2 Click [Measure]. [Measurement] screen appears. 3 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 4 Specify the copy number of the chart outputting to [Copies]. 5 Click [Output] to print the chart. 6 Click [Start] to start measurement. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 7 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-34 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 8 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. [Measurement] screen returns after saving the measurement result file. 9 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen returns. On [Feedback] screen, the measurement data is displayed. 10 Click [Execute Feedback]. Profile is calculated. After completing calculation, [Measurement] screen appears. 11 Repeat from step 4 to step 9. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. The attained level which indicates the improvement of the accuracy is displayed on [Attained Level] % The attained level is indicated in 3 levels. The maximum level of the attained level is indicated as "***". 12 Confirm [Attained Level] and repeat the operation from step 10 to step 11 up to the target level. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. % You can repeat these operations 8 times at the maximum. % When you reach the maximum level and click [Execute Feedback], the warning screen is displayed. When you execute the feedback, click [OK]. When you finish the feedback, click [Cancel]. 13 Confirm [Attained Level] is reached to the target level, and select the number of the feedback (n times) which acquires the value to adopt for profile from [Measurement Feedback to Apply]. 14 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 15 Repeat from step 1 to step 14 for other CMYK objects. The Measurement Feedback screen returns. 16 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 17 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 18 Confirm the result of test printing and click [Next]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-35 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 The Complete Profile Set screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-35. 13.7.4 Complete the Profile Set On the Complete the Profile Set screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. [Color Centro Profiler] screen returns. 2 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-36 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set On the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen, you can execute the adjustment of the color conversions of the Profile Set. Although you can execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment when you edit the profile/Profile Set, this section describes how to execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment for Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 13.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Point Color/ Profile Curve Adjustment Calculation Complete * As required, execute the measurement per object. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-37 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 2 From the list, select the Profile Set to execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment, and click [Adjustment]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-37. 13.8.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you edit in [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the Profile Set with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the Profile Set in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-38 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the Profile Set you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-38. 13.8.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve You can execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment per CMYK object (CMYK Image, CMYK Graphic and CMYK Text). 1 To execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment, click [Adjust] of the CMYK object to execute. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-39 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 The Adjustment screen appears. 2 If necessary, adjust the point color as follows; % When you add the new point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you edit the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you delete the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-48. 3 If necessary, execute the adjustment of the profile curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the profile curve, refer topage 11-48. 4 Repeat from step 1 to step 3 for other CMYK object. The Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. 5 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 6 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Adjustment screen. 7 Confirm the result of test printing and click [OK]. The Adjustment is closed to return to the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-40 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 8 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Complete Profile screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-42. Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New]. A numbered line is added on [Adjustment Point]. 2 Specify the value (0 to 255) of the added point color of the added line to [R], [G] and [B]. Or, select the color from [Color Setting] screen displayed by clicking [Color Palette]. And click [OK]. The new input color is displayed on [Pointed Color]. 3 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color (below the [Result]) and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 4 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Edit the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to edit. The input color is displayed on the lower of the Sample Color (below [Result]). 2 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-41 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 3 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Delete the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to delete. 2 Click [Delete]. The selected adjustment point is deleted. Adjust the Profile Curve 1 From [Adjustment Curve], select [Input] or [Output]. % When you execute the adjustment of input curve, select [Input]. % When you execute the adjustment of output curve, select [Output]. 2 Select the combination of colors from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. % When you select [Input], select [R/G/B] or [RGB]. % When you select [Output], select [C/M/Y/K], [CMY/K] or [CMYK]. % When you select [R/G/B] or [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the profile curves of each color. % When you select [RGB] or [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated profile curves of RGB or CMYK. % When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated profile curve of CMY and the profile curve of K. 3 When you want to display the profile curve of one color, check [View] of that color. % When you want to hide the profile curve of one color, remove the check mark from [View] of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the profile curve of one color, select [Adj.] of that color. % When check mark of [View] for one color was not selected and you select [Adj.] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-42 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 5 To execute the adjustment of the profile curve, you can drag and move the beginning point/ending point (at both ends of the profile curve) and adjustment points (added by the clicking on the profile curve). % The selected adjustment point appears as a small red square. % By clicking [Previous] or [Next], you can switch the point selection to the previous or the next. % You can move the selected point by entering the coordinate values into the input boxes which are on the center of vertical/horizontal axises. % When you want to delete the added point, drag it to the adjacent point or drop it outside of the profile curve area. % When you want to reset the adjusted setting, click [Undo] of [Profile Curve Adjustment]. 13.8.4 Complete the Profile Set On the Complete the Profile Set screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. [Color Centro Profiler] screen returns. 2 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-43 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9 Profile Set Management On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, you can manage Profile Set. This section describes how to manage the new Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. 13.9.1 Export Profiles You can export profiles form the Profile Set. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to export the profile. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Export Profiles]. [Export Profiles] appears. 4 When you save the exported profiles to the folder with the name of the Profile Set, check [Create New Folder with Profile Set Name]. 5 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse], select the place to save the profiles and click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-44 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 When you check [Create New Folder with Profile Set Name], the folder with the name of the Profile Set is created at the selected place. 6 On [Select Export Profile Type], check the profile to export and click [OK]. The selected profiles are exported to the specified place. [Export Profiles] screen is closed and the confirmation message appears. 7 Click [OK] on the confirmation message. [Color Centro Profiler] screen returns. 8 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 13.9.2 Copy the Profile Set You can make a duplication of the Profile Set in the image controller, to the image controller. In addition, the Profile Set saved on the local/network computer can be saved with another name to the local/network computer. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to copy. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Copy]. When you select the Profile Set in the image controller, [Copy Profile Set] screen appears. When you select the Profile Set on the local/network computer, [Save as] screen appears. % When you select the multiple Profile Sets, [Copy] isn't available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-45 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 4 Specify [Profile Set Name] (in case of the image controller) or [File Name] (in case of local/network). % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those in the image controller. % When you copy to the image controller, specify the Profile Set Name within 96 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. 5 Click [OK] (in case of the image controller) or [Save] (in case of local/network). The duplication of the Profile Set is generated. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, [Copy Profile Set] screen appears again. In this case, specify another Profile Set name and click [OK]. 6 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 13.9.3 Delete 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Delete]. The confirmation message appears. % You can delete the multiple Profile Sets. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. 4 Click [OK] on the confirmation message. Profile is deleted. 5 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-46 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9.4 Refresh the List (Reload) 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the folder to reload. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Reload]. The list is updated. 4 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 13.9.5 Confirm the Detail Info 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to confirm the detail information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Detail Info]. [Detail Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple Profile Sets, [Detail Info] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [View] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Confirm the content and click [OK]. [Detail Information] is closed. 5 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-47 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9.6 Change the Profile Set Information 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Change Info]. [Change Profile Set Information] appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Change Info] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Info]. 4 Edit [Profile Set Name] (within 96 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Comment (Optional)] (within 192 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % You can't change to the same name of the existed Profile Set in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The Profile Set information is changed. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, [Copy Profile Set] screen appears. In this case, specify another Profile Set name and click [OK]. 6 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-48 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9.7 Export the Profile Set You can export the RGB source profile of the image controller to Local or Network. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to export. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Export]. [Save As] screen appears. % When you select the multiple Profile Sets, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 4 Specify the saving place and file name for the Profile Set to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. 5 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-49 13.10 Environmental Setting 13 13.10 Environmental Setting You can select the monitor profile to match the adjustment point and the adjusted color accurately on the monitor when the point color adjustment is executed. This section describes how to set the monitor profile as the environmental setting of Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the [Tool] menu, select [Environmental setting]. [Environmental setting] screen appears. 3 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse], select the monitor profile to use and click [OK]. The selected monitor profile is applied. 4 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 14 Other Functions ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-2 14.1 Re-login on Connection Switching 14 14 Other Functions 14.1 Re-login on Connection Switching When you connect to the image controller which is different from the image controller currently connected, operate as follows; 0 When there are unregistered settings for the image controller connecting currently connected, register those to the image controller or save those to the local/network computer, as required. 0 To login, the IP address and the port number are necessary. When the port number is unknown, confirm the JSP settings of the image controller. (default: 30081) 0 Confirm that the image controller can communicate. 1 Select [File] menu - [Login] on the screen you are using. When the system can not find any unregistered/unsaved information, [Login] screen appears. % When you use the screen on which tree view is displayed, similar operation can be done by selecting other image controller on the tree view. % Similar operation can be done when you use [File]menu of [Launcher]. % While [Login] screen is displayed, [Launcher] screen is not available until login is completed. 2 Enter the IP address and the port number (30081 - 30090) of the image controller to which you want to connect "Color Centro" into [Destination] of [Login] screen, and click [OK]. % If the IP address is 192.168.0.1 and the port number is 30081, separate the IP address and the port number with a colon, and enter "192.168.0.1:30081". % You can select the IP address and the port number which were used before, from [Current Destination]. The input number is kept even after exiting Color Centro. % When you click [Cancel], the login process is canceled. % When you click [Help], the [Help] screen appears. % When there is unregistered/unsaved information on the current screen, or some screens are under use, the confirmation message appears. In this case, click [OK] if you want to close all the screens. When you want to register/save the unregistered/unsaved information to the image controller/computer, select [Cancel] and redo step 1 after necessary operation for registration/saving. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-3 14.2 List Operation 14 14.2 List Operation 14.2.1 Sorting by List Item You can sort the content by the list item on the following lists; - List of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen - List of [Spot Color Table Management] screen ([Table Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local]/[Network]), only) - List of [Profile Management] screen - List of [Color Configuration Management] screen (other than [Memo]) - Left list of [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] screen - List of [Import/Export] screen You can sort the list by clicking the list item name which becomes the key of sorting. When you click the item name, small triangle appears to the right of the name and you can confirm the order (upward: ascending order / downward: descending order). You can switch ascending order and descending order by clicking. Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Sort]. (Some screens don't have [Sort] menu) 14.2.2 Move of Row You can move the row of the following list; - List of [Color Configuration Management] screen (other than [Memo]) When you drag the item name to the right or left, you can move the position of the row. However, you can't move the following rows; [Color Configuration Default] and [Color Configuration Name] of the Color Configuration list, [Default Profile Set] and [Profile Set Name] of the Profile Set list. 14.2.3 Display/Non-Display List Item You can switch the row from display to non-display or its reverse on the following list; - List of [Color Configuration Management] screen - List of[ Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] (other than [Profile Set Name] and [Paper Type]). When you right click on the item name, sub menu appears. By selecting the row name from the sub menu, you can switch the row from display to non-display. However, you can't switch the following rows to non-display; [Color Configuration Default] and [Color Configuration Name] of the Color Configuration list, [Default Profile Set] and [Profile Set Name] of the Profile Set list. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-4 14.3 Print Set Up Information 14 14.3 Print Set Up Information You can print the settings of the image controller currently connected. 1 On [Launcher] screen, select [File] menu - [Print Set Up Information]. [Print Set Up Information] screen appears. % The IP address and the port number of the image controller you connected are displayed on [Current Destination]. 2 Confirm the port number of the image controller you connected is displayed to [Current Destination]. 3 From [Item], select the item to print. 4 From [Paper Tray], select the paper tray for printing of the setting list and click [Print]. The setting list is printed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-5 14.4 Suspend and Restart 14 14.4 Suspend and Restart When you click [Suspend the Operation] on the wizard screen of Color Centro Profiler, [Save As] screen appears. Using the saved file, you can restart the operation. 14.4.1 Suspend the Operation This section describes how to save the suspended operation to the file. 1 Click [Suspend the Operation] on the wizard screen. [Save As] screen appears. 2 Specify the file name and the destination folder for saving the current operation and click [Save]. Current operations are saved and the wizard screen is closed. 14.4.2 Restart the Suspended Operation When you click [Suspend the Operation] on the wizard screen of Color Centro Profiler, [Save As] screen appears. This section describes how to restart the operation using the saved file. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-6 14.4 Suspend and Restart 14 2 Click [Restart Suspended Operation]. [Open] screen appears. 3 Specify the file with the suspended operation and click [Open]. The wizard screen when operation was suspended is displayed. 15 Troubleshooting ColorCentro (IC-601) 15-2 15.1 Cannot start Color Centro 15 15 Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve issues and problems that you may encounter while using the printer. 15.1 Cannot start Color Centro If you cannot start Color Centro, check the following items in order from beginning to end. When the above troubleshooting does not eliminate the problem, refer to the [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference]. Problem Possible Cause Remedy Cannot start There is a possibility that the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is not installed. When the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is not installed, install it. [Windows Security Alert] appears. Color Centro may be blocked by the firewall. Allow the communication by Java application on your network. Cannot connect to the network. The network cable may be disconnected. Check that the cable is correctly connected. An error may have occurred on this machine. Check the control panel of this machine. Cannot connect to the image controller. IP address and the port number may be wrong. Confirm the JSP settings of the image controller. An error may have occurred on the image controller. Check the control panel of this machine. ColorCentro (IC-601) 15-3 15.2 Cannot Adjust Color 15 15.2 Cannot Adjust Color Problem Possible Cause Remedy Cannot print with the adjusted color conversion When printing from the application which has the color management function such as Adobe Reader9, the application might execute another color conversion. Print after enabling "Color management by the printer" on each application. For detailed information on how to change the color setting in each application, refer to help and the manual etc. of each application. On measurement, "BAR or MARK is not found" is displayed and can not execute measurement There may be problem on recognizing the bar (black bold line) or the mark (diamond mark at right and left) on the chart. Confirm the manual of the measurement instrument. A dotted line for the cutout on the chart might be a cause of the recognition error of the measurement instrument. When you cut the chart along and slightly inside the dotted line, normal recognition might be done. 16 Appendix ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-2 16.1 Glossary 16 16 Appendix 16.1 Glossary Item Description 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Cables made of 2 stranded copper wire rods are used. Communication speed is 10Mbps with 10Base-T, 100Mbps with 100Base-TX, and 1000Mbps with 1000Base-T. Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web browser with dedicated plug-in software. AppleTalk The generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Bonjour A Macintosh network technology, automatically detecting a device connected to the network for automatic configuration. Previously called "Rendezvous", and has been changed to "Bonjour" since Mac OS X v10.4. BOOTP The abbreviation for Bootstrap Protocol. The protocol is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Instead of BOOTP, DHCP, an advanced protocol based on BOOTP, is typically used today. Brightness Brightness of a display or other screen. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. client A computer using services provided by servers via the network. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The protocol is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. DNS Abbreviation of Domain Name Systems. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. DPI (dpi) Abbreviation of Dots Per Inch. Unit of resolution used with printers, scanners, etc. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software to act intermediately between the computer and peripheral devices. Ethernet Standard for the LAN transmission line. Frame type A type of communication format used in NetWare environments. For mutual communication, the same frame type is required. FTP Abbreviation of File Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to transfer files on the TCP/IP network such as Internet, Intranet, etc. Gateway Hardware or software serving as a point connecting networks. A gateway not only connects networks but also changes data formats, addresses, and protocols according to the connected networks. ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-3 16.1 Glossary 16 Gray Scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Hard disk Mass storage device to save data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. Host Name Name of a device on the network. HTTP Abbreviation of HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to transmit or receive data between a web server and client (web browser, etc.). Files of image, voice, animation, etc. correlated with the document can be exchanged including the expression form and other information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. IP Address A code (address) to identify individual network devices on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32-bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is allocated to all computers and other devices connected to the Internet. IPP The acronym for Internet Printing Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive print data or control printers via the Internet or other TCP/IP network. IPP can also send and print data to printers in remote areas via the Internet. IPX One of the protocols used for NetWare. IPX runs in the network layer of the OSI reference model. IPX/SPX The abbreviation for Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. This is a protocol developed by Novell, Inc., typically used in NetWare environments. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. Local printer A printer connected to a parallel or USB port of a computer. LPD The acronym for Line Printer Daemon. This is a platform-independent printer protocol running on the TCP/IP network. The protocol was originally developed for BSD UNIX, and has become one of the printing protocols typically used among general computers. LPR/LPD The acronym for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. This is a printing method implemented via networks, used for Windows NT or UNIX based systems. It uses TCP/IP to output printing data from Windows or UNIX to a printer on the network. MAC address MAC is the acronym for Media Access Control. A MAC address is an ID number unique to each Ethernet card, enabling sending or receiving data to or from other Ethernet cards. A Mac address is a 48-bit number. The first 24 bits are controlled by IEEE and used to allocate a unique number to each manufacture, whereas the latter 24 bits are used by each manufacturer to assign a unique number to each card. Memory Unit to save data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. NDPS The acronym for Novell Distributed Print Services. This provides a high performance printing solution in NDS environments. Using NDPS for the print server simplifies and automates complicated management activities related to printer use. For example, you can print to a desired printer or automatically download the printer driver for a newly installed printer. NDPS print servers also integrate management related to the network printers. NDS The acronym for Novell Directory Services. This allows the centralized management in a hierarchical structure of shared resources such as servers, printers and users information on the network, as well as the access privilege and other information related to the users. NetBEUI The abbreviation for NetBIOS Extended User Interface. This is a network protocol developed by IBM. NetBEUI enables you to construct a small-scale network simply by configuring computer names. NetBIOS Abbreviation of Network Basic Input Output System. This is a communication interface developed by IBM. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell. This uses NetWare IPX/SPX for the communication protocol. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-4 16.1 Glossary 16 Nprinter/ Rprinter A remote printer support module used when using a printer server in NetWare environments. Rprinter is used for NetWare 3.x, and Nprinter for NetWare 4.x. OHP/OHT A transparent sheet used for OHP (Overhead projector). This is used for presentations. OS Abbreviation of Operating System. Basic software to control the computer system. Windows, MacOS, and Unix are examples. Outline font A type of fonts represented using lines and curves to display an outline of a character. Larger-size characters can be displayed on a screen or printed with no jagged edges. PDF Abbreviation of Portable Document Format. One of electronic documents (extension: .pdf). PDF is a PostScript based format, and can be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader, a free viewer software. PDL The acronym for Page Description Language. This is a language used to instruct a page printer about images being printed on each page. Peer-to-peer A type of network where the connected devices can be communicate with each other without using a dedicated server. Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the device becomes operable. PostScript A typical page-descriptive language developed by Adobe and commonly used for high quality printing. PPD The acronym for PostScript Printer Description. This is a file with the description of resolution, available paper sizes, and other information specific to a PostScript printer model. Preview A function allowing you to view a result image before being actually processed for printing or scanning. Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Print queue A software system used by a spooler to save generated print jobs. Printer buffer A memory area temporarily used for processing data of print jobs. Printer driver Software acting as an intermediate between the computer and printer. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, different functions can be configured by utilizing its properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol Rules by which a computer communicates with other computer or peripheral device. Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections. PServer A print server module available in NetWare environments. This module monitors, changes, pauses, restarts, or cancels print jobs. Queue name A logical printer name required for LPD/LPR printing. Queue Name A name assigned to each device for allowing printing to the device via network. Resolution Degree how correctly the details of images or prints can be reproduced. RGB The acronym for Red, Green, and Blue. The RGB are the primary three colors used for monitor and other devices, producing any of the full colors by changing their brightness ratio. RIP The acronym for Raster Image Processor. RIP extracts picture images from text data created using PostScript or other page description language. This processor is usually integrated into a printer. Samba UNIX server software which uses SMB (Server Message Block) to make UNIX system resources available to Windows environments. Screen font A type of fonts used for displaying characters and symbols on a CRT or other monitor. Shared printer A printer connected to a server on the network and configured to be used by multiple computers. SLP The acronym for Service Location Protocol. This is a protocol that provides capabilities such as finding services or automatic client configuration on the TCP/IP network. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-5 16.1 Glossary 16 SMB Abbreviation of Server Message Block. A protocol used mainly to realize sharing of files or printers through the network between Windows. SMTP Abbreviation of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol to transmit or transfer the electronic mails. SNMP The acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. This is a management protocol in the TCP/IP network environments. Spool The acronym for Simultaneous Peripheral Operation On-Line. Data to be output to a printer is not sent directly to the printer, but is temporarily stored in another location. The stored data is then sent collectively to the printer. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. TCP/IP Abbreviation of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. Touch & Print A feature that allows documents sent from the printer driver to be printed simply by placing your finger or IC card on the authentication unit connected to the printer when the user authentication is enabled. In order to use the Touch & Print feature, an authentication unit must be connected to this machine, and the vein patterns or the ID of the IC card for each user must be registered. TrueType A type of outline font developed by Apple and Microsoft, and currently used as a standard font type for Macintosh and Windows. This type of font can be used both for display and printing. Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. Web browser Software to access web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. WINS The acronym for Windows Internet Naming Service. This is a service, available in Windows environments, to call the name server responsible for conversion between a computer name and an IP address. XPS Abbreviation of XML Paper Specification. This is one of the electronic document formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. It is first supported in Windows Vista. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-6 16.2 Index 16 16.2 Index A Adjust the Each Color ................................................8-15 Alternative Color ................................................ 5-7, 10-2 B Brightness/Contrast ...................................................8-13 C Calibration ........................................................... 5-5, 7-2 Chart .................................................................. 7-7, 9-11 CMYK Target Profile ...................................... 11-9, 11-13 Color Centro Profiler ................................................13-49 Color Configuration Management ..................... 5-8, 13-2 Color Default Settings ................................................12-2 Composition of User's Guide ......................................1-2 Control Panel ...............................................................2-4 Conventions used in this manual ................................1-4 G Glossary .....................................................................16-2 I Input Color .................................................................10-7 Installation ...................................................................4-2 Instrument ....................................................................7-6 L Launcher ......................................................................5-4 Login ............................................................................5-2 O Operating environment ................................................2-6 Output Color ..............................................................10-8 Overview of the Color Centro ......................................2-2 P Paper indication ...........................................................1-5 Paper size ....................................................................1-5 Precautions for Installation ..........................................3-2 Print Set Up Information ............................................14-4 Printer Profile ...........................................................11-25 Profile Management .......................................... 5-7, 11-2 Profile Set ..................................................................13-2 R RGB Source Profile ....................................................11-5 S Spot Color ........................................................... 5-6, 9-2 Spot Color Table ..........................................................9-5 T TCP/IP Settings ...........................................................3-3 Tone Curve Adjustment ....................................... 5-6, 8-2 Trouble .......................................................................15-2 http://konicaminolta.com 163/211 GDI User Manual GDI Printer Controller Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 Software end user license agreement............................................ 1-5 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions................................................ 1-8 Safety advices................................................................................ 1-8 Sequence of action ........................................................................ 1-8 Tips ................................................................................................ 1-9 Special text markings..................................................................... 1-9 1.3 Operating environment .................................................................. 1-10 System requirements ................................................................... 1-10 Recommended operating environment ....................................... 1-10 1.4 Installing the printer driver ............................................................ 1-10 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box.................................................... 2-3 Displaying the settings dialog box ................................................. 2-3 Printing Preferences dialog box..................................................... 2-5 Properties dialog box..................................................................... 2-7 2.2 Device Options tab ........................................................................... 2-9 Device Options............................................................................. 2-10 Memory ........................................................................................ 2-10 2.3 Common operations....................................................................... 2-11 Common items............................................................................. 2-11 Easy Set ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.4 Setup tab ......................................................................................... 2-14 Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14 Original Size ................................................................................. 2-15 Edit Custom ................................................................................. 2-17 Output Size .................................................................................. 2-20 Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21 Copy............................................................................................. 2-21 Collate .......................................................................................... 2-22 Paper Source ............................................................................... 2-23 Paper Type................................................................................... 2-24 Contents-2 GDI Printer Controller Output Method.............................................................................. 2-24 Using secure printing .................................................................... 2-25 Specifying secure printing from the printer driver ........................ 2-25 Printing from the machine............................................................. 2-26 2.5 Layout tab ........................................................................................ 2-28 Combination ................................................................................. 2-29 Combination Details...................................................................... 2-30 Double-sided printing ................................................................... 2-31 2.6 Per Page Setting tab ....................................................................... 2-32 Front Cover Page.......................................................................... 2-33 Front Cover Paper Source ............................................................ 2-33 Media Type ................................................................................... 2-33 2.7 Watermark tab ................................................................................. 2-34 Watermark Select ......................................................................... 2-34 Creating a new watermark............................................................ 2-35 Editing a watermark ...................................................................... 2-37 2.8 Quality tab ........................................................................................ 2-40 Resolution ..................................................................................... 2-40 Adjustment.................................................................................... 2-41 3 Control panel operations 3.1 Printing operations............................................................................ 3-3 Control panel .................................................................................. 3-3 Printer indicator .............................................................................. 3-5 Starting the print operation............................................................. 3-5 Canceling a print job....................................................................... 3-6 Using the manual bypass tray ........................................................ 3-8 Power Save mode......................................................................... 3-10 4 Troubleshooting 4.1 Checking error messages ................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Main error messages ........................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Print data when an error occurs ...................................................... 4-5 With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error ............................................... 4-5 Temporary errors ............................................................................ 4-5 5 Specifications 1 Introduction Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-3 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing this machine. This manual provides the information required to use this machine as a GDI printer. Be sure to read this manual before performing any operations. For precautions concerning the use and safety of the machine, refer to the User manual provided with the machine. Store the CD-ROM and User manual provided with the machine in a safe place. Trademarks and copyright - KONICA MINOLTA, the KONICA MINOLTA logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. - PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. - Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. - Novell and Novell NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. - Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. - Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. - Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. - PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. 1 Introduction 1-4 GDI Printer Controller Copyright © 2007 Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Note - This User manual may not be reproduced in part or in full without permission. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. will not be held liable for any incidents caused by using this printing system or User manual. - Information included in this User manual is subject to change without notice. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. maintains the copyright of the printer drivers. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-5 1.1 Software end user license agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OF THIS SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THE PACKAGE, OR DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOUR LAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THEM, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, USE THE SOFTWARE, NOR OPEN THE PACKAGE. 1. COPYRIGHT AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc.("Konica Minolta") owns, or has been licensed from other owners ("Konica Minolta Licensor"), copyrights and other intellectual property rights of the Software, and any and all rights and title to the Software and any copy made from it are retained by Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor. In no event, this Agreement shall be deemed to assign any copyright and/or any intellectual property rights of the Software from Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor to you. The Software is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. 2. LICENSE Konica Minolta hereby grant to you a non-exclusive and limited license, and you may: (i) install and use the Software only on your computer(s) connected with Konica Minolta product for which this Software is designed; (ii) allow users of the computers described above to use the Software, provided that you assure that all such users comply with the terms of this Agreement; (iii) use the Software only for your own customary business or personal purpose; (iv) make one copy of the Software only for backup purpose in the support of the normal and intended use of the Software. (v) transfer the Software to other party by transferring a copy of this Agreement and all documentation along with the Software, provided that (a) you must, at the same time, either transfer to such other party or destroy all your other copies of the Software, (b) such transfer of possession terminates your license from Konica Minolta, and (c) you must assure that such other party has agreed to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If such other party does not accept such terms and conditions then you shall not transfer any copy of the Software. 1 Introduction 1-6 GDI Printer Controller 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) You shall not without the written consent of Konica Minolta: (i) use, copy, modify, merge or transfer copies of the Software except as provided herein; (ii) reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or any other way analyze the Software; or (iii) sublicense, rent, lease or distribute the Software or any copy thereof. (iv) remove, use, or alter any trademark, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Software. (2) You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any country. 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES (1) If the Software is furnished on CD-ROM(s) or other tangible object that is used for storage of digital data (hereinafter collectively "Storage Medium"), Konica Minolta warrants the Storage Medium to be free from the defects in material and workmanship under normal use, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTIES APPLICABLE TO STORAGE MEDIUM ONLY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES AND KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. (2) IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES NOR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES OR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM. (3) The disclaimer of warranty hereunder does not affect your statutory rights. In case of the disclaimer is not allowed by applicable law, the disclaimer shall only apply to you to the maximum extent permitted by the law. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-7 5. TERMINATION You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and all your copies of it. This Agreement shall also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms hereof. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy all copies of the Software in your possession. 6. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan. 7. SEVERABILITY In the event that any part or parts of this agreement shall be held illegal or null and void by any court or administrative body of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not effect the remaining parts of this agreement and they shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts determined illegal or void had not been included. 8. NOTICE TO US GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (October 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (September 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY OTHER STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS THAT ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. NO AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY OPENING THE PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. 1 Introduction 1-8 GDI Printer Controller 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-9 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. 1 Introduction 1-10 GDI Printer Controller 1.3 Operating environment System requirements The following environment is required so that the printer driver can be used. - Intel Pentium 200 MHz - Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, or Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition - 128 MB RAM (Windows XP/Server 2003), 64 MB RAM (Windows 2000/Me/98 SE) - USB port compliant with USB Revision 2.0 - CD-ROM/DVD drive 2 Note The printer driver is not compatible with Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Recommended operating environment Pentium 4/1.6 GHz 256 MB RAM 1.4 Installing the printer driver % Please refer to the folder "Installation" of the CD. 2 Specifying printer driver settings Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-3 2 Specifying printer driver settings Descriptions on the printer driver settings available when printing from a computer are provided below. 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box Displaying the settings dialog box Select the printer in the Printers and Faxes window (the Printers window in Windows Vista/2000/Me/98 SE), and then display the printer driver settings dialog box. The settings specified in this dialog box are applied to all applications. 1 Open the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window). – For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista, click the [Start] button, click "Control Panel", click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Printers". – For Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". 2 In the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), select the printer icon for this machine. 3 Select the command for displaying the printer driver settings dialog box. – With Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer, and then click "Printing Preferences". – With Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-4 GDI Printer Controller The following printer driver settings dialog box appears. 2 Note To change the settings for each job to be printed, click the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) in the Print dialog box, which appears when "Print" is clicked in the application. The settings specified in the dialog box displayed from the Print dialog box are only applied temporarily, and the settings return to those in the printer driver settings dialog box when the application is exited. A program containing specified driver settings can be registered and recalled when needed by using the Easy Set function. For details on the Easy Set function, refer to "Easy Set" on page 2-12. To display the Device Options tab in Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/ 2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-5 Printing Preferences dialog box Printing settings can be specified from the printer driver settings dialog box. 2 Note To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows XP/ Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Printing Preferences". To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu of the Printers window. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-6 GDI Printer Controller Tab Item Description Setup Orientation Select the paper orientation of the document. Original Size Specify the paper size for the document. [Edit Custom] button Specify a user-defined paper size. Output Size Specify the size of paper to be printed on. If this size is different from the original document size, the image will automatically be enlarged or reduced. Zoom Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio. Copy Specify the number of copies to be printed. Collate Select whether multiple copies of a multi-page document is to be printed by set or by page. Paper Source Select the paper drawer that is to be used. Paper Type Select the type of paper that is to be used. Output Method Select the output method. Layout Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. [Combination Details] button Settings such as the number of pages printed on a single sheet of paper and the printing order can be specified as combination details. Double Sides Select whether pages are printed double-sided. Binding Position Select the binding position. Per Page Setting Front Cover Page Select whether a document page is printed on the front cover. Front Cover Paper Source Select the paper drawer loaded with paper for the front cover. Media Type Select the type of paper used for the front cover. Watermark Watermark Select Select whether the document is printed overlapping a watermark (text stamp). 1st Page Only Select if the watermark is printed only on the first page. [New] button Create new watermarks. [Edit] button Change the watermarks. [Delete] button Delete a watermark. Quality Resolution Specify the print resolution. [Adjustment] button Specify the brightness and contrast. About - Shows the software version information. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-7 Properties dialog box Installed options can be selected from the Properties dialog box for the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-8 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Tab Item Description Device Options Device Options Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. Memory Specify the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-9 2.2 Device Options tab % Specify whether or not options are installed so that the options installed on the machine can be used from the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-10 GDI Printer Controller Device Options % Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. – From the "Device Options" list, double-click the names of installed paper drawers to specify that it is installed. Double-click the name again to return the setting to "Not Installed". Memory % Specify the size of the installed memory. – Click [,] on the right side of the "Memory" box, and then select the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-11 2.3 Common operations This section contains descriptions of buttons and functions common to all tabs of the dialog box. The actual buttons may appear differently depending on the operating system. Common items Button Description [OK] button Click this button to apply the specified settings and close the dialog box. [Cancel] button Click this button to cancel the specified settings (not apply them) and close the dialog box. [Apply] button Click this button to apply the specified settings without closing the dialog box. This button is not displayed on the setting screen that appears when the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) is clicked in the Print dialog box of the application. [Help] button When this button is clicked, help information for the currently displayed settings appears. Preview Shows a preview of the specified paper settings or shows the printer status. Click the button in the lower-left corner of the preview to change it between [Paper View] and [Printer View] and to select the preview display. When the [Paper View] preview is selected, a sample page layout for the currently selected settings is displayed so that an image of the print result can be checked. When the [Printer View] preview is selected, an image of the printer configuration, including the options, such as the paper drawers, currently installed on the machine, is displayed. The paper drawers selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab appear in light blue. Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later. Paper View Printer View 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-12 GDI Printer Controller Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later when you wish to use those settings again. 1 Change the driver settings on the Setup and Layout tabs. 2 In the "Easy Set" box, type the name of the program. 3 Click the [Save] button. The settings program is registered. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-13 2 Note To recall a registered program, select it from the list. To change the name of the registered program, select the program from the list, and then type in the new program name. The button changes to the [Rename] button. To change the program name, click the [Rename] button. To delete a registered program, select the program from the list. The button changes to the [Delete] button. To delete the program name, click the [Delete] button. If "Factory Default" is selected from the list, all settings return to their defaults. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 31 programs can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-14 GDI Printer Controller 2.4 Setup tab From the Setup tab, settings can be specified for the document and paper to be printed on. The number of copies to be printed and the orientation of the printed image can also be specified. Orientation % Select whether to print the document in the portrait or landscape orientation. Portrait Landscape Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-15 Original Size % From the drop-down list, click the paper size for the document to select it. The following standard paper sizes are available. Setting Actual size Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in. Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in. 11 e 17 11 e 17 in. A3 297 e 420 mm A4 210 e 297 mm A5 148 e 210 mm B4 257 e 364 mm B5 182 e 257 mm Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in. Env.DL 110 e 220 mm Env.C6Envelope 114 e 162 mm FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm FLS 220 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm 11 e 14 11 e 14 in. Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in. Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm 8K 270 e 390 mm 16K 195 e 270 mm Hagaki 100 e 148 mm Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-16 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note If "Hagaki" is selected, select the "Hagaki" paper setting for Tray 1 from the control panel of the machine. "Hagaki" and the envelope and non-standard sizes can be selected when "Paper Source" is set to "Auto", "Tray 1" or "Bypass". When "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", only "Letter" and "A4" are available. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-17 Edit Custom A paper size that does not appear in the list can be registered as a custom size. 1 Click the [Edit Custom] button on the Setup tab. The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears. 2 Click the [New] button. The Custom Size Settings dialog box enlarges to display settings for specifying the paper size. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-18 GDI Printer Controller 3 In the "Name" box, type the name of the paper size. 4 In the "Dimensions" group box, specify the width and length of the paper. – To change the units for specifying the paper size, select the desired setting in the "Unit" group box. 5 Click the [OK] button in the lower-right corner of the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The paper size settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box are hidden. 6 Click the [OK] button in the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The non-standard size is registered and can be selected from the list of paper sizes. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-19 2 Note To change the width and length of a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, click the [Edit] button, and then change the settings. The name cannot be changed. To delete a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, and then click the [Delete] button. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 32 sizes can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-20 GDI Printer Controller Output Size % Select the size of paper that is to be used for printing. – The available standard paper sizes are same as those available in the "Original Size" list. – If the paper size is different from the size selected in the Original Size list, the document image will be printed enlarged or reduced so that it fits in the selected paper size. – The enlargement/reduction ratio to be used for printing can be checked in the Paper preview. 2 Note If "Manual" is selected in the "Zoom" group box, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. If any setting other than "Off" is selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-21 Zoom 1 Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio to be used for printing. 2 Select "Manual", and then type in a number between 25% and 400%, or click the arrows to specify a setting. 2 Note If any setting other than "Same as Original Size" is selected in the "Output Size" list, "Manual" cannot be selected. Copy 1 Specify the number of copies to be printed. 2 Type in a number between 1 and 99, or click the arrows to specify a setting. Reduced Original Enlarged 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-22 GDI Printer Controller Collate % When printing multiple copies of the same document, select whether the entire document is printed one copy at a time or whether the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. – When the "Collate" check box is selected, the entire document is printed one copy at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the entire document (from the first page to the last page) is printed five times. – When the "Collate" check box is cleared, the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the first page of the document is printed five times, and then the second page is printed five times. Printing continues until the last page is printed five times. 2 Note Depending on the application being used, the Collate setting may not be applied. If Collate is specified from the printer driver, Collate cannot be used in the application. If "1" is specified in the "Copy" box, Collate is not available. Check box selected Check box cleared Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-23 Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper. – If "Auto" is selected, the paper drawer loaded with paper of the size specified in the "Output Size" list is used. – The available settings differ depending on the options that are installed. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass 2 Note If "Hagaki" or an envelope or non-standard size is selected in the "Original Size" list, only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available. Only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available when "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", "Thick Paper" or "Envelope". Tray Bypass tray 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-24 GDI Printer Controller Paper Type % Select the type of paper to be printed on. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope 2 Note A setting can be selected only when "Paper Source" is set to "Tray 1" or "Bypass". "OHP" can be selected only when "Original Size" is set to "Letter" or "A4". Output Method % Select the printing method. – Not only can data be printed directly, but "Secure Print" is also available, which requires a password for printing from this machine. – Settings: Print, Secure Print 2 Note "Secure Print" is available only if the optional expanded memory unit is installed. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-25 Using secure printing A password can be specified for a document. The document printed from a computer is temporarily saved in the machine’s memory and is printed when the password is entered with the machine’s control panel. Select this setting when printing highly confidential documents. Specifying secure printing from the printer driver 1 Click the Setup tab. 2 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Secure Print". A screen appears, allowing you to type in the password. 3 Type in the password, and then click the [OK] button. – Specify the 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999. 4 The print job is sent. – Normal printing is performed when printing is specified from an application. Entering the password 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-26 GDI Printer Controller Printing from the machine The password must be entered from the control panel of the machine in order to print a document with a password specified when "Secure Print" is selected in the printer driver. 1 Check that the "Printer" indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check that the key icon appears in the upper-right corner of the screen. – The key icon appears if the memory contains a secure print document. 3 Press the [Access] key. PRINTER MODE PRINT WAITING Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-27 4 When "PASSWORD: – – – –" appears, type in the password. – Type in the same numbers specified as the password from the printer driver. 5 Check that the document can be printed. If the password is correct, the following screen appears, and the job is printed. 2 Note If there are multiple secure print jobs with the same password, all of those secure print jobs are printed. PRINTER MODE PASSWORD:---- ______ACCEPTED_____ PASSWORD:**** 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-28 GDI Printer Controller 2.5 Layout tab % From the Layout tab, select the number of document pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-29 Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. Use combined printing to economize on the number of printed pages. % From the drop-down list, select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. – For example, if "2 in 1" is selected, two pages will be printed on a single sheet of paper. If "Off" is selected, one page is printed on a single sheet of paper. – Settings: Off, 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 6 in 1, 9 in 1, 16 in 1 2 in 1 4 in 1 6 in 1 9 in 1 16 in 1 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-30 GDI Printer Controller Combination Details % Click the [Combination Details] button to specify the printing order and whether or not to print page outlines. Item Description Combination Select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. This is the same setting selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab. Order When multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper, select the direction and order for printing the pages. Settings: Border Line Select this check box to print an outline around each page when multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper. Upper Left- Columns Upper Right- Columns Upper Left- Rows Upper Right- Rows Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-31 Double-sided printing Document pages can be printed on both sides of the paper. Print on both sides when binding a multi-page document. 1 Click the Layout tab. 2 From the "Double Sides" drop-down list, select "Double Sided". 2 Note From the "Binding Position" drop-down list, select the desired binding position. 2 Note Double sided printing is available only when the optional automatic duplex unit is installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-32 GDI Printer Controller 2.6 Per Page Setting tab % From the Per Page Setting tab, specify whether or not a cover page is added. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-33 Front Cover Page % Select whether or not a cover page is added and whether or not a document page is printed on the cover page. – Settings: Front Cover Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper for the cover pages. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass Media Type % Select the type of paper to be used for the cover page. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope Item Description None No cover page is added, and the entire document is printed on paper from the same paper drawer. Blank A blank sheet of paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list is added as a cover page. Printed The first page of the document is printed on paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list and is added as a cover page. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-34 GDI Printer Controller 2.7 Watermark tab From the Watermark tab, specific text can be printed in the background as a watermark. Watermark Select 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the Watermark Select list, select the watermark to be printed. – Settings: No Watermark, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, FINAL, PROOF, TOP SECRET 3 To print the watermark only on the first page, select the "1st Page Only" check box. – To print the watermark on all pages, clear the check box. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-35 Creating a new watermark A new watermark can be registered. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 Click the [New] button. The New dialog box appears. 3 In the "Watermark Text" box, type in the text to be used as the watermark. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. – A maximum of 32 watermarks can be registered (including "No Watermark"). 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-36 GDI Printer Controller 4 Specify the desired settings. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [Add] button. The watermark is added to the "Watermark Select" list. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-37 Editing a watermark A registered watermark can be edited to change the text, size and position. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the list, select the watermark to be edited. 3 Click the [Edit] button. The Edit dialog box appears. 4 Specify the desired settings. – Watermark Text: Type in the watermark text. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-38 GDI Printer Controller – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-39 – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [OK] button. The watermark is changed. 2 Note To delete a registered watermark, select the watermark from the list, and then click the [Delete] button. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-40 GDI Printer Controller 2.8 Quality tab From the Quality tab, settings for the print quality can be specified. Resolution % From the drop-down list, select "600 e 600 dpi" or "300 e 300 dpi" as the print resolution. 2 Note When "600 × 600 dpi" is selected, the print quality is increased, but the printing time is longer than if "300 × 300 dpi" is selected. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-41 Adjustment % Click the [Adjustment] button to specify the brightness and contrast. Item Description Brightness Adjust the brightness of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the higher the contrast and the more distinct the image. Contrast Adjust the contrast of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the brighter the image. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-42 GDI Printer Controller 3 Control panel operations Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-3 3 Control panel operations Descriptions on the printing operations that can be performed from the control panel of the machine are provided below. 3.1 Printing operations The default mode of the machine is the Copy mode. Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. For details, refer to "Starting the print operation" on page 3-5. To print with "Bypass" selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab, refer to "Using the manual bypass tray" on page 3-8. Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 No. Item Description 1 Display • While print data is being received, ">>PRINTER:Printing" appears in the display. • In addition, if the [Printer] key is pressed while the machine is receiving print data (the Printer indicator is lit), the paper source and paper size settings and the user name for the current print job appear. 2 [OK] key • Press this key to select the function shown in the display. 3 [+], [,], [*] and [)] keys • Press these keys to change the menu shown in the display. 3 Control panel operations 3-4 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note The [Fax] key and the fax function keys can be used only if the optional fax kit is installed on the machine. The [Scan] key can be used only if the optional fax kit and optional network interface card NC-503 or image controller IC-206 are installed on the machine. 4 Printer indicator • This indicator flashes when the machine is receiving print data. • This indicator lights up when the machine is printing the print data. (The indicator lights up if data is being received at the same time.) • This indicator goes off if there is no print data. • Refer to "Printer indicator" on page 3-5. 5 [Printer] key • Press this key when the machine is receiving print data (Printer indicator is lit) to display the Printer mode screen. • To return to the mode before entering Printer mode, press this key while the Printer mode screen is displayed. • If there is no print data in the machine’s memory, the Printer mode screen does not appear, even if the [Printer] key is pressed. 6 [Clear/Stop] key • To cancel the current print job while print data is being received, press the [Printer] key, and then press this key when the Printer mode screen appears. Refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 7 Start indicator • This indicator lights up in orange when the machine is receiving print data. 8 Caution indicator • This indicator lights up when an error or malfunction has occurred. No. Item Description Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-5 Printer indicator The "Printer" indicator shows the status of the printer data sent from the computer. Starting the print operation Normally, printing begins when printing is performed from a connected computer. - Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. - If a print operation is performed from a connected computer while the machine is copying, printing begins automatically when no copy operation is performed for 30 seconds. - When using the optional fax kit: If print data is received while fax data is being received, the printing of print data has priority. After the reception job is completed in Fax mode, the print data is printed, and then the fax is printed. - While printing, copy settings can be specified and fax operations can be performed. (Copies and faxes are printed after printouts are printed.) Printer indicator Printing status Flashing • The machine is receiving print data. The indicator also flashes in other modes. • An error has occurred in the machine. Lit • Print data is being printed. Instead of flashing, the indicator remains lit when data is being received during printing. Off • There is no print data in the machine’s memory. 3 Control panel operations 3-6 GDI Printer Controller Canceling a print job Printing of a print job can be canceled from the control panel of the machine’s control panel. However, a print job can only be canceled from the control panel while the machine is in Printer mode. 1 Check that the Printer indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. 2 Check that "PRINTER MODE PRINTING" appears in the machine’s display. – The message that appears differs depending on the status of the machine. 3 Press the [Clear/Stop] key. The confirmation message "JOB CANCEL" appears. PRINTER MODE User01 PRINTING LTR JOB CANCEL NO YES Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-7 4 Press the [+] or [,] key to select "YES", and then press the [OK] key. – To continue printing, select "No". – If no key is pressed within five seconds, printing continues. "ACCEPTED" appears in the display and the print job is canceled. If any of the following messages appear in the display, the print job can also be canceled by repeating steps 2 and 3 from the procedure described above. - PAPER EMPTY - PAPER JAM - PAPER SIZE ERROR - RESET PAPER - NO SUITABLE PAPER - UPPER TRAY FULL - REMOVE PAPER IN BYPASS TRAY - LOAD PAPER - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - MEDIA TYPE ERROR - *RECEIVING* - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - TONER EMPTY ______ACCEPTED______ NO YES 3 Control panel operations 3-8 GDI Printer Controller Using the manual bypass tray Follow the procedure described below when using the manual bypass tray to print one page at a time. 1 From the computer, display the Setup tab for the printer driver, and then select "Bypass" in the "Paper Source" list (page 2-23). 2 Perform the print operation from the computer. 3 When the message "PRINTER MODE LOAD PAPER" appears, load paper into the manual bypass tray. – Insert one sheet of paper with the front side facing down, lightly sliding the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. – Slide the paper guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. PRINTER MODE User01 LOAD PAPER( ) Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-9 4 Repeat step 3 as often as necessary until printing of the document is finished. 2 Note Be sure to load the paper into the manual bypass tray after the print operation is performed from the computer. Follow the procedure described below if the paper is loaded into the manual bypass tray before the print operation is performed from the computer. Remove the paper from the manual bypass tray. Press the [Reset] key. Press the [Printer] key. Perform step 3 of the procedure. Load the paper into the manual bypass tray one sheet at a time. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is installed, printing from it can be performed in the same way as with any other paper drawer since the multi bypass tray can be loaded with 100 sheets of paper. The multi bypass tray can be loaded with 10 envelopes, 20 OHP transparencies, 20 postcards, 20 label sheets or 100 sheets of plain paper. 3 Control panel operations 3-10 GDI Printer Controller Power Save mode If print data is received while the machine is in Power Save mode, the mode is canceled. When print data is received, the data is printed after the machine has finished warming up. 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-3 4 Troubleshooting Descriptions of the errors that may occur while printing from a computer and the procedures for correcting the error are provided below. If a problem occurs during computer printing, check the following. 4.1 Checking error messages If a computer printing error occurs while any screen other than the Printer mode screen is displayed, the Caution indicator lights up and the message "Check Printer Mode" appears in the machine’s display. In this case, perform the following procedure. 1 Press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check the error message that currently appears in the display, and then perform the desired operation to correct the error. PAPER: TEXT/PHOTO ZOOM :100% Check Printer Mode LTR ______CAUTION_______ LOAD PAPER( ) NO SUITABLE PAPER 4 Troubleshooting 4-4 GDI Printer Controller 4.2 Main error messages The main error messages that appear in the Printer mode screen are described below. Error message Cause Remedy PAPER SIZE ERROR The size of paper specified with the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded in the paper drawer. Pull open the paper drawer with the size error, and then close it again. Check if a custom paper size has been entered, and correct the paper size from Utility mode. NO SUITABLE PAPER "Auto" is selected in the "Paper Source" list in the printer driver, but paper of the specified size is not loaded. Load paper of the specified size into a paper drawer. INCORRECT PAPER SIZE Paper of the size specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Change the paper size from Utility mode, and then load paper of the appropriate size into a paper drawer. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. PAPER EMPTY Either no paper is loaded in the specified paper drawer or the specified paper drawer is not installed on the machine. Load paper of the specified size into the specified paper drawer. MEDIA TYPE ERROR Paper of the type specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Load the appropriate paper into a paper drawer, and then change the paper type from Utility mode. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. MEMORY NEAR FULL The image data received from the computer has exceeded the capacity of the memory. Press any key. Turn the machine off, then on again. SECURE PRINT IS NOT AVAILABLE Since the expanded memory unit is not installed, the "Secure Print" setting cannot be selected. The job is cancelled. NOT ACCEPTED PASSWORD Since the secure print password is incorrect, the document cannot be printed. Type in the correct password. Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-5 4.3 Print data when an error occurs The operation performed with the print data when an error occurs differs depending on the type of error that occurred. With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error This error indicates that a severe operating malfunction occurred. When this error message appears in the display, the machine cannot receive any print data. Contact your technical representative. Temporary errors When the following easily corrected errors occur, the print data currently in the memory is saved. Printing automatically restarts as soon as the error is corrected. - PAPER JAM - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - PAPER SIZE ERROR - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - NO SUITABLE PAPER - PAPER EMPTY - MEDIA TYPE ERROR 2 Note If any of the errors listed above appears, the print job in the memory can be canceled. For details, refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 4 Troubleshooting 4-6 GDI Printer Controller 5 Specifications Specifications 5 GDI Printer Controller 5-3 5 Specifications * The print speed is measured under the following printing conditions. Paper is fed from Tray 1. Specification Print speed* bizhub 163: 16 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) bizhub 211: 21 ppm (when printing on A4 v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 20 ppm (when printing on Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) Memory Shared with machine Interface port Compliant with USB Revision 2.0 Printer language GDI Font Windows Supported operating systems Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows Terminal Server (Windows 2000 Server/ Windows Server 2003) 5 Specifications 5-4 GDI Printer Controller Instruction booklet 252988361A_ENG LFF/LFFn Dear customer Dear customer For your security and comfort, we urge you to carefully read the chapter Security, page 1 before attempting use. In buying this multifunction machine, you have opted for a quality product. Your device satisfies all of the different needs of a modern office automation tool. This machine allows you to scan and fax in color and black and white, to print and copy in black and white. You can connect the multifunction device to your PC (Microsoft Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP/Vista 32-bit). Install the software included to use the multifunction device as a printer. Besides, you can scan, edit and save documents through your PC. If you have a WLAN adaptor (optional) you can communicate with a personal computer wirelessly. WLAN is an optional working only with a specific adaptor that you can obtain from your retailer. Thanks to its navigator and its multitask access, it is powerful, user-friendly and easy to use. The multifunction machines, come with a 600 dpi scanner and a black and white laser printer offering a printing speed of 16 ppm. The Companion Suite Pro LL software provided allows you to use your multifunction machine as a scanner and a printer from a personal computer. It also gives you the ability to manage your multifunction machine. - I - Contents Contents Dear customer I Security 1 Security directives 1 Positions of Safety labels on the machine 2 Symbols for the main power switch 2 Declaration of conformity 2 Notice to Users in EU Countries 2 Environment 3 The packaging 3 Batteries and rechargeable batteries 3 The product 3 Software use license 4 Definition 4 License 4 Property 4 Duration 4 Warranty 4 Responsibility 4 Development 4 Applicable law 5 Registered trademarks 5 Prohibited reproductions 5 Installation 6 Location conditions 6 Cautions of use 6 Paper recommendations 7 Loading paper in the main unit tray 7 Handling of paper 7 Humidity control 7 Use of envelopes 7 EP Cartridge recommendations 7 Terminal description 8 Command panel 9 Accessing terminal menus 9 Packaging contents 10 Device installation (depending on model) 10 Installing the document feeder 10 Feed cassette paper insertion 10 Cartridge installation 11 Paper delivery stop 12 Starting your device 12 Device connection 12 Paper insertion in the manual input tray 13 Copy 14 Simple copy 14 ECO mode copy 14 Advanced copying 14 Special setup for the copying 15 Resolution setup 15 Zoom setup 15 Assembled copy setup 15 Analysis origin setup 15 Contrast setup 15 Brightness setup 15 Paper type setup 16 Paper tray selection 16 Sheet-feed analysis margins setup 16 Analysis margins setup 16 Left and right printing margins setup 16 Top and bottom printing margins setup 16 Format paper setup 16 Fax 17 Fax transmission 17 Print a header page (depending on model) 17 Immediate transmission 17 Delayed transmission 17 Transmission with auto redial 18 Fax reception 18 Relay broadcast 18 Fax answering machine 19 Saving an access code 19 Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 19 Printing fax messages stored in the memory 19 Fax rerouting 19 Activating rerouting 19 Setting the re-direction contact 19 Printing rerouted documents 19 Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key 20 Activating rerouting 20 Printing rerouted documents 20 Transmission waiting queue 20 Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 20 Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 20 Deleting a transmission on hold 20 Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 20 Printing the waiting queue 20 Cancelling a transmission in progress 21 MailBoxes (MBX Fax) 21 Creating an MBX 21 Modifying the features of a MBX 21 Printing the contents of a MBX 21 Deleting a MBX 22 Printing the MBX list 22 MBX deposit in your fax 22 MBX deposit in a remote fax 22 MBX polling from a remote fax 22 Deposit and Polling 22 Placing a document in deposit 22 Polling a deposited document 23 SMS 24 SMS Parameters 24 Presentation of the sender 24 SMS Center transmission number 24 Sending an SMS 24 Parameters/Setup 25 Date/Time 25 Your fax number/Your name 25 Type of network 25 Geographical settings 25 Country 25 Network 25 Language 26 Local prefix 26 Prefix 26 Transmission report 26 Document feed type 26 Economy period 26 Reception Mode 27 Reception without paper 27 - II - Contents Number of copies 27 Fax or PC reception 27 Received faxes reduction mode 27 Technical Parameters 28 Printing the functions guide 30 Printing the logs 30 Print the list of setups 30 Font printing 30 Lock the machine 30 Lock the keyboard 30 Lock the numbers 31 Lock the SMS service 31 Read the counters 31 Sent pages counter 31 Received pages counter 31 Scanned pages counter 31 Printed pages counter 31 Display the consumables status 31 Calibrate your scanner 31 Directory 32 Creating subscribers record 32 Creating subscribers list 32 Modifying a record 32 Deleting a record or a list 33 Printing the directory 33 Games and entertainment 34 Sudoku (depending on the model) 34 Print a grid 34 Print the solution to a grid 34 Local network settings 35 Selecting the type of your local network 35 Ethernet network settings (model network) 35 Automatic configuration 35 Manual configuration 35 IP address 35 Sub-network mask 35 Gateway address 35 IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 35 NetBIOS names 35 Name servers 35 WLAN network 36 Type of radio network 36 Radio infrastructure network 36 Radio ad-hoc network 36 Radio networks (WLAN) 36 Connect your WLAN adaptor 36 Configure your network 37 Creating or rejoining a network 37 Referring to or changing your network parameters 37 An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up 39 Setting up a multifunction machine 39 Setting up the PC 39 Message service (model network) 40 Information required to set up message service 40 Configuring initialisation parameters 40 Access to servers parameters 40 Access to SMTP authentification parameters 40 Sending an E-Mail 40 Sending an E-mail text 40 Scan to FTP 41 Simply put the file in an FTP server 41 Connection configuration 41 Standard settings 41 Selecting the connection type 41 Selecting the transmission type 41 Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 41 Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 42 Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 42 Printing the Internet settings 42 Mail sorting 42 F@X Only mode 42 PC Only mode 42 PC share mode 42 USB memory key 43 Use of the USB memory key 43 Print your documents 43 Print the list of files located in the key 43 Print the files located in the key 43 Delete your files located in the key 44 Analyse the USB memory key content 44 Save a document on a USB memory key 44 Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key 45 PC Features 46 Introduction 46 Configuration requirements 46 Installation 46 Install the software on your PC 46 Connections 48 USB Connection 48 Network connection 48 Uninstall the software from your PC 49 Multifunction Terminal's Supervision 50 Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine 50 MF Director 50 Graphical presentation 50 Utilities and applications activation 50 MF Monitor 51 Graphical presentation 51 Display the consumable status 51 Scan To 51 Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities 51 Document analysis 51 Analysis with Scan To 52 Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 52 Character recognition software (OCR) 52 Printing 52 Printing with the multifunction machine 52 Address book 53 Add a contact to the terminal address book 53 Add a group to the terminal address book 53 Manage the address book 54 Modify the information related to a contact 54 Modify a group 54 Delete a contact or a group from the address book 54 Print the address book 54 Import or export a directory 54 Import a directory 54 Save your address book 54 Fax communications 54 - III - Contents Presentation of the Fax window 54 Send a fax 55 Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 55 Send a fax from application 55 Receive a fax 56 Follow-up of fax communications 56 The outbox 56 The send memory (items sent) 56 The outbox log 56 The inbox log 57 Fax parameters 57 Access to fax parameters 57 Description of the tab Log and Report 57 Description of the tab Fax Parameters 57 Cover sheet 58 Creating a cover sheet 58 Description of the tab Cover page 59 Creating a cover page template 59 SMS Communication 60 Presentation of the SMS window 60 Send an SMS 61 Follow-up of SMS 61 The outbox 61 The outbox log 62 The sent item memory (items sent) 62 SMS Parameters 62 Access to SMS parameters 62 Description of the tab Logs and reports 62 Maintenance 63 Service 63 General information 63 Toner cartridge replacement 63 Issues with smart cards 63 Cleaning 64 Scanner reading system cleaning 64 Printer cleaning 64 Printer external cleaning 64 Printer issues 64 Error messages 64 Paper jam 64 Scanner issues 65 Miscellaneous issues 65 Communication errors 65 Transmission from the feeder 66 Transmission from memory 66 Communication error codes 66 General codes 66 Specifications 67 Physical specifications 67 Electrical specifications 67 Environmental specifications 67 Peripheral specifications 67 Consumable specifications 68 - 1 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Security Security directives Before turning on your device, check that the outlet that you are going to plug it into conforms to the indications shown on the information plate (voltage, current, power network frequency) located on your device. This device shall be connected to a single phase power network. The device shall not be installed on bare ground. Batteries and rechargeable batteries, packaging and electric and electronic equipment (EEE), shall be thrown away, as specified by the Instructions of the ENVIRONMENT chapter of this manual. Because of the device model, the power connector is the only way to disconnecting the device from the power network, that is why it is imperative to apply the following safety measures: your device shall be connected to a power outlet located nearby. The outlet shall be easily accessible. Your device is delivered with a grounded power cord. It is imperative to connect a grounded connector to a grounded outlet connected to the building earthing. For installation conditions and safe use precautions, refer to chapter Installation, page 6. Repairs-maintenance: Repairs and maintenance should only be carried out by a qualified technician. No user serviceable parts inside the machine. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, you shall not proceed with these operations yourself, because by opening or removing the lids, you could expose yourself to two hazards: - The laser beam can cause irreversible eye damage. - Avoid contact with powered parts because it can lead to electrical shock with unfortunate consequences. APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 APARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 - 2 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Positions of Safety labels on the machine The device has warning labels at the positions shown below. For your safety, you must never touch these surfaces when you remove a paper jam or when you replace the EP cartridge. Symbols for the main power switch In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: - means POWER ON. - means POWER OFF. Declaration of conformity Notice to Users in EU Countries The tagging attests to the product's compliance with the demands of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. For users security, in accordance with the 73/23/CE directive. For electromagnetic disturbances, in accordance with the 89/336/CE directive. The manufacturer declares that the products are manufactured in accordance with the APPENDIX II of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. - 3 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Environment The preservation of the environment is of importance to the manufacturer. The manufacturer wishes to service the installations with respect to the environment and has chosen to integrate the environmental performance in the whole lifecycle of its products, throughout manufacturing, release, use and disposal. The packaging The (green point) logo indicates that a contribution is given to an approved national organization to improve the packaging salvage and recycling infrastructures. To make recycling easier, follow local rules and regulations concerning sorting and disposal of such waste. Batteries and rechargeable batteries If your product contains batteries or rechargeable batteries, these shall be disposed of at the designated collecting centers. The product The crossed bin symbol on the product indicates that it belongs to the electric and electronic equipment family. Therefore, according to European regulations you are requested to dispose of it at the selected collection areas: - to distribution centers in case of equivalent equipment purchase, - to the available local collecting centers (dump, selective collection, etc.). In doing so, you will participate in the "Waste of Electric and Electronic Equipment reuse and development scheme" which will help prevent potential effects on the environment and human health. The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, the manufacturer has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. - 4 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Software use license CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE PRESENT LICENSE BEFORE OPENING THE SEALED ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THIS ENVELOPE INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. In case you should not accept the terms of this license, the CD-ROM packaging should be returned to the retailer unopened, along with the other components of the product. The purchase price of this product will be refunded. No refunds will be made for products if the CD-ROM packaging have been opened, if components are missing or if the reimbursement request is made after ten (10) days from the purchase date, your receipt is the proof of purchase. Definition The Software designates programs and associated documentation. License - This license allows you to use this Software on personal computers on a local network. You only have permission to use this Software to print on one multifunction machine; you can not lend the Software or authorize anyone to use it. - You are allowed to make a back up copy. - This license is non-exclusive and non-transferable. Property The manufacturer or its providers hold the Software property right. You only become the owner of the CD-ROM. You shall not modify, adapt, decompile, translate, create any derived piece, rent or sell the Software or the documentation. Any rights not explicitly approved are reserved by the manufacturer or its providers. Duration This license remains valid until cancelled. You can cancel it by destroying the program and the documentation as well as any other copies of them. This license will automatically be canceled in case you do not respect the terms of this license. If the license is rendered invalid, you agree to destroy all copies of the program and the associate documentation. Warranty The Software is provided "as is" with no warranties what so ever, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation, any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose; all the risks concerning the results and performance of this Software are assumed by the buyer. In case the program should appear defective, all the repair and service expenses will be covered by the buyer. Nevertheless, the license holder benefits from the following warranty: we guarantee that the CD-ROM on which the Software is recorded is free from hardware or manufacturing faults if used in normal conditions, the guarantee is valid for ninety (90) days from the delivery date, the copy of the receipt being the proof of purchase. In case of a CD-ROM fault that due to accident or misuse, the CD-ROM will not be replaced as per the warranty. Responsibility If the CD-ROM is not working properly, send it to the retailer together with a copy of the receipt. It is the retailer's sole responsibility to replace the CD-ROM. Nobody, not even the manufacturer who is involved in the creation, realization, merchantability and delivery of this program would be responsible for direct, indirect or immaterial damages, such as, but not limited to, loss of information, loss of time, execution loss, loss of revenue, loss of customers, due to the use or inability to use the program. Development With a constant concern for improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the Software specifications without any notice. In case of modification, your user right does not give you access to free updates. - 5 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Applicable law This license is under the French law. Any dispute following the interpretation or execution of this license will be submitted to the Paris Court. Given the continuous technology development, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications indicated for this product, at any time, without prior notice, and/or to stop manufacturing of the product. All the names of the products and brands that could be trademarks registered by their respective owners are recognized in the present document. Registered trademarks Given the technical evolution, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications of this product and/or to stop its manufacturing at any time and without notice. Companion Suite Pro is a registered trademark of Sagem Communication. Adobe® and the Adobe® products referred to here are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PaperPort11SE is a registered trademark of ScanSoft. Microsoft® Windows® 98, Microsoft® Windows® Millennium®, Microsoft® Windows NT®, Microsoft® Windows 2000®, Microsoft® Windows XP®, Microsoft® Windows Vista® and any other Microsoft® product referred to here are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation registered and/or used in the United States and/or in other countries. All the other brands or products referred to as examples or in order to give additional information are registered trademarks of their respective owners. The informations contents of this user manual are subject to change without notice. Prohibited reproductions Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law. Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law : - bank notes; - checks; - bonds; - stock certificates; - bank drafts; - passports; - driver's licenses. The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor. - 6 - 2 - Installation Installation Location conditions By choosing an appropriate location, you preserve the longevity of the machine. Check that the selected location has the following characteristics: - Choose a well ventilated location. - Make sure not to obstruct the ventilation grids located on the left and right sides of the device. During the installation, make sure to place the machine thirty centimeters away from the surrounding objects so all the lids can be easily opened. - Make sure that this location does not present any ammonia nor any other organic gasses emission hazard. - The ground outlet (refer to the security notices presented in the Security chapter) to which you plan to connect the machine must be located close to this one and have an easy access. - Make sure that the machine is not directly exposed to sun light. - Make sure not to place the machine in an area exposed to an air flow generated by an air conditioning, heating or ventilation system, nor in an area subject to large temperature or humidity variations. - Choose a solid and horizontal surface on which the machine will not be exposed to intense vibrations. - Keep the machine away from any object that could obstruct its ventilation ports. - Do not place the machine close to hangings or any other flammable objects. - Choose a location where splashes of the water and other liquids are limited. - Make sure that this location is dry, clean and dust free. Cautions of use Take into account the important precautions below when using the machine. Running environment: - Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C with a maximum amplitude of 10 °C per hour. - Humidity: 15 to 80 % of ambient humidity (without condensation), with a maximum amplitude of 20 % per hour. Terminal: The section below describes the precautions to be taken when using the machine: - Never turn the machine off and never open the lids while printing. - Never use gas or flammable liquids, or objects generating magnetic field close to the machine. - When you unplug the power cord, always hold the connector without pulling the cord. A damaged cord presents a potential fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Never touch the power cord with wet hands. You risk getting an electric shock. - Always unplug the power cord before moving the machine. Otherwise, you could risk having the cord damaged and create a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always unplug the power cord when you plan not to use the machine for a long period of time. - Never put objects on the power cord, never pull it and never fold it. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that the machine is not sitting on the power cord or any other electric device communication cables. Make sure also that neither cord nor cable is introduced to the machine inner mechanism. This would expose you to a machine malfunction risk or to a fire hazard. - Make sure that the printer is unplugged from the power outlet before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to the printer (use a shielded interface cable). - Never try to remove any fixed pane or hood. The machine contains high voltage circuits. Any contact with these circuits can cause an electric shock risk. Make sure to place the machine in well ventilated premises. When in operation, the printer generates a small amount of ozone. An unpleasant smell can come from the printer if it is used intensively in poorly ventilated premises. For a secure use, make sure you place the machine in well ventilated premises. - 7 - 2 - Installation - Never try to modify the machine. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that paper clips, staples or other small metallic items do not get inside the machine via the ventilation ports or other ports. Such items create fire hazards or electric shock hazards. - Prevent water and any other liquid from spilling on the machine or near to it. Any contact of the machine with water or liquid can cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - If liquid or metallic item gets accidentally inside the machine, turn it off immediately, unplug the power cord and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - In case of heat, smoke, unusual smell or abnormal noise emissions, turn the machine off, unplug the power cord immediately and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Avoid using the machine during an "electric storm", this can cause an electric shock hazard due to lightning. - Never move the terminal during printing. - Always lift the terminal when you wish to move it. Paper recommendations Loading paper in the main unit tray - Insert paper with the face down, and adjust paper guides to the paper format to avoid feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Amount of loaded paper must not exceed the loading mark. If the loading mark is exceeded, this may cause feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Adding paper in the pile must be avoided because it may cause double feeding. - When withdrawing the cassette from the main unit, always support it with both hands to avoid doing drop it. - If you use paper already printed by your machine or another printer, the printing quality may not be optimal. Handling of paper - Curling must be corrected before printing. Curls must not exceed 10 mm. - Care must be taken with storage to prevent feed faults and image defects due to leaving the paper in conditions of high humidity. Humidity control - Paper which has become damp, or paper which has been left unused for a very long time. - After opening the paper, it must be kept in a plastic bag. - Paper with waved ends, paper which is creased, paper with crumples, and any other non-normal paper must not be used. Use of envelopes - Feeding can be done only through the manual feed. - Recommended area should be the area which excludes 15 mm from the leading edge, 10 mm from and both the left and right edges, and the rear edge. - A few lines may be given in solid print at the part of being overlapped. - Envelopes which are not recommended may lead to improper printing (refer to the paragraph Peripheral specifications, page 67). - Curled envelope after printing should be fixed manually. - Small crumples on the edge of the wide side of envelopes. Smearing, or less clear printing may appear on the reverse side. - Set envelope by pressing the folding line of four edges properly after releasing air inside. Set envelope in a proper position after aligning in case it is bent or warped. EP Cartridge recommendations - Must not be stood on the side, or held upside down. - 8 - 2 - Installation Terminal description Front side Back side Control panel Document feeder Paper output Manual Paper tray Master USB Cartridge access cover Manual paper feed setup guides input tray (USB key) Smart card insertion point Fold-down stop for paper delivery connection Slave USB connection (for PC) On/Off switch Power supply cord connection Paper jam cover Telephone cable socket Additional telephone cable socket Master USB connection (USB key) (model network) LAN Connection (model standard) - 9 - 2 - Installation Command panel Accessing terminal menus All terminal functions and settings are available via the menu and are associated to a specific menu command. For example, the menu command 51 launches the printing of the functions list (the functions list stores the list of all terminal menus, sub-menus and their identification number). Two methods are available to access menu items : the step by step method or the shortcut method. To print the functions list whitch details the Step by step method: 1 Press 􀀙. 2 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu and select 5 - PRINT. Confirm with OK. 3 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu PRINT and select 51-FUNCTIONS LIST. Confirm with OK. To print the functions list with with the shortcut method: 1 Press on 􀀙. 2 Enter 51 with the numerical keypad to directly print the functions list. COL 1 2 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 3 23 24 25 4 5 6 7 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 1. Screen. 2. Digital keypad. 3. Alphabetical keypad. 4. Key 􀃍: deletes the character to the left of the cursor. 5. Key : input or line feed. 6. Key : access to special characters. 7. Key : Shift. 8. Key SCAN: document analysis to the PC or a media (USB key). 9. Key COPY: local copy. 10. Key STOP PRINT: stops the current PC printing. 11. Key : sending of an SMS (Short Message Service). 12. Key : sending of a fax. 13.Key : access to directory and quick dial numbers. 14. Key : line manual connection, listen for tone during fax sending. 15. Key : multiple contact sending (fax, e-mail or SMS). 16. Key : Validation. 17. Key OK: confirms the displayed selection. 18. Key 􀀙: menu access and navigation down the menus. 19. Key C: back to the previous menu and input correction. 20. Key 􀀘: navigation up the menus. 21. Key : stops the current operation. 22. Key ECO: sets up the activation delay. 23. Key : color analysis mode selection. 24. Key : analysis resolution setup. 25. Key : contrast setup. 26. Icon : Superfin resolution. 27. Icon : Photo resolution. 28. Icon : Fin resolution. 29. Icon : colour mode. 30. Icon : activity on the telephone line. 31. Icon : Fax mode. 32. Icon : external answering machine mode. - 10 - 2 - Installation Packaging contents The packaging contains the items listed below: Multifunction device Control panel (depending on model) 1 toner cartridge 1 installation guide and 1 PC installation CD ROM 1 power cord 1 telephone cord 1 initialisation card (depending on model) Device installation (depending on model) 1 Unpack the device. 2 Install the device respecting the security notices stated at the beginning of this booklet. 3 Remove all stickers from the machine. 4 Remove the plastic protection film from the screen. 5 Place the control panel in front of the machine, insert the control panel in its back slots (A). 6 Push the front side of the control panel (B) to clip it. Installing the document feeder 1 Secure the document feeder by fitting the two clips (B) in the notches (A) provided for this purpose. Feed cassette paper insertion Your device accepts a number of formats and types of papers (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. A B B A B - 11 - 2 - Installation 1 Remove the paper feed cassette completely. 2 Push the lower panel down until it clicks. 3 Setup the back side feed cassette stop by pushing the "PUSH" lever (A). Then adjust the lateral paper guides to the paper format by pushing lever (B) located on the left guide. Adjust the length paper guide to the paper format by pushing lever (C). 4 Take a paper stack, pull the paper off and align it on a flat surface. 5 Put the paper stack in the feed cassette (ex: 200 sheets of 80 g/m² paper). 6 Put the feed cassette back in its location. Cartridge installation 1 Stand in front of the machine. 2 Push the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you at the same time. 3 Unpack the new cartridge. Gently roll the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure the maximum copies per cartridge. 4 Insert the cartridge in its slot by pushing it until it clicks (last move down) as shown on the picture below. 5 Close the cover. You can use paper weighing between 60 and 105 g/m2. PUSH B A C - 12 - 2 - Installation Paper delivery stop Adjust the paper delivery stop, depending on the format of the document to be printed. Do not forget to raise the flap to prevent the sheets from falling down. Starting your device Device connection 1 Plug the end of the telephone line into the terminal socket and the other end into the wall telephone socket. 2 For the model network, plug end of the LAN cord (as provided by your network administrator) into port of your fax machine and the other end into your local network port dedicated to your fax machine. 3 Make sure that the On/Off switch is on Off (O position). 4 Connect the power cord to the device. Plug the power cord to outlet on the wall 5 Press the On/Off button to turn on the device (I position). 6 (*) After initialisation, "WAITING FOR INIT CARD" appears on the screen. Insert the initialisation card provided in the card reader as indicated on the picture. 7 (*) After an analysis phase, "INIT. OK - REMOVE CARD" appears on the screen. Remove the initialisation card from the drive. Before plugging the power cord, it is imperative to refer to the Security directives, page 1. - 13 - 2 - Installation 8 By default, the machine is set to operate in the UK in English. To modify this parameter, refer to Country, page 25. 9 Set the date and time, refer to Date/Time, page 25. (*) depending on model Paper insertion in the manual input tray The manual input tray allows you to use various paper formats with greater weightings than the one used in the paper feed cassette (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Only one sheet or envelope can be fed at a time. 1 Spread the manual feed guides to the maximum. 2 Insert a sheet or an envelope in the manual input tray. 3 Adjust the paper guides against the right and left edges of the sheet or the envelope. Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. You can use paper, which weights between 52 and 160 g/m². Before printing, check that the paper format you are using matches the paper format set on the printer (refer to Copy, page 14). - 14 - 3 - Copy Copy Your machine has the function to make one or more copies. You can also setup several parameters in order to make copies at your will. Simple copy In this case, the default parameters are applied. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button twice. The copy is made using the default parameters. ECO mode copy The ECO mode enables you to reduce the amount of toner consumed on the page so as to save your printing costs. When the ECO mode is used, the toner consumption is reduced and the print density becomes lighter. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Press the button. Advanced copying The sophisticated copy allows to do custom setups for the current copy. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Enter the number of copies that you want and confirm with the OK button. 4 Choose the paper tray AUTOMATIC or MANUAL with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 5 Choose with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 the printing option (see examples below) depending on the copy mode that you want: - Combined mode (document feeder): 1 Page onto 1, 2 Pages onto 1, or 4 Pages onto 1. - Poster mode (flat-bed scanner): 1 Page to 1, 1 Page to 4 or 1 page to 9. Confirm with the OK button. 6 Adjust the desired zoom level, from 25% TO 400% with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, confirm with the OK button (only available in 1 Page to 1 copy mode). 7 Adjust the desired origin values with the digital keyboard buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 then confirm with the OK button. 8 Choose the resolution depending on the printing quality that you want DRAFT, AUTO, QUALITY TEXT or PHOTO with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. After step 1, you can directly enter the number of copies with the numerical keypad and press the OK button to validate. Then refer to step 4. COPY COPY ECO COPY Analyzed sheets 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 pages to 1 4 pages to 1 MOSAÏC Copy mode 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 1 page to 1 1 Output POSTER Copy mode Analyzed sheets 1 page to 4 1 page to 9 1 page to 1 Output A A A A - 15 - 3 - Copy 9 Adjust the contrast level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 10 Adjust the desired brightness level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 11 Choose the paper type NORMAL, THICK with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. Special setup for the copying Setups done through this menu become the device default setups after you confirm. Resolution setup The RESOLUTION parameter allows you to setup the photocopy resolution. 􀀙 841 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/RESOLUTION 1 Choose the resolution with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Zoom setup The ZOOM parameter allows you to reduce or enlarge an area of a document by choosing the origin and the zoom level to apply to the document, from 25 to 400 %. 􀀙 842 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ZOOMING 1 Enter the desired zoom level with the Alpanumerical keyboard or choose among predefined values with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Assembled copy setup 􀀙 843 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ASSEMBLED The ASSEMBLED parameter allows you to assemble or disassemble your copies. Enter the desired setting and confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Analysis origin setup If you want, you can change the origin of the scanner. By entering new values for X and Y in mm (X < 209 and Y < 280), you move the analysed area as shown on the diagram below. 􀀙 844 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ORIGIN 1 Select the X and Y coordinates with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙. 2 Setup the desired coordinates with the digital keyboard or the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm your choice by pressing on the OK button. Contrast setup The CONTRAST parameter allows to choose the photocopy contrast. 􀀙 845 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/CONTRAST 1 Setup the desired level of contrast with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm by pressing the OK button. 2 You can also directly setup the desired contrast with the button, press several times on this button until the desired setup without using the Menu 845. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Brightness setup The BRIGHTNESS parameter allows to lighten or darken your original document. 􀀙 846 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/LUMINOSITY 1 Setup the desired brightness with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. When the quality of the printing is not satisfying, you can proceed to a calibration (see Calibrate your scanner, page 31). Parameter Signification DRAFT Low resolution. AUTO Standard resolution for documents containing text and graphics. QUALITY TEXT Optimal resolution for documents containing text. PHOTO Optimal resolution for documents containing photographies. You can also change the resolution by pressing the button. y DEBUT FEUILLE FIN FEUILLE x Analysed area BEGIN. OF SHEET END OF SHEET - 16 - 3 - Copy Paper type setup 􀀙 851 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/PAPER TYPE 1 Select the paper NORMAL or THICK that you use with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your setup by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Paper tray selection The Automatic selection can have two meanings depending on the paper format defined on the paper trays. The following table describes the different cases. 􀀙 852 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TRAY PAPER 1 Select the default paper tray to use, AUTOMATIC or MANUAL, with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Sheet-feed analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your sheet-feed scanner. 􀀙 853 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ S.F. MARGINS 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your flat-bed scanner. 􀀙 854 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ FLATBED MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Left and right printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during printing. 􀀙 855 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PRINTER MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Top and bottom printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document towards the top or the bottom during printing. 􀀙 856 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TOP PRINT. 1 Setup the top / bottom margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Format paper setup This menu allows you to define the default paper format of the manual tray and the main tray. You can also setup the default scanning width. 􀀙 857 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PAPER FORMAT 1 Select the paper tray for which you want to define a default paper format with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Choose the paper format with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 4 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Default tray Tray used for copy Same paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC Selection between the main tray and the manual tray. MANUAL The manual tray is used. Different paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC The main tray is used MANUAL The manual tray is used. Paper tray Available paper format MAN. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter AUTO. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter SCANNER LTR/LGL and A4 - 17 - 4 - Fax Fax This chapter describes all the fax processing and configuration functions. You will also find a section describing fax mailboxes. Fax transmission Print a header page (depending on model) A header page is stored in your terminal. To send your fax using this header page, you can print it at any time and fill in your details. 1 Select 􀀙30 - FAX /HEADER PAGE. 2 Select : 301 - LOCAL, to print a header page according to the country configured on the terminal, 302 - INTERNAT, to print a bilingual header page, the language of the country configured on the terminal and English. The separator between the two languages is "/". Example of the international header page: Immediate transmission 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the fax number or choose your dialling mode then press . The icon flashes during the call phase, it stays lit when both faxes are in communication. 3 At the end of transmission the initial screen is displayed. Delayed transmission This function allows you to transmit a document at a later time. To program a postponed transmission you need to identify the subscriber number, transmission time, feeder type and number of pages. To delay the transmission time of your document : 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Select 􀀙31 - FAX / TRANSMISSION. 3 Enter the subscriber number you wish to program at a different time or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 4 Next to the current time, enter the new time and confirm with OK. 5 Choose B & W SCAN or COLOR SCAN. 6 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 7 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 8 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. 9 Confirm postponed transmission by pressing key . Your document is stored and will be sent at the new time. If English is the language configured on the terminal. The header page will only be printed in English. When sending in "Deferred Send" mode, make sure that the document is located in the right direction. - 18 - 4 - Fax Transmission with auto redial This function allows you to monitor the dialling operation during a fax transmission. In this case, the maximum transmission rate will be 14400 bps. This function allows for example: • to hear if the subscriber’s fax is engaged and if so, choose the moment when the line is clear to start the document transmission. • to control the communication progress in case of uncertain numbers, etc. To take the line manually: 1 Place the document in the fax feeder. 2 Press . 3 If necessary, set the sound level with navigator 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 4 If not already done, enter the subscriber number. As soon as you hear the remote fax tone, the line is clear and you can start the transmission. 5 Press to start the document transmission. Fax reception Fax reception depends on the parameter settings of your machine. The following parameters let you customize the printing of received faxes : - Reception Mode, page 27; - Reception without paper, page 27; - Number of copies, page 27; - Fax or PC reception, page 27; - Received faxes reduction mode, page 27; - Technical Parameters, page 28. The following tables gives which tray is used to print received fax depending on the default tray and the paper format in both trays. Default tray set to Manual: Default tray set to Automatic: Relay broadcast Your fax machine (initiator) can relay a document, in other words, transmit a document to your subscribers via a remote fax and with a precise relay list. To do this the initiator fax and the remote fax must both have the relay function. To relay you need to supply the remote fax with the document and the relay list number. The remote fax will then transmit this document to all subscribers on the list. Once the relay is activated by your fax and as soon as the document is received by the remote fax, the document is printed before relaying to all subcribers on the list. To activate relay from your fax machine: 1 Insert the document to relay. 2 Select 􀀙37 - FAX / BROADCAST. 3 Enter the remote fax number where you will relay to or choose your dialling mode and press OK. 4 Enter the relay list number used by the remote fax and press OK. If your machine is set in order to print a transmission report (Transmission report, page 26), the reduced copy of the document first page will not be printed and it notifies you that the communication is manual. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on manual tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 The fax is printed on manual tray. A5 A4,Letter and Legal An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed with an automatic selection of tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. A5 A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on the main tray. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. - 19 - 4 - Fax 5 You may enter the time you wish to transmit the document next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, then press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your documents before transmitting. 8 Activate relay by pressing key . The document in the feeder will be relayed either immediately or at a later time (according to your choice) to the remote fax which will relay the document. Fax answering machine The Fax answering machine allows you to keep confidential documents in storage and to avoid printing them as you receive them. The indicator light lets you know the state of your Fax answering machine: • Light on: the answering machine is on. • Blinking: your fax has documents in storage or is in the process of receiving faxes. • Light off: memory full, the terminal cannot receive any more documents. You can assure document confidentiality by using the 4 digit access code. Once saved, you will require this access code for: • printing fax messages in memory, • activating or deactivating the fax answering machine. Saving an access code 􀀙383 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ANSWER CODE 1 Enter the code (4 digits) and confirm with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 􀀙382 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ACTIVATION 1 If you saved an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and validate with OK. 2 Select the required option WITH or WITHOUT answering machine and confirm you choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing fax messages stored in the memory 􀀙381 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / PRINT 1 If you have defined an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and press OK. Documents received and stored in the memory are printed. Fax rerouting This function is used to reroute faxes received to a directory contact. To use this function, you have to perform two operations: 1 Activate rerouting. 2 Set the rerouting address of the fax. Activating rerouting 􀀙391 - FAX / REROUTING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Setting the re-direction contact 􀀙392 - FAX / REROUTING / CALL NUMBER 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the subscriber from the directory. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙393 - FAX / REROUTING / COPY 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the COPY option (local printout of the information relayed to your device) either WITH or WITHOUT. 2 Confirm with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If the function WITHOUT is selected, the menus 392 and 393 will not be included in the functions overview, when it is printed out (see Setting the re-direction contact, page 19, Printing rerouted documents, page 19 and Printing the functions guide, page 30). Make sure that the subscriber exists in the directory (Directory, page 32 ). - 20 - 4 - Fax Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key This function allows you to reroute received fax messages to a USB memory key connected to your terminal. The USB memory key then becomes the terminal reception memory. Fax messages that are rerouted are therefore saved on the USB memory key with format Tiff and are named as follows : "FAXYYMMDDHHMMSS" where YYMMDDHHMMSS corresponds to the fax reception date and time. You can also print fax messages rerouted to your USB memory key automatically by activating menu 052 PRINT. Activating rerouting 􀀙051 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH and confirm your choice with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙052 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / PRINT 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘, select the copy option WITH to print all rerouted documents automatically. 2 Confirm your choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Transmission waiting queue This function lets you obtain a recap of all documents queuing, for transmission, including those in deposit or in delayed transmission, etc. It allows you to: • Consult or modify the waiting queue. In this waiting queue the documents are coded the following way: Order number in the queue / document status / subscriber’s telephone number. Documents may have the following status: - TX: transmission - REL: relay - DOC: in deposit - POL: polling - MBX: send to mailbox - PMB: mailbox polling - TR: ongoing commands - SMS: SMS transmission • Immediately perform a transmission from the waiting queue, • Print a document in storage, waiting to be transmitted or in deposit, • Print the waiting queue, in order to get the status of each document in the queue, by either: - queue order number, - document name or number, - scheduled transmission time (fax), - operation type regarding the document: transmission from memory, delayed transmission, deposit, - number of pages of the document, - document size (percentage of space stored in memory) • Cancel a transmission request in the waiting queue. Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 􀀙 61 - COMMANDS / PERFORM 1 Select the document in the waiting queue and confirm your choice with OK or to immediately perform the selected transmission. Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 􀀙 62 - COMMANDS / MODIFY 1 In the waiting queue select the required document and confirm your choice with OK. 2 You may now modify the parameters of the given document then confirm your modifications by pressing . Deleting a transmission on hold 􀀙 63 - COMMANDS / CANCEL 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 􀀙 64 - COMMANDS / PRINT 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing the waiting queue 􀀙65 - COMMANDS / PRINT LIST A document called ** COMMAND LIST ** is printed. Before activating this function, connect the USB memory key to the terminal. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 21 - 4 - Fax Cancelling a transmission in progress Cancelling a transmission in progress is possible no matter what the type of transmission but varies depending on whether the transmission is a single call number or a multi-call number. • For a single call number from the memory, the document is erased from the memory. • For a multi-call number, only the call number in progress at the time of the cancellation is erased from the transmission queue. To cancel transmission in progress: 1 Press . A message will ask you to confirm cancellation by pressing a second time. 2 Press to confirm cancellation in progress. If your machine is set to print a transmission report, it will print that the communication was cancelled by the user. MailBoxes (MBX Fax) There are 32 mailboxes (MBX), enabling you to transmit documents in complete confidence using an access code (named MBX code), to all subscribers equipped with a fax compatible to yours. MBX 00 is public. It is handled directly by the terminal to record the messages of the fax TAD as soon as this is put into service. MBX’s 01 to 31 are private. Each is password-protected. They can be used to receive documents confidentially. The use and access to MBX 01 - 31 are conditioned by the initialisation, defined by a MBX code (if needed) and a mnenonic (its S.I.D.). Later you may: • modify the features of an MBX, • print the contents of an MBX, only possible if the MBX contains one or more documents (with a star next to the MBX). When the contents of an MBX have been printed it becomes empty, • delete an MBX, only if the MBX is initialised and empty, • print the the list of your fax machine’s MBX’s. You may receive and send through an MBX in complete confidentiality. When depositing a document into your MBX, the access code is not needed. All documents deposited in a MBX are added to the ones already present. In polling, the MBX’s are only accessible with an MBX code. You may perform MBX deposits or polls by: • depositing a document in a fax MBX, • transmitting to deposit a document in a remote fax MBX, • performing document poll from a remote fax. Creating an MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select a free MBX out of the 31 MBX or directly enter the number of a free MBX and confirm with OK. 2 Select option MAILBOX CODE and press OK. Value 0000 is always displayed. 3 Enter the code of your choice, if needed, and press OK. 4 Select option MAILBOX NAME and press OK. 5 Enter this MBX’s S.I.D. (20 characters max.) and press OK. The MBX is initialised. If you wish to initialise another, press C and repeat the same procedure. 6 To exit the MBX, press . Modifying the features of a MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Select the menu MAILBOX CODE or MAILBOX NAME, then confirm your choice with OK. 4 Perform data modification of the menu and confirm with OK. If needed, repeat the last two steps for the other menu. Printing the contents of a MBX 􀀙 73 - MAILBOXES / PRINT MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. All documents found in the MBX are printed and the MBX is emptied. - 22 - 4 - Fax Deleting a MBX Before deleting an MBX, you need to make sure it is empty, by printing its content. 􀀙 74 - MAILBOXES / DELETE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Press OK to confirm the MBX deletion. The MBX is deleted and will appear as a free MBX in the list. Printing the MBX list 􀀙75 - MAILBOXES / PRT MBX LIST The list gives the status of each MBX. MBX deposit in your fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙72 - MAILBOXES / DEPOSIT MBX and confirm with OK. 3 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. The document is placed in the feeder and saved in the selected MBX. MBX deposit in a remote fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙35 - FAX / MBX SENDING and confirm with OK. 3 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX deposit or choose your dialling mode and validate with OK. 4 Enter the subscriber’s MBX number and confirm with OK. 5 If you wish to delay transmission, enter the new transmission time next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, and press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your document before transmitting and confirm with OK. 8 Confirm the transmission request to a remote MBX fax by pressing key . In the case of an immediate transmission, the document is sent immediately. If the document is set for a postponed transmission, the document will be stored in the memory and sent at the requested time. MBX polling from a remote fax 􀀙36 - FAX / MBX POLLING 1 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX polling or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the subscriber MBX number and press OK. 3 Enter this MBX access code and press OK. 4 If you wish to delay the poll time, enter the departure time next to the current time and press OK. 5 Confirm the MBX poll request by pressing . As soon as the remote fax is subscribed, either immediately or later, the document(s) in the remote fax MBX are receveid in your fax. Deposit and Polling You may deposit a document in your fax and keep it available to one or more subscribers who can obtain a fax of this document by calling your fax with the POLL function. Setting the machine for document deposits, you must define the type: • SIMPLE- it may be polled only once from the memory or feeder, • MULTIPLE- it may be polled as many times as necessary from the memory. Setting the machine for polled documents, you must define the poll number, then depending on the type of poll you may: • launch an immediate poll, • program a delayed poll with a chosen time, • launch a multi-poll, either immediately or later. Placing a document in deposit 1 Insert the document to deposit in the feeder. 2 Select 􀀙34 - FAX / POLLING TX and confirm with OK. 3 Choose the deposit type, according to the table below: Please check for remote fax compatibility. - 23 - 4 - Fax 3 Confirm deposit by pressing OK. Polling a deposited document 􀀙33 - FAX / POLLING RX 1 Enter the number of the party whose document you want to poll or choose your dialling mode. You can poll several documents using the key . 2 Depending on the type of poll, you should: Menu Procedure Simple 1 Select FEEDER or MEMORY. 2 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 3 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Multiple 1 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Menu Procedure Immediate poll 1 Press . Delayed poll 1 Press OK. 2 Next to the current time, enter the time you wish to poll the document and press . - 24 - 5 - SMS SMS Thanks to the SMS button, you can send an SMS to subscribers all over the world. An SMS (Short Message Service) is a service which permits short written messages to be sent to mobile phones or other SMScompatible devices. The number of characters you can send per message is dependent upon the service provider and the country you are sending your SMS from (e.g. France 160 characters, Italy 640 characters). The SMS service is dependent upon the country and the service provider. SMS Parameters Presentation of the sender This setting allows you to show the name or the number of the sender when sending an SMS. 􀀙 41 - SMS SERVICE / SENDER 1 Select the option WITH or WITHOUT presentation of the sender using the 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 2 Validate with OK. SMS Center transmission number This setting allows you to enter the transmission number for the SMS Server. Your Internet provider will provide you with this number. 􀀙 421 - SMS SERVICE / INIT. SMS / SERVER 1 Enter the number of the transmission server using the digital keypad. 2 Validate with OK. Sending an SMS 1 Press the key. 2 Write your SMS using the alphabetical keypad. To do so, an editor is at your disposal: • for upper case letters, use the 􀃏 key, • to move inside the data entry field, use 􀀙 and 􀀘, • to move in the text from one word to another, press CTRL and one of the navigator keys (􀀙 or 􀀘). • to go to the next line, use , • to delete a character (by moving the cursor to the left), use 􀃍 or C. 3 Validate with OK. 4 Dial the number of the recipient (mobile phone or any other SMS-compatible device) in one of the following ways: • dial the number using the digital keypad, • enter the first letters of the recipient name, • press the key until the required name appears (names are classified in alphabetical order). Your SMS may be sent to only one person or to several people. To send an SMS: • to only one person, press OK to confirm, • to several people: 5 Press the key and enter the next recipient's number. 6 Repeat the operations as many times as required (10 persons max.). Press OK to validate the last recipient; "SENDING SMS" is displayed as the SMS is being sent. • If SMS appears, then the SMS has been put on hold and a further attempt will take place a couple of minutes later. To immediately execute or cancel transmission, refer to paragraph Transmission waiting queue, page 20. • To check the SMS has been sent properly, you may print the transmission/reception log (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). There is a special scale of charges for the SMS service. - 25 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Parameters/Setup You can setup your machine as you like depending on the use. You will find in this chapter description of the functions. You can print the functions guide and the available setup of your multifunction machine. Date/Time At any moment you may change the date and time on your multifunction machine. 􀀙21 - SETUP / DATE/TIME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 21 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter the numbers of the required time and date one after another (for example November 8 2004 at 9h33, press 0 8 1 1 0 4 0 9 3 3) and press OK to confirm. 3 To exit this menu, press . Your fax number/Your name Your multifunction machine will print out your fax number and your name on each document it transmits if you save these settings. 􀀙22 - SETUP / NUMBER/NAME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 22 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter your fax number (20 digits max.) and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter your name (20 characters max) then press OK to confirm. For example, if you want to type the letter C, press the key C until it appears on the screen. 4 To exit this menu, press . Type of network You can connect your fax to either a PSTN or a private network such as private automatic branch exchange (PABX). You must select the network which is in use. To select the type of network: 􀀙251 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / NETWORK TYPE 1 Select option PABX or PSTN then confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Geographical settings These settings will enable you to use your machine in different preset countries using different languages. Country By choosing a country, you initialise: • the settings for the public telephone network, • the language by default. To select the country: 􀀙201 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / COUNTRY 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Network This setting enables you to manually set the type of public telephone network (PSTN) for a country, so that your machine can communicate over the public telephone network in compliance with the applicable standards. By default, setting a country using the 􀀙201 OK command automatically sets the type of PSTN to use in the selected country. To manually select the type of public telephone network: 􀀙202 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / NETWORK 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . To benefit from this feature, you must set SENDING HEADER to WITH (Technical Parameters, page 28). If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. These settings are different from the NETWORK TYPE, which allows you to choose between public and private network. - 26 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Language This setting enables you to choose the menu language of your choice. By default, the multifunction machine is set to English. 􀀙203 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / LANGUAGE 1 Select the required language using 􀀙 and 􀀘, then press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Local prefix This function is used when your fax is installed with a private network, behind a company’s PABX. It allows you to program an additional automatic local prefix (to be defined), enabling you to automatically exit the company’s telephone network system, but only under certain conditions: • the company’s internal numbers, where a prefix is not required, must be short numbers less than the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits), • the outside numbers requiring a prefix, must be long numbers greater or equal to the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits). Programming your fax with the local prefix consists of two steps: 1 defining the minimal size (or equal) of the company’s outside numbers, 2 defining the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network. This prefix will automatically be added as soon as an external number is dialled. Prefix 􀀙252 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / PREFIX 1 You can change the default value for the minimal size of the company’s outside numbers and validate with OK. The minimal size will range between 1 and 30. 2 Enter the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network (maximum 5 characters) and validate with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Transmission report You may print a transmission report for all communications over the telephone network (PSTN). You may choose between more than one criteria for printing reports: • WITH: a report is given when the transmission was properly performed or when it is completely abandoned (but there is only one report per request), • WITHOUT: no transmission report, however, your fax will note all transmissions that took place in its log, • ALWAYS: a report is printed with each transmission, • ON ERROR: a report is printed only if the transmission failed or is abandoned. With each transmission report from memory, a reduced version of the first page is automatically reproduced. To select the report type: 􀀙231 - SETUP / SEND / SEND REPORT 1 Select the required option WITH, WITHOUT, ALWAYS or ON ERROR and confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Document feed type You may choose the way you want to feed your documents: • from memory, transmission will take place only after memory storage of the document and dialling. It allows you to get your originals back quickly to free up the machine. • from the feeder of the sheet-feed scanner, transmission will occur after dialling and paper scanning. It allows transmission of larger documents. To select the way you want to feed your documents: 􀀙232 - SETUP / SEND / MEMORY SEND. 1 Select the option MEMORY or FEEDER and validate your choice with OK. In feeder mode, reduced images will not appear on the transmission report. 2 To exit this menu, press . Economy period This function allows you to defer a fax transmission to "offpeak hours" and thus reduce the cost of your communications. The economy period, via the telephone network (at offpeak hours), is preset by default from 7.00 pm to 7.30 am. Nevertheless you may change this time slot. If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. If you define a local prefix, do not add it to the numbers stored in the directory, it will be automatically dialled with each number. - 27 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To modify the economy period: 􀀙233 - SETUP / SEND / ECO PER. 1 Enter the hours of the new economy period and confirm your selection with the key OK. To use the economy period: 􀀙32 - FAX / ECO TRANS. 1 Enter the call number and confirm with OK. 2 Choose SCAN B & W or COLOR SCAN. 3 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 4 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 5 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. Reception Mode This function enables you, if you have an external device (telephone, answering machine) plugged in to the EXT socket on your terminal or to the telephone plug adapter, to select the device receiving faxes and/or voice messages. You may choose between the following reception modes : • MANUAL : the terminal does not receive any documents automatically. When you answer your telephone and realise that you are receiving a fax, you should press the button on the terminal to receive the fax. • FAX : the Fax reception mode is launched on the terminal systematically. • FAX-ANSWER. : the terminal handles reception of fax messages automatically, the external device handles reception of telephone communications automatically. Press the #0 buttons on your telephone to cancel fax detection. To set the reception mode: 􀀙241 - SETUP / RECEPTION / MODE 1 Select the required option and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Reception without paper Your fax offers you the possibility to either accept or refuse document reception if your printer is unavailable (no paper...). If your fax printer is unavailable, you may choose between two modes of reception: • reception mode WITHOUT PAPER, your fax saves the incoming messages in the memory, • reception mode WITH PAPER, your fax refuses all incoming subscribers. To select the reception mode: 􀀙242 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REC. PAPER 1 Select the option WITH PAPER or WITHOUT PAPER and confirm your choice with OK. Number of copies You may print incoming documents more than once (1 to 99). To set the number of each document received: 􀀙243 - SETUP / RECEPTION / NBR OF COPIES 1 Enter the wanted number of copies and confirm with OK. At each document reception, your fax will print the number of copies requested. Fax or PC reception This menu, combined with a software program installed on your PC will enable you to select the machine you wish to receive the documents on: • fax, • PC, • PC if available, fax otherwise. 􀀙244 - SETUP / RECEPTION / PC RECEPT. For more details, please refer to PC Features, page 46. Received faxes reduction mode This menu allows you to reduce received faxes for printing. This adjustment can be automatic or manual. Automatic mode: This mode automatically resizes received faxes. If you have connected a telephone to the EXT socket on your terminal or to a telephone plug adaptor, we recommend that you set the reception mode to MANUAL. When you receive a call, you pick up using this telephone and you hear the particular fax tone. You can: - press the button on your terminal or buttons #7 on your telephone to receive the fax Paper out is indicated by a beep and a message on the screen. Received faxes are then stored in memory (icon flashing) to be printed as soon as you add paper into the feeder. - 28 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To set automatic mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select Automatic and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Manual mode: The machine proposes a 70 to 100 % reduction. Outside these values, the machine beeps for error. This fixed reduction will be used when printing received documents, regardless of the used paper format. To set the manual mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select FIXED and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the reduction value (between 70 and 100) and confirm with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Technical Parameters As delivered your machine is preset by default. However, you may adjust it to meet your requirements by resetting the technical parameters. To set the technical parameters: 􀀙29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS 1 Select the desired parameter and confirm with OK. 2 With the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘, modify the parameter settings by following the table below and press OK. Parameter Signification 1 - Scanning mode Default value of the scan mode resolution for the documents to be transmitted. 2 - TX header If this parameter is on, your header will appear on all documents sent to your subscribers with your name, number, date and number of pages. Warning: If you send a fax from the document loader, the transmission header will not appear on the document your correspondent receives. 3 - TX speed Transmission speed for outgoing documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 4 - Echo protect If this parameter is on, the on-line echo will be reduced during long distance calls. 6 - EPT mode For some long distance calls (satellite), the on-line echo may disturb the call. 7 - COM. display Choice between transmission speed displayed or number of the page in progress. 8 - Eco energy Choosing the printer standby delay: the printer will switch to standby after a delay (in minutes) of NONoperation or during the period of time of your choice. 10 - RX header If this parameter is on, all documents received by your fax will include the subscriber’s header with his name, number (if available) fax print date and the page number. 11 - RX speed Transmission speed for incoming documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 12 - Rings Number of rings to automatically start your machine. 13 - Discard size The Discard Size parameter only defines the printing of received faxes . The number of lines of a document can be too high for the printing paper format. This parameter defines the threshold beyond which the extra lines are printed on a second page. Bellow this threshold, extras lines are deleted. If you choose With, the threshold is set on 3 centimeters. If you choose Without, the threshold is set on 1 centimeter. Parameter Signification - 29 - 6 - Parameters/Setup 20 - E.C.M. This parameter helps correct the calls made on disturbed telephone lines. It is used when the lines are weak or too noisy. Transmission times may be longer. 25 - TEL Impedance This parameter lets you choose between a complex impedance and a 600 Ohm impedance, depending on the telephone network your terminal is connected to. 73 - Improve rep @ This parameter lets you automatically register the Internet address of your subscribers fax during a call (if available). 74 - Erase mailbox When the fax machine receives an e-mail with an attachment and cannot open it, it erases the message from the ISP MBX, prints and transmits with a notice of uncomprehension to the message sender. At E-mail reception, the fax does not destroy the MBX message, it prints a notice of uncomprehension asking you to recuperate this message with your computer equipment. This parameter is useful only if you have PC equipment. The memory capacity is limited, you need to empty your MBX or else new messages may not be received. 75 - Text Attchmt. Editing YES / NO and printing the received Internet documents. 76 - Attchmt format Default format of document sent on the Internet: PDF : monochrome or colour IMAGE : monochrome (TIFF) or colour (JPEG) 77 - LAN speed To define the communication speed of the peripheral units in relation to the implemented Local Area Network (LAN). 80 - Toner save Makes printing lighter to save toner cartridge ink. 81 - Font number Starts the printing of the log list. This parameter lets you set the default PCL font. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 0 (Courier). Parameter Signification 82 - Form lines This parameter lets you set the number of lines per page. This variable is linked to the PJL variables: PAPER and ORIENTATION. If you modify one of these variables, the Form Lines variable is automatically updated (only for the print job in progress) to respect the same spacing. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 60. 83 - Font pitch This parameter lets you set the default font spacing, in characters per inch (the default font must be of type non-proportional). The possible values are included between 0,44 and 99,99 inclus. The default value is 10,00. 84 - Ptsize This parameter lets you set the default font height, in points (the default font must be of type proportional). The possible values are included between 4,00 and 999,75 (by step of 0,25). The default value is 12,00. 85 Line termin. This parameter lets you define line breaks conversion: , and . The possible values are included between 0 and 3. The default value is 0. 86 Orientation This parameter lets you set the page orientation: portrait or landscape. The default value is "portrait". 90 - RAW Port RAW network print port connection. 91 - Printer error timeout Time-out before document being printed is deleted following a print error in PC print mode. 92 - Printer wait timeout Wait time-out for data from PC before the task is deleted in PC print. 93 - Replace format Page format change. This parameter allows you to print a LETTER format document on A4 pages using the LETTER/A4 setting. 94 - Printer class Printing in PCL-/Postscript Mode Printing in GDI mode Parameter Signification - 30 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Printing the functions guide 􀀙 51 - PRINT / FUNCTIONS LIST 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 51 with the digital keypad. The printing of the functions guide starts. Printing the logs The incoming and outgoing logs list the last 30 transmissions (incoming and outgoing) made by your machine. An automatic print out will take place after every 30 transmissions. However, you may request a print out at any time. Each log (incoming or outgoing) contains a table with the following information: • date and time of the incoming or outgoing document, • subscriber’s number or E-mail address, • transmission mode (Normal, Fine, SFine or Photo), • number of pages sent or received, • call duration, • incoming or outgoing results: noted CORRECT if properly transmitted, or information codes for special calls (polling, manual subscribers, etc.) • reason for call error (example: your subscriber does not answer) To print the logs: 􀀙52 - PRINT / LOGS 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 52 with the digital keypad. The printing of the logs starts. Print the list of setups To print the list of setups: 􀀙54 - PRINT / SETUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 54 with the digital keypad. The printing of the list of setups starts. Font printing You can print the list of fonts installed on your terminal at any time. To print PCL fonts: 􀀙57 - PRINT / PCL FONTS To print SG Script fonts: 􀀙58 - PRINT / SGSCRIPT FONTS Lock the machine This function prevents non-authorized people from accessing the machine. An access code will be required every time someone wants to use the device. After each use, the device will lock automatically. Before that you have to enter a lock code. 􀀙811 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCKING CODE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 811 with the digital keyboard. 2 Enter your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 3 Enter again your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the keyboard Everytime you use your machine, you will have to enter your code. 􀀙812 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK KEYBD. 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 812 with the keyboard. 2 Enter the lock code and confirm with OK. 3 With the buttons 􀀙 or 􀀘, choose WITH and confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. 95 - Symbol set This parameter lets you set the default character set. The possible values are included between CS1 and CS30 inclus. The default value is CS1 (Roman8). 96 - NBR. WEP Keys Number of WEP keys allowed (from 1 to 4). The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The incoming and outgoing logs are printed on the same page. Parameter Signification The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If a code is already registered, enter the old code before typing the new one. - 31 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Lock the numbers This function locks dialling and the numerical keypad is disabled. Transmissions are only possible from numbers included in the directory. To access the number interlocking option: 􀀙813 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK NUMBER 1 Enter the four-digit interlock code with the keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 With keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 of the navigator, select the option DIRECT ONLY. 4 Press key OK to confirm. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the SMS service This function prevents access to the SMS service. To access the SMS service locking menu: 􀀙815 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK SMS 1 Enter the four-digit locking code with the numerical keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 Enter the four-digit locking code again to confirm it. 4 Press key OK to confirm. When a code is already registered in the machine, you will have to enter this registered code first before you can type and register a new one. Read the counters This function allows you to view the activity counters for your machine at any time. According to your needs, you can read the counters for: • sent pages, • received pages, • scanned pages, • printed pages. Sent pages counter To view the number of pages sent from your machine: 􀀙821 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SENT PAGES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 821 with the keyboard. 2 The number of sent pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Received pages counter To view the number of pages received on your machine: 􀀙822 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / RECEIVED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 822 with the keyboard. 2 The number of received pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Scanned pages counter To view the number of pages scanned on your machine: 􀀙823 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SCANNED PAGE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 823 with the keyboard. 2 The number of scanned pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printed pages counter To view the number of pages printed on your machine: 􀀙824 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / PRINTED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 824 with the keyboard. 2 The number of printed pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Display the consumables status You can read at any time the remaining toner in the cartridge. This level appears in percentage. 􀀙86 - ADVANCED FCT / CONSUMABLES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 86 with the keyboard. 2 The available toner percentage appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Calibrate your scanner You can do this operation when the quality of photocopied documents is not satisfactory anymore. 􀀙80 - ADVANCED FCT / CALIBRATION 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 80 with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 2 The scanner is triggered and a calibration is done automatically. 3 At the end of the calibration, the machine comes back to the screen saver. - 32 - 7 - Directory Directory Your multifunction machine lets you create a directory by memorising subscriber records and subscriber lists. Your machine can store up to 250 subscriber records, which you can group in 20 subscriber lists. For all subscriber records or subscriber lists you may create, consult, modify or delete contents. You can also print the directory. Furthermore, your machine lets you create and manage your phone directory from your PC Kit. For more information on this feature, refer to chapter PC Features. Creating subscribers record To create subscribers record: 􀀙 11 - DIRECTORY / NEW CONTACT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 11 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the NAME of your contact with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 Enter the TEL number of your contact with the digital keypad (30 digits maximum), confirm with OK. 4 Choose the RECORD NO from your directory with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. At this stage, you may associate an e-mail address or an FTP address to your subscriber. If you do not wish to do so, confirm with OK and refer to step 5. To associate an e-mail address: • Enter the E-Mail address of your subscriber and confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. Or to associate an FTP address : • Do not enter the e-mail address and confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP address of the contact (for example: 134.1.22.9), then confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP user name (for example: Durand) then confirm with OK. • Enter the password of the FTP user, then confirm with OK.. • If necessary, enter the file destination directory (when this field is not completed, the files are stored directly under the root) of the FTP server (for example: server name / Durand). Confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. 5 Select W. ASSOC. KEY if you want to assign a shortcut key (letter) to your subscriber record. The first available letter appears, use 􀀙 or 􀀘 to choose another letter. Confirm with OK. 6 Select the appropriate transmission RATE to send faxes among the values 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400 and 33600 using 􀀙 or 􀀘. Confirm with OK. The maximum speed can be used if the telephone line is of good quality, meaning appropriate, without echo. Creating subscribers list To create subscribers list: 􀀙 12 - DIRECTORY / NEW GROUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 12 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the LIST NAME with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 CALLED NUMBER: use 􀀙 ou 􀀘 to select from existing records the contacts of your list and confirm with OK. Repeat this operation for each subscriber you want to add to your list. 4 Enter the GROUP NUMBER assigned to your list with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. Modifying a record To modify a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 13 - DIRECTORY / MODIFY 1 Press 􀀙, enter 13 with the digital keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to modify by pressing OK. 3 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the entries of the selected record or list. Press on OK when the entry you want to modify appears on screen. 4 The cursor appears at the end of the line. Press on C to delete characters. 5 Enter the new entry and confirm with OK. 6 Repeat the operations for each line you want to modify. If your multifunction machine is connected to a PABX, you may insert a pause for dial tone after the outgoing local prefix dialling. To do so, insert the character "/" after the local prefix. In the directory, the letter G placed next to a name identifies a subscribers group. - 33 - 7 - Directory Deleting a record or a list To delete a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 14 - DIRECTORY / CANCEL 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 14 with the keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to delete by pressing OK. 3 Press on OK to confirm the deletion. 4 Repeat the operations for each record or list you want to delete. Printing the directory To print the directory: 􀀙 15 - DIRECTORY / PRINT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 15 with the keypad. The printing of the directory starts, in alphabetical order. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 34 - 8 - Games and entertainment Games and entertainment Sudoku (depending on the model) Sudoku is a Japanese puzzle. The game is in a grid format of three squares by three squares to be distributed in fields in zones of 3 × 3. Depending on the level of difficulty, more or fewer numbers are already entered at the start of the game. The aim of the game is to distribute the numbers 1 to 9 between the boxes in such a way that each number appears only once in each row, column and in each of the nine grids. There is only one solution. Print a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 3 Confirm with OK. 4 Select PRINT GRID using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the grid requested is printed. Print the solution to a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 3 Confirm withOK. 4 Select PRT SOLUT using the 􀀙 ou 􀀘. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the solution to the grid requested is printed. - 35 - 9 - WLAN network Local network settings You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network. However, practical knowledge of your computer configuration is required to set up a network. Selecting the type of your local network This parameter allows you to configure your terminal accordingly to the type of network you will install it in. 􀀙 26 - SETUP/LOCAL NETWORK 1 Select the desired network type using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons - WLAN if using a wireless network - LAN ETHERNET if using a wired network 2 Confirm with OK. Ethernet network settings (model network) Automatic configuration We recommend that you carry out a manual configuration of your terminal. The automatic configuration of the local network settings may be considered, if your local network features a DHCP or BOOTP server that can dynamically assign addresses to the peripheral devices present on the LAN. To automatically configure the local network settings: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 1 Choose Automatic and press OK to confirm. The terminal scans the local network for a DHCP or BOOTP server that can assign it its settings dynamically (the message Self-conf is displayed). 2 Once the message Self-conf has disappeared, check for the IP Address, Sub-network mask and Gateway address. If these are missing, you should carry out a manual configuration (see below). Manual configuration To configure your terminal manually, you should obtain the usual information used to set a peripheral device (IP address, sub-network mask, network and gateway address). To configure the local network setting manually: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 3 Choose Manual and press OK to confirm. IP address 􀀙 272 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP ADDRESS 1 Enter the IP address of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Sub-network mask 􀀙 273 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/SUBNET MASK 1 Enter the sub-network mask of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Gateway address 􀀙 274 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/GATEWAY 1 Enter the IP address of the network gateway and press OK to confirm. IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 􀀙 275 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IEEE ADDRESS The Ethernet card of your terminal already has an unmodifiable, yet consultable, IEEE address. NetBIOS names These names, which can be used with the network options, are used to identify your terminal machine from a PC connected to a local network (for instance with the name "IMP-NETWORK-1"). 􀀙 276 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 1 􀀙 277 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 2 1 Enter the selected name (15 characters max) and press OK to confirm. Name servers The WINS1 and WINS2 servers, used with the network options, allow access to terminals on other sub-networks by means of their NetBIOS name. 􀀙 278 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 1 􀀙 279 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 2 1 Enter the IP address of each server, then validate with OK. If the terminal is set up in Automatic configuration mode (menu 􀀙271), these addresses can be filled in automatically by certain DHCP servers. - 36 - 8 - WLAN network WLAN network You can connect your machine to a PC using a USB cable or make a wireless connection (via radio) with a PC or network. If you have a WLAN adaptor, you can incorporate your machine as a network printer into a radio network. Type of radio network A radio network or WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) is created when at least two computers, printers or other peripheral devices communicate with each other in a network via radio waves (high frequency waves). The transmission of data in the radio network is based on the standards 802.11b and 802.11g. According to how the network is set up, it may be described as an infrastructure network or an ad-hoc network. Radio infrastructure network In an infrastructure network, several devices communicate via a central access point (a gateway or router). All data is sent to the access point (gateway or router) from where it is re-distributed. Radio ad-hoc network In an ad-hoc network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. Radio networks (WLAN) Three steps are necessary to incorprate your machine into a radio network (WLAN): 1 Configure the network to your PC. 2 Set up the parameters for your machine so that it can function in a network. 3 Having set up the parameters your device, install the Companion Suite LL software onto your PC with the necessary printer drivers. Connect your WLAN adaptor Your machine belongs to a new generation of terminals that you can incorporate into a WLAN network using a WLAN USB key. Beware, when you are using a wireless connection, that certain items of medical equipment, sensitive or security systems may be affected by the radio transmissions of your device; in all cases, please follow safety guidelines closely. The PC and all other devices must have their parameters set up to the same network as the multifunction machine. All the details needed for setting up the device, such as the network names (SSID), type of radio network, WEP key, IP address or subnetwork mask, must match the specifications of the network. You will find these details on your PC or on the Access Point. To find out how to set up the parameters for your PC, please consult the users’ manual for your WLAN adaptor. For large networks, please seek the advice of your network administrator. - 37 - 9 - WLAN network 1 Plug your WLAN USB key into the USB port of your machine. Configure your network Creating or rejoining a network Before attempting to use a WLAN adaptor on your machine, you must enter the parameters that will allow a WLAN network to recognise your machine. On your machine you will find simple instructions that guide you step by step through the set-up of your network. Just follow them! 􀀙 281 - SETUP / WLAN / CONFIG. ASS. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 SSID appears on the screen, enter the name of your network using the numerical keypad, pressing the keys one after the other until you obtain the name you want (32 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 AD-HOC MODE or INFRA. MODE appear on the screen. Go back to the beginning of the chapter and make your choice. Select one of these modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose AD-HOC mode, the sub-menu CHANNEL appears, enter a figure between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 WITHOUT SECURITY or WITH SECURITY appear on the screen. Select the option you want and confirm with OK. - If you choose WITH SECURITY the sub-menu WEP KEY 1 appears, enter the key number (1 to 4 maximum) that you are using on your network. 8 IP CONF.: MANU or IP CONF.: AUTO appear on the screen. If you choose to set up the system manually, go to the next paragraph and enter the parameters IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY. 9 At the end of this procedure, you return to the main menu of CONFIG. ASS. 10 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Referring to or changing your network parameters Each of the parameters of your network may be changed as your network develops. 􀀙 2822 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / IP ADDRESS 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select IP ADDRESS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. Your machine’s network radio adaptor transmits data using the radio protocol IEEE 802.11g; it can also be incorporated into an existing IEEE 802.11b network. When connecting to your machine, only use the approved adaptor. Other transmitting or receiving adaptors may damage your device. Irrespective of whether you use your machine in an infrastructure or ad-hoc network, you must set up certain network and security parameters (for example, the Service-Set-ID (SSID) and the WEP key). These must match the network’s specifications. We recommend that the settings of your WLAN network should only be changed by a person with a good knowledge of the configuration of your computer. If you choose and exisiting network, steps 5 and 6 ( and possibly 7) are carried out automatically. The WEP key number may be configured in the menu: 􀀙 29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS / WEP KEYS NBR - 38 - 8 - WLAN network 5 The dumber of your IP address will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new IP address for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2823 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SUBNET MASK 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SUBNET MASK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your subnet mask will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new submask of your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2824 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / GATEWAY 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select GATEWAY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your gateway will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new gateway for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2825 - SETUP /WLAN / PARAMETERS / SSID 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SSID using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The name of your network will appear on the screen. Enter the new name of your network and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2826 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / MODE 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select MODE using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The symbol >>, tells you that your network is in active mode. 6 Select one of the modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose the AD-HOC MODE, the submenu CHANNEL will appear; enter a number between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2827 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SECURITY This parameter allows you to make your network secure. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SECURITY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Choose WITH or WITHOUT and confirm by OK. If you choose WITH, enter a password: - In a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain five characters exactly. - In a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain 13 characters exactly. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2828 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / HOSTNAME In an AD-HOC network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole AD-HOC radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. You may also enter the password using the hexadecimal system, if this is the case: - For a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 10 hexadecimal characters. - For a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 26 hexadecimal characters. - 39 - 9 - WLAN network The machine name allows you to identify your machine on the network via a PC (for example with the name "PRINTNETWORK- 1"). 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select HOSTNAME using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Type in the desired name (15 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once your connection has been set up, you must install the network printer driver "Laser Pro LL Network" on your PC so that you can print your documents. Refer to the paragraph Network connection, page 48. An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up An example of how to configure an Ad-hoc network without security protection using the following parameters: • network name: "house" • radio type: "ad-hoc" • channel: "1" • PC’s IP address: "169.254.0.1" • PC’s subnetwork mask: "255.255.0.0" • PC’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" • IP address of the multifunction machine: "169.254.0.2" • subnetwork mask of the multifunction machine: "255.255.0.0" • multifunction machine’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" Setting up a multifunction machine 1 Plug the WLAN USB key into the USB connector of the multifunction machine. 2 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 6 SSID appears on the screen, enter "house" using the numerical keypad and confirm with OK. 7 Select the mode AD-HOC MODE and confirm with OK. 8 Enter "1" in the field CHANNEL and confirm with OK. 9 Select WITHOUT SECURITY and confirm with OK. 10 Select IP CONF.: MANU and confirm with OK. 11 Enter "169.254.0.2" in the field IP ADDRESS and confirm with OK. 12 Enter "255.255.0.0" in the field SUBNET MASK and confirm with OK. 13 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the field GATEWAY and confirm with OK. 14 At the end of this process, you return to the main menu of ASS. CONFIG. 15 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once the network has been set up, the LED of the WLAN USB key should be on. You must now set up the PC. Setting up the PC For this section, refer to the instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the WLAN USB key to help you to find and join the "house" network. 1 You may need to install the software for the WLAN USB key on the PC, if this has not already been done. 2 Plug WLAN USB key into a USB port on the PC. 3 Use the software of the WLAN USB key to detect the network. 4 Join the network "house" once this has been detected. 5 Now set up the WLAN network connection of your PC. To do this, you must configure the element Protocol Internet (TCP/IP) for the WLAN connection that has been created. If this element is set up in such a way as to obtain an IP address automatically, you must change it to manual mode to set up the TCP/IP address ("169.254.0.1" in our example), the subnet mask ("255.255.0.0" in our example) and the default gateway ("0.0.0.0" in our example). 6 Enter OK. To guide you through this stage, refer to the paragraph “Setting the parameters for a connection” in the manufacturer’s instructions. - 40 - 10 - Message service (model network) Message service (model network) Your terminal lets you send and receive emails via your local network. To do so, you must connect your terminal to a local network. You must also configure the message service settings. Information required to set up message service Your network administrator must provide you the following elements: • message service identifier • message service password • email address • servers’identifiers (SMTP, POP, DNS1 and DNS2) Configuring initialisation parameters 􀀙91 - E-MAIL / SUPPLIER 1 Select the LOCAL NETWORK from the list and confirm with OK. 􀀙921 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / MESS. SERV 1 Enter Email Identifier, press OK. 2 Enter Email Password, press OK. 3 Enter E-mail Adr, press OK. Access to servers parameters 􀀙922 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SERVERS 1 Enter Smtp, press OK. 2 Enter Pop3, press OK. 3 Enter Dns 1 (primary), press OK. 4 Enter Dns 2 (secondary), press OK. Access to SMTP authentification parameters 􀀙923- E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SMTP AUTHENT. 1 In the ACTIVATION menu, select WITH to activate SMTP authentification then validate with OK key. 2 In the SETTINGS menu, select ID.MESS.SERV to keep the same identification parameters as in the messaging service or AUTHENT. SPEC. to define other identification parameters, then validate by pressing OK key. 3 When you select AUTHENT. SPEC, carry out the two following operations: 4 Enter the IDENTIFIER then validate with OK key. 5 Enter the PASSWORD then validate with OK key. Sending an E-Mail 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 3 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 4 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 5 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . 6 Press OK to confirm. 7 Select B&W SCAN to send a black and white document or COLOUR SCAN to send a color document, and validate with OK key (this setting can be changed at any time during the send procedure, using the colour key). 8 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 9 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. 10 If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. 11 Press OK to confirm. 12 Set contrast and resolution if necessary. The document is scanned and the mail sent to memory. It will be sent during the next connection to the local network. Sending an E-mail text You can send a typed message to an E-mail mailbox. Access through the menu. : 􀀙95 - E-MAIL /SEND EMAIL 1 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 2 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 4 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . Choosing No Access disables access to local network functions. - 41 - 10 - Message service (model network) 5 Press OK to confirm. The mail is memorised and will be sent at the next connection to the local network. Scan to FTP The scan to FTP function enables you to put your TIFF, JPEG and PDF files in an FTP server, for example, for archiving. To connect to the FTP server, you must know the name of the FTP user and the PASSWORD. When sending files, the machine connects to the FTP server using the defined connection parameters. Simply put the file in an FTP server 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press key SCAN. A choice screen is displayed. 3 Select Scan to FTP with keys 􀀘 or 􀀙 then press OK key OK. 4 Enter the FTP address of the server or select it from the directory by pressing the key. 5 Enter the name of the FTP user (operation prohibited when the address is in the directory). 6 Enter the password of the FTP user (operation not necessary when the address is selected in the directory). 7 Validate with OK key. 8 Select B&W SCAN to send a document in black and white or COLOUR SCAN to send a document in colour. Validate with OK key (this setting may be changed at any time during the send procedure with the colour key). 9 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 10 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. Connection configuration The settings are divided into several categories: • the standard settings define the connection type and frequency to the local network as well as the transmission type for your documents, • the E-mail sorting defines treatment for all stored Email messages received. Standard settings Your machine has two types of settings that let you define: • The type and frequency of the connection to your ISP. • Type of transmission over the Internet. At any moment you may print the settings of your machine to know their status. Selecting the connection type 􀀙941 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / CONNEC. TYPE 1 Select one of the connection options among Set Times, Periodic or On Demand and press OK to confirm. Selecting the transmission type 􀀙942 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / SEND TYPE 1 Select one of the send options Immediate or During cnx then press OK to validate. Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PERIOD 1 With the Periodic mode, enter the new connection period by means of the numerical keypad (between 00:01 am and 11:59 pm) and press OK to confirm. A local network connection will be established every three hours (default value). SET TIMES an Internet connection is established every day at 9:00 am, 12:30 am and 5:00 pma. a. To avoid Internet access saturation, the automatic connection will occur in reality 12 minutes, give or take, around the requested time. PERIODIC an Internet connection is established every 3 hours1 (default value). ON DEMAND an Internet connection is established at your request by IMMED. ACCESS. IMMEDIATE document transmission will occur immediately at each transmission request. DURING CONNECTIONS transmissions will only occur at programmed connections of SET TIMES or PERIODIC TYPE. - 42 - 10 - Message service (model network) Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / TIME STTINGS 1 After selecting the Set Times mode, use the 􀀘 and 􀀙 keys to place the cursor under the figure to be modified. Enter the new connection time(s) by means of the numeric keypad (value between 00:01 and 23:59) and validate with the OK key. Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 􀀙944 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / DEPOSIT NOTICE 1 Select one of the deposit notice options With, Without, Always or On Error and press OK to confirm. Printing the Internet settings 􀀙946 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PRINT The Internet settings are printed. These settings may also be printed together with all the other settings of your machine (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). Mail sorting This function lets you choose the mode for all Internet documents stored in your mail box. You have three choices:. Vous avez le choix entre trois possibilités : • F@x only, lets you poll and print E-Mails in your machine. • PC only, lets you keep your E-Mails in you mailbox for later use with a computer (no E-Mail poll), • PC share lets you: - if your PC and fax have two different addresses, transfer all mails or only those with attachments to a PC, - if your PC and fax share the same address, use the fax as a printer for E-Mails for the PC. 􀀙 96 - E-MAIL / SORT MESSAGES F@X Only mode 1 Select option F@x only and press OK to confirm. All E-Mails are polled and printed. PC Only mode 1 Select option PC only and press OK to confirm. The E-mails are neither polled nor printed and they may be used with a computer. At each connection, the number of E-mails in your mailbox is displayed on the screen. PC share mode 1 Select option PC share and press OK to confirm. You may choose to transfer your E-mails to a PC or use the fax as an E-mail printer. To transfer the E-Mails to a PC: 2 Select option With PC Trans. and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the E-Mail address of the computer you wish to transfer your E-Mail and press OK to confirm. 4 Select your option from the table below and press OK to confirm. To use the fax as an E-Mail printer: 1 Select option W/O PC Trans and press OK to confirm. 2 Select your option from the table below and validate with OK. At each connection, the number of E-mails still present in your mailbox are displayed on the screen. Menu Description SEND ALL MAILS All E-Mails are sent to the PC. UNUSABLE ATTAC The fax machine polls and prints the usable E-mails and transfers to the PC mailbox all the E-mails containing attachments it cannot use. Menu Description DELETE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax (w/o attachment) are erased after the fax has printed. SAVE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax are not erased. - 43 - 11 - USB memory key USB memory key You can connect a USB memory Key on the front side of your machine. The files stored in TXT, TIFF and JPEG formats will be analysed and you will be able to use the following actions: - print the stored files contained in your USB memory key1, - delete the files contained in your USB memory key, - run an analysis on the contents of the inserted USB memory key, - digitalise a document on your USB memory key, - fax archiving (see section Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key, page 20). Use of the USB memory key Print your documents You can print the stored files or a list of the files located in the USB memory key. Print the list of files located in the key To print the list of files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / LIST 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting theinsertion way. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select LIST with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 The list is shown in a table with the following information: - the analyzed files are indexed in an incremental 1 by 1 order, - the files name with their extension, - the date of the files last save, - the files size in Kbytes. Print the files located in the key To print the files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / FILE 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select FILE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to print your files: - ALL, to print all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. The printing is started automatically. - SERIES, to print a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIES with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of the series to print and confirm with OK. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 1. It may be possible that some TIFF files of your USB memory key cannot be printed due to data format limitation. Always respect the insertion way when you connect a USB memory key to the machine. Do not disconnect your USB memory key while the machine is reading its contents or writing contents. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 44 - 11 - USB memory key - SELECTION, to print one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to print. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Delete your files located in the key You can delete files located in your USB memory key. 􀀙 06 - MEDIA / DELETE / MANUAL 1 Insert your USB memory key on the front side of your machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select DELETE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select MANUAL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to delete your files: - ALL, to delete all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. You come back to the previous menu. - SERIE, to delete a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen, select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of teh series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. - SELECTION, to delete only one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to delete. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analyse the USB memory key content After a period of inactivity, your machine will return to the main menu. To view the USB memory key again please proceed as follows: 􀀙 07 - MEDIA / MEDIA ANALYSIS 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 07 with the keyboard. 2 The USB memory key analysis is started. 3 You can print or delete the detected files located in your USB memory key. Refer to the previous chapters. Save a document on a USB memory key This function allows you to digitise and save a document directly in the folder SCAN on a USB memory key. The folder SCAN is created by the application. 1 Place the document to be copied face down on the glass. 2 Insert the USB memory key in the USB connector of your multifunction device. The USB memory key analysis is started. When the analysis is finished, the MEDIA menu is displayed. 3 Select SCAN TO with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. Before digitalising a document, make sure that your USB memory key has sufficient disk space. If not, you can: • delete manually the files, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44, or • activate the option that deletes automatically the oldest files located in the SCAN folder, see section Activate/ deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key, page 45. - 45 - 11 - USB memory key 4 Choose the COLOUR between BLACK&WHITE and COLOUR with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons and the button OK. 5 With the alphanumeric keyboard, give a name to the scan file (up to 20 characters) and confirm with OK. 6 Choose the scan format between IMAGE and PDF, and confirm to start the scan and the recording of the document. IMAGE allows to have the same kind of file as a photo. PDF is a format for the digital documents creation. The beginning button immediately starts the scan and sends a file to the support with the parameters defined in the analysis format. Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key This option, when activated, deletes automatically the oldest files in the folder SCAN on the USB memory key, in order to save a new digitalised document when the disk space is insufficient. To activate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITH with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. To deactivate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITHOUT with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. You can also access this function in two other ways: • by pressing the SCAN button of the machine deck then by selecting SCAN-TOMEDIA. • By pressing the 􀀙 button from the screen saver then by typing 03 on the digital keyboard. With the IMAGE format, if you have selected: • BLACK&WHITE, the picture will be saved in TIFF format. • COLOUR, the picture will be saved in JPEG format. You can choose the image resolution that will be digitized to the USB memory key; the default resolution is DRAFT. Press the button several times and select the resolution you require • Scanning in BLACK&WHITE : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: photo resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. • Scanning in COLOUR : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. This option is ineffective when the SCAN folder is empty and the USB memory key is full. You must then delete manually the files in order to free up disk space, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44. - 46 - 11 - PC Features PC Features Introduction The Companion Suite Pro software allows the connection of a personal computer with a compatible multifunction machine. From the PC, you can: - manage the multifunction machine, allowing you to set it up according to your needs, - print your documents on the multifunction machine from your usual applications, - scan colour, grey scale or black and white documents and edit them on your PC, or process them into text using the character recognition software (OCR), Configuration requirements The minimum configuration requirements for your personal computer are: Supported operation systems: - Windows 98SE, - Windows Millennium, - Windows 2000 with at least Service Pack 3, - Windows XP (Home and Pro), - Windows Vista 32-bit. Processor: - 500 MHz for Windows 98SE, - 800 MHz for Windows Me or 2000, - 1 GHz for Windows XP (Home and Pro), - 1 GHz for Windows Vista 32-bit. A CD-ROM drive A free USB port 600 Mbytes of available disk space for the installation RAM memory: - 128 Mbytes minimum for Windows 98, Me, and 2000, - 192 Mbytes minimum for Windows XP (Home and Pro). - 1 GByte for Windows Vista 32-bit. Installation Install the software on your PC Turn your PC on. Open an ADMINISTRATOR account session unless working in 98SE and ME environments. 1 Open the CD-ROM drive, insert the installation CDROM and close the drive. 2 An installation procedure is automatically run (Auto run). 3 A screen titled COMPANION SUITE PRO LL appears. This screen allows you to install and uninstall the software, access the product's user guides or browse the CD-ROM contents. 4 Place your cursor on PRODUCT INSTALLATION and confirm with left-click of the mouse. 5 The Products Installation screen appears. Place your cursor on FULL and confirm by left-click with the mouse. The multifonction machine components only appear if your Windows Installer version is older than 2.0. The installation resumes, a progress bar appears. You can stop the program's installation by clicking on the STOP THE INSTALL button. After search and analysis of the PC components and the multifunction machine's components, you need to restart your PC for the modifications to take effect. Click on the OK button. The FULL installation copies on your hard disk the software required for the good execution of the Companion Suite Pro kit, which is: - Companion Suite Pro (machine management software, printer drivers, scanner, ...), - Adobe Acrobat Reader, - PaperPort (OS > Windows 2000). You may already be the owner of a version of the software available in the installation CDROM. In this case use the CUSTOM installation, select the software that you want to install on your hard drive and confirm your choice. - 47 - 11 - PC Features 6 After restart, the InstallShield Wizard screen shows the progress of the assistant preparation. You can stop the procedure at any time by clicking on the CANCEL button. 7 The welcome screen appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button to launch the installation of the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit on your PC. 9 To continue, you need to accept the proposed license agreement. 10 Click on the YES button. 11 Click on the NEXT button. 12 The final installation is ready to be executed. 13 Click on the INSTALL button. 14 A screen informs you of the installation progress. 15 The Companion Suite Pro software is installed on your PC. 16 Click on the CONTINUE button to copy the utilities and PaperPort SE software that come along with the kit. 17 At the end of the installation, you need to restart your PC to update the system files. - 48 - 11 - PC Features 18 Select your choice and click on the FINISH button. 19 Your "Companion Suite Pro" kit is successfully installed on your PC. You can start the multifunction machine's management software from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR or by clicking on the icon MF DIRECTOR located on your desktop. Connections Make sure that your multifunction machine is powered off. USB Connection The connection between the PC and the machine requires a USB 2.0 shielded cable no more than 3 meters long. 1 Locate your USB cable connectors and connect as shown below on the picture. 2 Power on your multifunction machine. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 3 Click on the NEXT button to finish the installation. 4 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 5 Select the location where the system has to look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 6 A window informs you that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 7 A screen informs you that the XML interface software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button. 9 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 10 Select the location where the system shall look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 11 A window informs that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 12 A screen informs you that the COMPANION SUITE PRO F@X ACTIVITIES software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. You can now use the multifunction machine to print or scan your documents. Network connection You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network (model network only). 1 Run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > ADD PRINTER. 2 Click on the NEXT button to run the installation procedure. It is possible to add LAN printers without installing the Companion Suite Pro software on Windows 2000, XP, and Vista. From the Windows menu Start > Parameters > Printers and faxes, select "Add Printer" and follow the instructions on screen. It is recommended to install the Companion Suite Pro software first and then to connect the USB cable to your machine. If you connect the USB cable before installing the Companion Suite Pro software the recognition system (plug and play) identifies automatically that new hardware has been added. To start your machine drivers installation, follow the instructions on screen. If a window asking about the location of the drivers pops up, then indicate the installation CD-ROM. 0 The Companion Suite Pro LL software shall be installed to perform this operation. - 49 - 11 - PC Features 3 The next screen shows the list of compatible hardware found on the network. You can make another search on the network by clicking on the REFRESH button. Remark: A hardware device may not appear in the list in which case click on the NOT IN THE LIST button. The next window appears. Type the IP address or the NetBIOS name of the hardware that you wish to add. You can test the connection between the PC and the hardware by clicking on the TEST button. Click on the OK button. 4 Select what you wish to add from the hardware list. Click on the NEXT button. 5 For the model network, with a LAN connection, you must choose one printer among the list. Nota: the PCL printer is more fast in the most case. 6 The next window lists the different features of the printer that are about to be installed. Click on the NEXT button. 7 The window indicating that the installation procedure was successful pops up. Click on the FINISH button. Uninstall the software from your PC Run the programs removal from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > UNINSTALL. 1 A preparation screen appears. 2 Select REMOVE and confirm your choice by clicking on the NEXT button. 3 A confirmation screen appears. Click on OK button to continue the COMPANION SUITE PRO LL program removal. 4 A preparation screen appears. You can cancel the removal by clicking on CANCEL. - 50 - 11 - PC Features 5 You need to restart your system at the end of the procedure. Close all open programs, select YES, I WANT TO RESTART MY COMPUTER NOW and click on the FINISH button. Multifunction Terminal's Supervision The software that you have installed contains two multifunction machine management applications, MF DIRECTOR and MF MONITOR, which allow you to: - check whether the multifunction machine is connected to your PC, - monitor the multifunction machine activitie, - monitor the status of the multifunction machine consumables from the PC, - quickly access the graphic editor applications, OCR etc. To manage the multifunction machine, run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine To check if the connection between the devices is good, run the MF MONITOR software from the icon located on the desktop and check that the same information is displayed on the multifunction machine (for instance the date). MF Director This graphical Interface allows you to run the utilities and the software to manage your multifunction machine. Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. By default, MF DIRECTOR is displayed with dark blue rounded shape. You can modify its shape and color by right-clicking with the mouse. Utilities and applications activation The COMPANION SUITE PRO graphical interface allows you to run the following utilities and software: - get HELP from the current documentation, - run the PaperPort software (Doc Manager). To run a software or utility contained in the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit, place the cursor on it and left-click with the mouse. - 51 - 11 - PC Features MF Monitor Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Monitor icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > COMPANION MONITOR. From this screen you can monitor the information or configure your multifunction machine from the tabs: - COMPANION: Presents the multifunction machine screen. - CONSUMABLES: Displays the consumables status. - SCAN TO: Scan Mode and Resolution parameters setup, these parameters will be taken into account when clicking on the SCAN button from the machine. Display the consumable status The following information will be available from the Consumables tab: - current consumables status, - number of printed pages, - number of scanned pages. Scan To The setup of this tab, becomes the default setup for the scanner. Remark: The function SCAN TO can only be used if the application is running. If this is not the case, activate it. 1 Select the Scan To tab. 2 Select one of the possible choices: - colour, - grayscale, - black and white. 3 Select the scanner resolution (72 dpi to 4800 dpi). 4 Confirm your choices by clicking on the OK button. Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities Document analysis The document analysis can be carried out in two ways: • either by the SCAN TO function (application accessible from the MF Director window or from the SCAN button from the machine), • or directly from a TWAIN standard compatible application. - 52 - 11 - PC Features Analysis with Scan To Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. 1 Left-click with the mouse on the SCAN TO graphical image or click the SCAN button from your machine. 2 You can follow the ongoing digitisation on a screen. 3 At the end of the digitisation, the scanned picture appears in the PaperPort window. Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 1 Run the picture editor application and then run the acquisition command. The document analysis window appears. 2 Setup the parameters (contrast, resolution, ...) before starting the digitisation. 3 Once the document is digitised, you can archive it or edit it. Character recognition software (OCR) The character recognition function allows to create a usable data file for desktop applications from a hardcopy document or from a picture. The character recognition only works for printed characters, such as printer outputs or typed text. Nevertheless you can request for a handwritten text block to be kept intact (a signature for instance) by outlining it. Given your machine environment and the character recognition from your machine, the OCR is done with a Drag&drop of a document from the PaperPort to the Notepad icon. Printing You have the possibility to print your documents via the USB connection or the Wifi connection. During the installation of the software, the LASER PRO LL printer driver will be installed automatically onto your pc. This will allow you to print your documents on the machine via the USB connection. The LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer driver allows to print via the wireless connection. This driver is installed when you add a network printer. Printing with the multifunction machine To print a document with the machine from your PC is like printing a document in Windows (use the PRINT command from the FILE menu of the currently open application on the screen). Select the LASER PRO LL printer to print via the USB connection or the LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer to print via the Wifi connection. If the PaperPort software is not installed on your hard drive, the scanned picture will appear on your desktop in TIFF format. For more details about the usage of this software, check the on-line help of the product. The LASER PRO LL printer becomes the default printer when the Companion Suite Pro software is installed. - 53 - 11 - PC Features Address book The address book enables you to store the numbers of the contacts you call the most frequently. The purpose of this function is to facilitate dialing your contact’s number when you want to send an SMS or fax. If you want, you can print the list of numbers stored in the Directory. You also have the possibility of creating groups of contacts from the Address book. Like this, you can group together all contacts from, for example, a given company or the same service, etc, to which you frequently send common documents. Add a contact to the terminal address book 1 Click on the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. The address book is displayed on the screen. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click on NEW and select CONTACT in the displayed menu. The input window for the contact data is displayed.. 4 Enter the contact name as well as the fax or GSM telephone number, the fax transmission rate with this person, the associated quick dial key, the E-mail address and the default transmission format (Pdf or Image). Click on OK. The new contact is added to the list. Add a group to the terminal address book 1 Click the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click NEW and select GROUP in the displayed menu. 4 Enter the name of the group. The group may consist of contacts from the address book or new contacts. 1st case: group members are from the address book. Click SELECT THE MEMBERS. The selection window is displayed. Select a contact or a group in the zone ADDRESS BOOK, click on (to add a contact to the group you can also double click on it). Click on OK. 2nd case: adding new contacts. Click on NEW then add the personal data of the new contact, as in the procedure for adding a contact. 5 As soon as the group is complete, click on OK. The new group is added to the list. - 54 - 11 - PC Features Manage the address book When you are working in the directory, you can perform different operations: - print a list of contacts in your address book, - delete a contact or a group in your address book, - search for a contact or a group of contacts in the address book using the first letters of the name, - check the datasheet of a contact or a group in order to modify it. Modify the information related to a contact 1 Select the contact whose data you want to modify, using the mouse. 2 Click on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes in the window ADDRESS BOOK. 4 Click on OK. Modify a group 1 Select the group in the address book list. 2 Cllick on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes. 4 Click on OK. Delete a contact or a group from the address book 1 Select the name of the contact or the name of the group you want to delete, using the mouse. 2 Click on DELETE. Print the address book 1 Click on PRINT. The list of the address book is printed on the terminal (if no contact is selected). Import or export a directory Import a directory Importing a directory makes it possible to exchange address book entries between two devices without having to enter contacts one by one manually. Directories can be imported from files in EAB format. EAB files are automatically generated during export. 1 Select IMPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Select the file to import, click on OPEN. Save your address book This operation lets you save your address book to a file in EAB format. 1 Select EXPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Enter the name of the file and select the destination directory, then click on SAVE. Fax communications The fax communication enables you to: - send documents as faxes from one of the scanners of your terminal, from the hard disk or from the screen of your PC, - to receive fax documents, - to monitor communications through various services: the inbox, the outbox, the sent items, the outbox log and the inbox log. Parameters are available to modify the way your terminal works with regard to fax communications. You can modify these parameters to adapt the fax communications to your requirements. For this procedure, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Presentation of the Fax window When a contact is deleted from the directory, it is automatically deleted from any group in which it may be included. Item Action 1 Create a new fax to send. 2 Delete a fax using one of the fax manager directories. Except for directories SENT LOG and RECEPTION LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log 3 Print a fax from one of the Fax manager directories. 4 Display a fax with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 123456789 - 55 - 11 - PC Features Send a fax Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 1 Click the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click NEW then click FAX. 3 Select no zone SOURCES, SCANNER if your document is in paper format or MEMORY if the document is a computer file located on your hard disk (this file must be in TIFF or FAX format). 4 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click on or select a contact (or group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click on the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 6 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 7 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Send a fax from application This method is used to directly send a document you have created using a desktop software without printing it beforehand. 1 From your desktop software, select FILE > PRINT. 2 Select the printer COMPANION SUITE FAX and click OK. The fax oubox window is displayed. 6 Stop sending a fax (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Display all faxes in the selected directory in the Fax manager. 8 Fax preview. 9 Fax manager directories. Item Action - 56 - 11 - PC Features 3 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click the button or select a contact (or a group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button Erase to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 4 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 5 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 6 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. 7 Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Receive a fax The window MF Manager and MF Director show, using different messages, the reception of a fax. The icon is displayed at the bottom of the window MF Manager and the icon appears in the task bar. You can automatically print faxes on reception. To do this, you have to define this parameter, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Follow-up of fax communications Follow-up of fax communications is by means of: - an outbox, - an inbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log, - an inbox log. These services enable you to always know exactly what communications are taking place on the terminal, whether sending or receiving. The outbox and inbox logs are automatically printed when their contents fill an A4 page. After automatic printout, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox In the fax outbox, there are the following: - the requests being sent, - the send later requests, - the requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - the rejected requests (calls not put through). The requests are classed in the order in which they are executed. The rejected requests are filed at the end of the list so that they are more accessible if you want to work with them (request a new send) or delete them. The send memory (items sent) The sent memory is used to keep all faxes you have sent. The information in the send memory is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was created, - the date the fax was sent, - the size of the fax. The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep a history of all fax communications (successful or rejected) that your Terminal processes. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the log is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was sent, - the status (sent, rejected ...). The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). - 57 - 11 - PC Features The inbox log The inbox log is used to keep a history of all faxes received by your Terminal. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the inbox log is: - the sender of the fax, - the date and reception of the fax, - the status. Fax parameters Access to fax parameters 1 Click on the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTION > FAX. 3 Make the adjustments require, referring to the description of parameters below and click OK. Description of the tab LOG AND REPORT Description of the tab FAX PARAMETERS The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). Field Description Automatic printing of a received document The fax is automatically printed when received. Printing of a inbox report A report is printed out for each fax received. Printing of inbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Automatic printing of a sent document The fax is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of an outbox report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Field Description Transmission speed Fax default transmission speed. Line number Number of the line where your terminal is connected. Dialling prefix This dialing prefix shall be automatically inserted in front of the number before sending on this line. Type of dialing Must be parametered according to the type of switchboard your terminal is connected to. Header Displays a Communication Identification Line (LIC) on the documents you send or on the documents you receive. ECM Corrects communication errors due to line disturbance. This option ensures that received documents are integral. On the other hand, communication times may be longer if the line is bad. Number of attempts Number of attempts the Terminal must make if send fails. Interval between attempts Duraton between two send attempts. - 58 - 11 - PC Features Cover sheet The cover sheet is part of a fax document automatically generated by your terminal, on which there is information concerning the sender, the recipient, the date, the time sent, comments, etc... This page may be sent alone or in front of a fax document, but always at the same time as the document. A document may be sent with a cover sheet from the multifunction terminal or from the central processing unit. In the latter case, some of the information in the cover sheet may be provided by yourself when making the send request. It is necessary to create model cover sheets before sending a document using them. On the other hand, once the cover sheet is created, a model cover sheet may be used for all documents sent. Your terminal offers the possibility of creating and customizing some model cover sheets which you can choose when sending a fax. Creating a cover sheet 1 From the tab COVER PAGE, click on the button NEW. 2 Select the model cover sheet you have created using the menu FILE. A window with the model cover sheet you have created is displayed: 3 Click on the icon to display the available fields. To add a field, proceed as follows: - Select the field you want to insert by clicking the field palette. A stamp replaces the cursor of your mouse. - Click the location where you want to put the field on the model. - You can move or enlarge the field as you like. 4 As soon as fields are inserted, save the cover sheet. This cover sheet can be selected in the tab COVER PAGE of the fax send window. It is necessary to create a model cover sheet before sending a fax with it. Adjust the size of your field so that the text is readable. - 59 - 11 - PC Features Description of the tab COVER PAGE Creating a cover page template Creating a cover page creates a template which fields (fax number, comment, subject and so on) will be automatically filled by the Fax Application depending on the information provided for each recipient of a document. To create this cover page template, there are two major steps: • First step : Create a background image with the logos and the layout that you wish. • Second step : Add the field that you want to be displayed in the cover page: fax number, comment, subject and so on. As mentioned before, these fields will be filled by Fax application at emission time. For the first step, there are two methods to create the background image. You can either • Option (A): Draw this background image in your preferred application (such as Word, Excel,...), OR • Option (B): Scan a sheet of paper containing the layout of the cover page. Details about Option A and B: • Option (A): Open the application that you want to use to edit the background (Word, Wordpad...). Draw the background image then print this document in the printer named "Companion Suite Fax". At that point the MFSendFax dialog is displayed: Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax Field Description Name of the cover sheet Either the name of the page selected by default or the page you have selected to use. Sender You can enter information concerning the sender. Destination: Name, Company, Department You can enter information concerning the recipient. If the word Auto is entered in one of the fields, the field is updated during sending if the recipient is listed in the directory, favorites, a group or a distribution list. Comments This is an editing window with all the basic functions of a text editor so that you can enter a text which will be sent in the cover sheet. Preview of the model The preview enables you to see the cover sheet you are going to send. - 60 - 11 - PC Features • Option (B): Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, select the scanner source as shown below : Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax. Whether you choose Option A or B, you end up with a background image with extension .fax, which is located in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary. You can now proceed to the second step right below. For the second step: Now that the background image is created in directory in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary, you can add the fields on top of the background image. Please follow the procedure below: (a)Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, click on the tab COVER PAGE, and check the check box named WITH THE COVER PAGE. (b)Click on the button NEW, this displays a new window with the title CREATION OF THE COVER PAGE. (c)Press the button OPEN in the toolbar, change the file filter to *.fax and browse to the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary that contains the background image that you have created in the First step. (d)Click on the button FIELDS in the toolbar, a window pops up allowing you to add the fields on top of the background image. (e)Click on the button SAVE to save the Cover Page template and exit this window. (f)The window NEW FAX is displayed, you can now choose the Cover Page template that you want to use. When you double click the preview image in the lower right corner, another window pops up giving you a preview of the cover page with the fields filled with the recipient's information. SMS Communication Sending SMSs is via the modem of your Multifunction Laser. For more details, refer to the User Manual of your Multifunction Laser. Your PC Kit can be used to easily send faxes to a single recipient or to multiple recipients using the distribution groups. Communications being sent are monitored by means of the outbox, the outbox log and the outbox memory (items sent). Presentation of the SMS window 􀃎 The SMS service is available depending on the countries and the operators. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 61 - 11 - PC Features Send an SMS 1 Click on the icon SMS of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click on NEW then on SMS. 3 Enter your message in the field CONTENT OF MESSAGE provided for this purpose. You can use the buttons and the "smiley" located to the left of the input field to customize your message, or to automatically insert the date and time. 4 To send your SMS to a contact, enter his / her number in the field TELEPHONE NUMBER of the part CONTACTS and click on or select a recipient (or group) from one of the directories in the field CONTACT LIST and click on . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button REMOVE to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced parameters (to send later or give priority to the SMS) by pressing the button ADVANCED PARAMETERS. 6 Click on OK to send your SMS to all contacts in the field LIST OF RECIPIENTS. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Follow-up of SMS SMS communications are monitored by means of: - an outbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log. These services make it possible to have complete information on the terminal activity with regard to communications. The outbox log is automatically printed when its contents fill an A4 page. After this automatic printing, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox The following is grouped in the SMS outbox: - requests being sent, - send later requests, - requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - requests which have been rejected. Item Action 1 Write an SMS. 2 Delete an SMS from one of the SMS manager directories. Except for the directory SEND LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log. 3 Print an SMS from one of the SMS manager directories. 4 Display an SMS with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 6 Stop SMS sending (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Displays all SMSs in the directory selected in the Fax manager. 8 SMS preview. 9 SMS manager directories. - 62 - 11 - PC Features The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep the entire history of SMS communications (successful or rejected) that have been processed by your terminal. The log is automatically printed as soon as an A4 page is complete. The information in the sent box is: - the SMS recipient, - the date of sending of the SMS, - the status (sent, rejected, etc...). The sent item memory (items sent) The sent item memory is used to keep a copy of all SMS messages you have sent. The information in the sent item memory is: - the SMS recipient, - the date of creation of the SMS, - the date of sending of the SMS, - the size of the SMS. SMS Parameters Access to SMS parameters 1 Click the icon SMS of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTIONS > SMS. 3 Make any adjustments required in relation to the description of the parameters above and validate with OK. Description of the tab LOGS AND REPORTS The button DELETE deletes the entire log and not simply the message(s) selected. Field Description Automatic printing of a sent document The SMS is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of a send report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent. Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. - 63 - 12 - Maintenance Maintenance Service General information To ensure that your machine is kept in the best conditions, it is recommended that you periodically clean the inner parts. Please respect the following rules while using this machine: - Do not leave the scanner cover open. - Do not try to lubricate the device. - Do not close the scanner cover violently or do not apply vibrations to the machine. - Do not open the cartridge access cover while printing. - Do not try to disassemble the machine - Do not use paper which would has stayed in the tray for too long. Toner cartridge replacement Your machine comes with a current consumable management system. It tells you if your toner cartridge is close to its end of cycle. The following message will appear on your machine screen. To quit this screen, press OK. To replace the toner cartridge, proceed as shown below. When the following message is displayed on the screen: 1 Press OK. 2 Stand in front of the device. 3 Push on the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you. 4 Raise and remove the toner cartridge from the machine. 5 Unpack the new cartridge and insert it into the slot as indicated in the diagram below. 6 Close the cover. The following message appears: 7 Press OK. 8 When this message appears, insert the smart card provided with the new toner cartridge as shown on the picture below. 9 A wait message appears. The smart card is read. Remove the smart card from the reader, your machine is ready to print again. Issues with smart cards If you use a smart card that has already been used, the machine will display: then, If you use a defective smart card, the machine will display: For your safety, it is imperative to refer to the security directives presented in chapter Security, page 1. TONER NEAR END After this message has been displayed, you are able to change the cartridge. TONER EMPTY REPLACE OPEN FRONT COVER REPLACE TONER HAVE YOU CHANGED THE TONER? INSERT THE TONER CARD PLEASE WAIT NEW TONER REMOVE CARD PLEASE WAIT REMOVE CARD ALREADY USED PLEASE WAIT - 64 - 12 - Maintenance then, If the C button is pressed while the smart card is being read, the machine displays: Cleaning Scanner reading system cleaning When one or more vertical lines appear on the copies, clean the glass of the scanner. 1 Open the scanner cover until it is standing in vertical position. 2 Wipe the glass with a soft lint-free cloth soaked with mild alcohol. 3 Close the scanner cover. 4 Make a copy to check that the symptoms have disappeared. Printer cleaning Dust, dirtiness and paper debris on the external and internal surfaces of the printer can affect its operation. We advise that it is cleaned regularly. Printer external cleaning Clean the external part of the printer with a soft cloth soaked in mild detergent. Printer issues Error messages When the printer encounters any of the problems described below, the corresponding message is shown on the machine display. Paper jam When printing, a sheet of paper may get stuck in the printer or the paper tray and cause a paper jam. In case of a paper jam in the machine, the following message appears: 1 Open the paper jam cover located at the back of the machine. 2 Remove the jammed sheet of paper and close the cover. 3 Open and close the consumable cover. The printer starts again automatically. UNKNOWN CARD REMOVE CARD ACTION CANCELLED REMOVE CARD Message Action CHECK TONER Check the presence of a toner cartridge in the machine. TONER NEAR END Indicates that your consumable will need changing soon. REPLACE PAPER Add paper in tray. HEATING Message displayed when starting the machine. CLOSE COVER PRINTER The printer front cover is open, close it. TONER EMPTY REPLACE Replace the toner cartridge. PAPER JAM REMOVE TONER A sheet of paper is jammed in the machine. Take out the toner cartridge and remove the jammed paper sheet. Take out the paper tray and remove the jammed paper sheet. Then open and close the consumable cover. PAPER JAM EXTERNAL TRAY A sheet of paper is jammed in the machine. Open the paper jam cover. Remove the jammed paper sheet. Then open and close the consumable cover. PAPER EMPTY Add paper in the paper tray. PAPER JAM EXTERNAL TRAY The fusion unit can reach a very high temperature during the operation. To prevent any harm, do not touch this area. Message Action - 65 - 12 - Maintenance In case of paper jam, the following message appears: 1 Remove the toner cartridge and check if a sheet is jammed. 2 Remove the sheet of paper which causes the paper jam. 3 Put the toner cartridge in the machine, or remove the paper tray and remove the sheet of paper which causes the paper jam. 4 Check that the paper sheets in the paper tray are correctly placed. 5 Replace the paper tray in the machine. Scanner issues When a paper jam occurs, the following message appears: 1 Open the scanner cover. 2 Remove the jammed paper without tearing it. The following message appears: 3 Close the scanner cover. Miscellaneous issues When turning on the terminal, nothing is displayed on the screen. Check the connection between the power cord and the outlet. The terminal does not detect the presence of the document inserted in the scanner document feeder. The message READY does not appear on the screen. At the start and during scanning, REMOVE DOCUMENT appears on the screen. 1 Remove the document or press key . 2 Check the thickness of the document (50 sheets of paper of 80 g/m2). 3 Iron out the sheets if needed. 4 Help the sheets along. The terminal does not receive any faxes. 1 Check that the telephone line cable is correctly plugged in. 2 Check that there is a tone signal on the telephone line by means of the key . You receive a blank page. 1 Make a photocopy of a document; if it is correct then your fax is functioning normally. 2 Call back the subscriber and have him resend the document. It was probably sent with the sheet inserted backwards. You cannot send a fax. 1 Check that the telephone line cable is correctly plugged in. 2 Check the tone by pressing the key . 3 Check the prefix is correctly programmed and used. Communication errors If the communication fails, the terminal advises you of an automatic retry later. Example of what is displayed: PAPER JAM REMOVE TONER REMOVE DOCUMENT CONFIRM CLOSE COVER SCANNER 1 2 Current time FRI 12 DEC 20:13 Time of next try 0142685014 20:18 - 66 - 12 - Maintenance Transmission from the feeder You have the choice between: • waiting until the transmission takes place at the given time, • restarting the transmission immediately by pressing , • abandoning transmission by pressing . To eject the document, press again. Transmission from memory You have the choice between: • waiting until the transmission takes place at the given time, • restarting the transmission using the transmission queue. In this case, for a document composed of several pages, the transmission will take place from the page where the error occured, • abandoning the transmission by deleting the corresponding command in the transmission line. The terminal makes at most 5 automatic redials. The nontransmitted document is automatically deleted from the memory and a transmission report is then printed together with an error code and the cause for transmission failure (see the communication error codes). Communication error codes The communication error codes appear in the logs and transmission reports. General codes Code 01 - Busy or no fax answer This code appears after 6 unsatisfactory attempts. Call later. Code 03 - User break A communication has been stopped by the user pressing the key . Code 04 - Non programmed number A number saved as a one-touch key or abbreviated number is not valid, check it. (Example: a delayed transmission was programmed with a one-touch key and this key has been deleted in the meantime). Code 05 - Scanning default An incident occurred with the scanner, for example, the sheet is jammed. Code 06 - Printer default An incident occurred in the printer: no paper, paper jam, opened cover... In the reception mode, this incident appears only if the reception parameter is switched to WITHOUT PAPER. Code 07 - Disconnected The link has been cut (bad line). Check the number and try again. Code 08 - Quality The document you sent was not well received. Contact your subscriber to see if you need to send again. Code 0A - No document to be polled You tried to poll a document from a subscriber who had not prepared his document (no deposit) or the password entered was incorrect. Code 0B - Wrong number of pages There is a difference between the number of pages indicated during preparation for the transmission and the number of pages sent. Check the number of pages in the document. Code 0C - Received document error Ask the subscriber who called you to check the length of his document (it may be too long to be completely received). Code 0D - Transmission failed Ask the sender to resend the document. Code 13 - Memory full Your fax can no longer receive since its memory is full. There are too many received unprinted documents or too many documents in the transmission line. Print the received documents and delete or transmit immediately the documents in the transmission line. Code 14 - Memory full Received document memory full. Print all received documents. Code 15 - Unknown mailbox number You wish to deposit a document in a subscriber’s mailbox. The mailbox number does not exist. Code 16 - No Relay Bcst list Nr x You requested a document relay from a remote fax but the fax has not programmed the list of subscribers requested. Code 17 - Unknown mailbox number You wish to recover a document from a subscriber’s mailbox. The mailbox number does not exist. Code 18 - Relay Bcst impossible You requested a document relay from a remote fax which does not have the relay broadcast function. Code 19 - Subscriber has stopped The communication has been stopped by your subscriber. (Example: a fax wanted to poll your fax but there is no document deposited). Code 1A - Disconnected The transmission has not started. The telephone line is busy. Code 1B - Transmission failed During transmission: start again. During reception: ask your subscriber to resend the document. Code 50 - Server error Check the number configured for the SMS server or a communication error occured during data transmission. - 67 - 12 - Maintenance Specifications Physical specifications Electrical specifications Environmental specifications Peripheral specifications Printer Copier Scanner Printing supports PC connection Dimensions: 412 x 447 x 386 mm Weight: 13 kg Power supply: Single phase 220-240 V - 50/60 Hz - 4.5 A Electric consumption: 12 W typical in powersave 16 W typical in standby 340 W average during printing Operating temperature: In operation: + 10 °C to 32 °C Acceptable humidity level: In operation: 15 % to 80 % HR (without condensation) Type: Laser (on normal paper) Resolution: 600 dpi Speed: 16 ppm maximuma a. Printing speed may vary depending on used operating systems, computer specifications, software applications, connection modes (LAN, USB or WLAN), paper formats as well as file types and sizes. Preheating time: 21 sec. First page out time: 13 sec. Type: Autonomous Black and White Copy speed: 16 ppm maximum Resolution: 600 dpi Multiple copies: 99 pages maximum Zoom range: 25 % to 400 % Type: Color scanner Color depth: 36 bits Resolution: 600 dpi (optical) 2400 dpi (interpolated) Software compatibility: TWAIN Maximum paper format: Letter Main paper tray capacity: 250 sheets maximum (60 g/m²), 200 sheets maximum (80 g/m²) Output tray capacity: 50 sheets Main tray paper format: A4, A5, Legal, Letter 60 to 105 g/m² paper Paper format for manual printing: A4, A5, Legal, Letter, B5, exec, A6 52 to 160 g/m² paper Slave USB 2.0 port (PC connection) Master USB 2.0 port (Wlan connection, reader, USB memory key reader) Operating System: Windows 98 SE, 2000, ME, XP, Vista 32-bit - 68 - 12 - Maintenance Consumable specifications Reference paper Specifications are subject to changes for improvement without notice. Guide de l‘utilisateur . bizhub 164 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star® ................................................................................................................................... 1-3 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®........................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights.................................................................................................. 1-4 Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Remarque........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL........................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conseils de sécurité ....................................................................................................................... 1-6 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution ..................................................................................... 1-6 Signification des symboles ................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires........................................................................................................ 1-10 Marquage CE (Déclaration de conformité) à l'usage des utilisateurs de l'Union européenne (UE) . 1-10 À l'intention des utilisateurs des pays non soumis aux réglementations de Classe B.................... 1-10 Sécurité laser ................................................................................................................................... 1-10 Rayonnement laser interne .............................................................................................................. 1-10 Pour les utilisateurs européens........................................................................................................ 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs danois .............................................................................................................. 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois............................................................................................. 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens ....................................................................................................... 1-11 Étiquette de sécurité laser ............................................................................................................... 1-12 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................. 1-12 Niveau sonore (à l'intention des Européens uniquement) ............................................................... 1-12 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement................................................................................... 1-13 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement................................................................................... 1-13 1.5 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution .............................................................................. 1-14 1.6 Espace requis................................................................................................................................ 1-15 1.7 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................................................................... 1-16 Alimentation ..................................................................................................................................... 1-16 Environnement ................................................................................................................................. 1-16 Stockage de copies ......................................................................................................................... 1-16 Précautions à prendre pour le transport .......................................................................................... 1-16 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie .......................................................................................................... 1-17 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ....................................................................................... 1-18 1.9.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel................................................................................................... 1-18 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................. 1-18 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................. 1-18 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................. 1-19 1.9.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ................................................................................... 1-19 Format papier................................................................................................................................... 1-19 Indication papier .............................................................................................................................. 1-19 2 Nomenclature et fonctions 2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Unité principale ............................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Extérieur de l'unité principale............................................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.2 Intérieur de l'unité principale.............................................................................................................. 2-5 2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Table des matières-2 bizhub 164 3 Découvrir cette machine 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine..................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Opérations de base......................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Charger du papier .............................................................................................................................. 3-4 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1................................................................................................ 3-4 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle....................................................... 3-5 Configurer un format personnalisé .................................................................................................... 3-6 3.2.2 Placer les originaux............................................................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.3 Opérations élémentaires de copie ..................................................................................................... 3-7 4 Touches du Control Panel 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions ............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran....................................................................................................... 4-4 5 Fonction Copie 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles.......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Paramètres de base........................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) ................................................................................. 5-7 5.3.1 [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ]...................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.3.2 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES]........................................................................................................................ 5-8 [2en1] ................................................................................................................................................. 5-8 [4en1] ................................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.3.3 [TRI].................................................................................................................................................. 5-10 [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] ................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.3.4 [EFFACEMENT] ................................................................................................................................ 5-11 5.3.5 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] ...................................................................................................................... 5-12 [EFFACEMENT] + [SÉPARATION LIVRE]......................................................................................... 5-13 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE]............................................................................................................... 5-15 Enregistrer les réglages Copie ......................................................................................................... 5-15 Rappeler un programme de copie ................................................................................................... 5-15 5.5 Tableau d'association des fonctions .......................................................................................... 5-16 6 Installer le pilote 6.1 Précautions d'installation............................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 Environnement ................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.2 Raccordement à l'ordinateur ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Installation Plug and Play............................................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/Server 2008 ........................................................................... 6-4 6.2.2 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation ................................................................................... 6-7 6.3.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7...................................................................................................... 6-7 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote ....................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.1 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante..................................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.2 Désinstaller le pilote scanner ............................................................................................................. 6-9 bizhub 164 Table des matières-3 7 Fonctions Imprimante 7.1 Opérations Impression ................................................................................................................... 7-3 Annuler une tâche d'impression ........................................................................................................ 7-3 Mode Veille ........................................................................................................................................ 7-3 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante............................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.1 Paramètres communs........................................................................................................................ 7-4 7.2.2 Onglet [Installation] ............................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.2.3 Onglet [Mise en page] ........................................................................................................................ 7-6 7.2.4 Onglet [Réglages par page] ............................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.5 Onglet [Filigrane] ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2.6 Onglet [Qualité] .................................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.2.7 Onglet [À propos] ............................................................................................................................... 7-9 8 Fonction de numérisation 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN..................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Numériser un document .................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN................................................................................................ 8-4 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA.......................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.1 Numériser un document .................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA .................................................................................................... 8-5 Régler la qualité depuis les [Paramètres personnalisés] ................................................................... 8-6 9 [MENU] 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE]......................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.2 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE]........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.3.1 [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] .................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [GESTION UTILISAT.] ........................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] ......................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.3.5 [PARAM. COPIE]................................................................................................................................ 9-9 9.4 [TOTAL PAGES]............................................................................................................................. 9-10 10 Entretien 10.1 Papier ............................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Vérifier le papier ............................................................................................................................... 10-3 Message de rechargement .............................................................................................................. 10-3 Précautions relatives à l'utilisation du papier .................................................................................. 10-3 Stockage du papier.......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Charger du papier ............................................................................................................................ 10-4 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1.............................................................................................. 10-4 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle..................................................... 10-5 10.2 Toner .............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.2.1 Vérifier le toner ................................................................................................................................. 10-6 Message de Remplacement ............................................................................................................ 10-6 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner......................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage............................................................................................................... 10-9 Vitre d'exposition, Control Panel ..................................................................................................... 10-9 Parois externes, Presse-original ...................................................................................................... 10-9 Table des matières-4 bizhub 164 11 Dépannage 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) ......................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Tableau de dépannage ................................................................................................................. 11-4 Dépannage élémentaire ................................................................................................................... 11-4 Principaux messages et leurs solutions........................................................................................... 11-7 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier .................................................................................................. 11-9 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical ................................. 11-10 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier .......................................... 11-11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie................................................ 11-12 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau Plateau d'introduction manuelle (en option) .............. 11-12 12 Caractéristiques 12.1 Papier ............................................................................................................................................. 12-3 Types papier et capacités................................................................................................................ 12-3 12.2 Caractéristiques machine ............................................................................................................ 12-4 bizhub 164 ....................................................................................................................................... 12-4 12.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 12-6 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 .................................................................................. 12-6 13 Annexe 13.1 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 13-3 14 Index 14.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 14-5 1 Introduction bizhub 164 1-3 1.1 Energy Star® 1 1 Introduction Merci d'avoir acheté cette machine. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Ce manuel contient aussi des notes et des précautions dont il faut tenir compte pour exploiter cette machine en toute sécurité. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins. Les illustrations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent représenter l'équipement réel avec de légères différences. 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que Partenaire ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. 1 Marques déposées et copyrights 1-4 bizhub 164 1.2 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA, et "The essentials of imaging" sont des marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub est une marque déposée de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Copyright © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits réservés. Remarque Toute reproduction partielle ou totale du guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. ne pourra être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce guide de l'utilisateur. Les informations figurant dans le guide de l'utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reste le détenteur du copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT) : logiciel inclus comme partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données vectorisées numériquement encodées et lisibles par la machine codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser en association avec le logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel Hôte") ainsi que de la documentation écrite explicative ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. L'accord de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence non-exclusive pour utiliser le Logiciel et la Documentation sous réserve que vous respectiez les points suivants : 1. Vous pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices associés pour reproduire des images sur le ou les périphérique(s) de sortie sous licence, uniquement pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 2. En plus de la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés à la section 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser les programmes de polices romaines pour reproduire les poids, les styles et les versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Types de caractères") sur l'afficheur ou l'écran pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 3. Vous pouvez faire une copie de sauvegarde du Logiciel Hôte, à condition que votre copie de sauvegarde ne soit pas installée ni utilisée sur un autre ordinateur. Par dérogation aux restrictions cidessus, vous pouvez installer le logiciel sur plusieurs ordinateurs uniquement pour utilisation avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez céder ses droits dans le cadre de ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts que le titulaire de la licence possède sur ledit Logiciel ou ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de remettre au cessionnaire toutes les copies du dit Logiciel ou de ladite Documentation. et le cessionnaire accepte d'être lié par toutes les clauses et conditions du présent Contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Logiciel ni de faire de l'ingénierie inverse. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de KMBT et de son concédant de licence. 8. Les marques commerciales seront utilisées conformément aux pratiques en cours, y compris en ce qui concerne l'identification du nom du propriétaire de la marque commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. L'utilisation d'une quelconque marque commerciale ne vous accorde aucun droit de propriété sur cette dernière. bizhub 164 1-5 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights 1 9. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer, donner à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou des copies du Logiciel que le Concessionnaire n'utilise pas, ou un Logiciel enregistré sur un support non utilisé, sauf en tant que partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation tel que décrit ci-dessus. 10. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE INDIRECT, DOMMAGE-INTERÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉ A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux appartenant à l'administration US : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 12. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. 1 Conseils de sécurité 1-6 bizhub 164 1.3 1.3 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez lire la section suivante avant de brancher la machine au secteur. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez-vous observer impérativement toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce guide. Référence - Certaines parties du contenu de ce chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans les guides pour classifier le niveau des avertissements de sécurité. Signification des symboles AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de cet avertissement peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ATTENTION Négliger cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole vous avertit des risques de brûlures. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle plein indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. Démontage et modification AVERTISSEMENT • N'essayez jamais d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'effectuez aucune modification sur ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. Cordon d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas fourni avec le produit, n'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation et la fiche préconisés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un incendie ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil, et jamais avec un autre appareil, sous peine d'incendie ou d'électrocution. bizhub 164 1-7 1.3 Conseils de sécurité 1 • Veillez à ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, à ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon endommagé (conducteur partiellement à nu, conducteur cassé, etc.) peut entraîner un incendie ou une panne. En présence de l'un de ces symptômes, basculer immédiatement l'interrupteur électrique sur Arrêt, débrancher le cordon, de la prise murale puis contacter le S.A.V. Alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Utilisez exclusivement la tension d'alimentation spécifiée, sous peine d'incendie ou d'électrocution. • Branchez directement la fiche dans la prise murale de même configuration que la fiche. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur entraîne le branchement de la machine à une source d'alimentation inadéquate (tension, capacité électrique, mise à la terre) et risque de provoquer un incendie ou causer une électrocution. En l'absence d'une prise murale appropriée, le client doit en demander l'installation par un électricien qualifié. • En règle générale, ne pas utiliser d'adaptateur multi-prises ni de rallonge. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur ou d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. • Consultez votre technicien de maintenance agréé avant de brancher un autre équipement sur la même prise murale. Une surcharge pourrait entraîner un incendie. ATTENTION • La prise électrique doit se trouver à proximité de l'équipement Sinon, vous ne pourrez pas débrancher la fiche d'alimentation en cas d'urgence. Fiche d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le câble avec les mains humides car cela peut provoquer une électrocution. • Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. ATTENTION • Ne pas tirer sur le cordon d'alimentation pour le débrancher. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. Cordon d'alimentation 1 Conseils de sécurité 1-8 bizhub 164 1.3 Mise à la terre AVERTISSEMENT • Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Installation AVERTISSEMENT • Ne posez jamais de vase ou autre récipient contenant de l'eau, d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. De l'eau ou des objets métalliques qui tomberaient à l'intérieur de la machine sont susceptibles de causer une électrocution, un incendie, ou une panne. Si un objet métallique, de l'eau, ou un corps étranger similaire tombe à l'intérieur de la machine, basculer immédiatement l'interrupteur électrique sur Arrêt, débrancher le cordon, de la prise murale puis contacter le S.A.V. ATTENTION • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • N'installez pas ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Cela pourrait engendre un incendie, une électrocution ou une panne. • Ne placez pas ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Ne laissez pas le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur de la machine et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. Ventilation ATTENTION • L'utilisation prolongée de ce produit dans un local mal ventilé ou pour la production d'un grand nombre de copies ou d'impression risque degénérer une odeur d'air de ventilation de la machine. Ventilez correctement la pièce. En cas de problèmes AVERTISSEMENT • Cessez toute utilisation de l'appareil s'il devient exceptionnellement chaud, s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. bizhub 164 1-9 1.3 Conseils de sécurité 1 • Cessez toute utilisation de l'appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. ATTENTION • Certaines zones à l'intérieur de l'appareil sont soumises à des températures élevées susceptibles de causer des brûlures. Si vous devez accéder à l'intérieur de la machine pour dégager un serrage papier par exemple, ne toucher pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement "Caution HOT". Consommables AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. ATTENTION • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne stockez pas les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Déplacement de la machine ATTENTION • Lorsque vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cette machine, tenez-la toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Guide de l'utilisateur ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. Avant plusieurs congés successifs ATTENTION • Débranchez la machine si vous ne devez pas l'utiliser pendant une période prolongée. En cas de problèmes 1 Déclarations réglementaires 1-10 bizhub 164 1.4 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires Marquage CE (Déclaration de conformité) à l'usage des utilisateurs de l'Union européenne (UE) Ce produit satisfait aux directives UE suivantes : Directives 2006/95/CEE, 2004/108/CEE et 2009/125/CEE. Cette déclaration est valable pour les pays de la Communauté Européenne. Le périphérique doit être utilisé avec un câble interface blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE et de la réglementation nationale. À l'intention des utilisateurs des pays non soumis aux réglementations de Classe B AVERTISSEMENT Cette machine est un produit de Classe A. Dans un environnement domestique, ce produit peut être la cause de parasites, auquel cas l'utilisateur pourra être amené à prendre les mesures appropriées. Le périphérique doit être utilisé avec un câble interface blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE et de la réglementation nationale. Sécurité laser Ceci est une machine numérique fonctionnant avec un laser. Le laser ne présente aucun danger à condition que la machine soit utilisée conformément aux instructions fournies dans les guides. Comme les radiations émises par le laser sont totalement confinées dans le boîtier de protection, le faisceau laser ne peut pas s'échapper de la machine lors des phases de fonctionnement. Cet appareil est un produit laser de Classe 1 : en d'autres termes, cela signifie qu'elle n'émet pas de rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Puissance maximum de rayonnement moyen : 5,3 μW au niveau de l'ouverture laser du bloc de la tête d'impression. Longueur d'onde : 770-800 nm Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3B émettant un faisceau laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. Le bloc de tête d'impression N'EST PAS UN ÉLÉMENT RÉPARABLE SUR SITE. Par conséquent, le bloc de tête d'impression ne doit être ouvert en aucune circonstance. Ouverture Laser du bloc de tête d'impression Tête d'impression bizhub 164 1-11 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires 1 Pour les utilisateurs européens Ceci est un laser semi-conducteur. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 7mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs danois Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 7mW og bølgelængden er 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 7mW ja aallonpituus on 770-800 nm. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 7mW och våglängden är 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 7mW og bølgelengde er 770-800 nm. ATTENTION L'utilisation de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures d'exploitation autres que celles spécifiées dans ce guide peuvent entraîner une exposition dangereuse aux radiations. ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än I denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. VARO! Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING! Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta ej strålen. ADVARSEL Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. 1 Déclarations réglementaires 1-12 bizhub 164 1.4 Étiquette de sécurité laser Une étiquette sécurité laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d'ozone Installez la machine dans un local bien ventilé Une quantité négligeable d'ozone se dégage au cours du fonctionnement normal de cette machine. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, d'hygiène et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Placer l'appareil dans une pièce bien ventilée Une quantité négligeable d'ozone se dégage pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Niveau sonore (à l'intention des Européens uniquement) Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779. bizhub 164 1-13 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires 1 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement Ce symbole signifie : ne pas jeter avec les déchets domestiques. Veuillez vous reporter aux informations de votre collectivité locale ou contactez nos revendeurs pour savoir comment traiter les appareils électriques et électroniques usagés. Le recyclage de ce produit contribuera à préserver les ressources naturelles et à prévenir les potentiels effets néfastes à l'environnement et à la santé humaine qui découleraient d'un rebut inadapté. Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement Ce produit est conforme à la Directive RoHS (2002/95/EC). Ce produit n'est pas destiné à être utilisé dans le champ de vision direct sur des postes de travail à terminal vidéo. Afin d'éviter les reflets désagréables sur les postes de travail à terminal vidéo, il ne faut pas placer cet appareil dans le champ de vision direct. Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden. 1 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-14 bizhub 164 1.5 1.5 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution Les avertissements et étiquettes de précaution sont apposés sur la machine, aux endroits suivants. Redoublez de prudence lorsque vous effectuez des opérations comme le dégagement d'un bourrage papier. REMARQUE Ne pas retirer les étiquettes ou les avis de mise en garde. Si une de ces étiquettes devient sale, veuillez la nettoyer afin qu'elle reste lisible. Si vous ne pas les rendre lisibles, ou si l'étiquette ou l'avis de mise en garde est détérioré, veuillez contacter votre technicien S.A.V. Ne pas altérer ou enlever les capots ou panneaux fixés sur cette machine, sinon cela pourrait vous exposer à un rayonnement laser. Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. Ne pas brûler les cartouches toner. Sous l'effet du feu les projections de toner sont dangereuses. AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION ATTENTION bizhub 164 1-15 1.6 Espace requis 1 1.6 Espace requis Pour permettre et faciliter le fonctionnement, le rechargement en consommables, le remplacement de composants et l'entretien périodique de la machine, respectez les dimensions de dégagement ci-dessous. REMARQUE Veillez à ménager un dégagement de 200 mm (8 pouces) ou plus à l'arrière de cette machine. 570 (22-7/16) bizhub 164 Unité : mm (pouce) 530 (20-7/8) 449 (17-11/16) bizhub 164 + MB-503 Unité : mm (pouce) 928 (36-9/16) 449 (17-11/16) 783 (30-13/16) 607 (23-7/8) 570 (22-7/16) 856 (33-11/16) 927 (36-1/2) 1 Précautions d'utilisation 1-16 bizhub 164 1.7 1.7 Précautions d'utilisation Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, observez les précautions ci-dessous. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Utiliser une source de tension la plus basse possible ou avec un minimum de variations de fréquence. – Variation de tension : Maximum ±10% (à 110 V/120 à 127 V/220 à 240 V AC) – Variation de fréquence : Maximum ±3 Hz (à 50 Hz/60Hz) Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10°C (50°F) à 30°C (86°F) avec une variation de 10°C (50°F) maximum en une heure - Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une variation de 10% au maximum par heure Stockage de copies Pour conserver les copies, suivre les recommandations ci-dessous. - Si les copies doivent être conservées pendant une longue période, les stocker dans un endroit protégé de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. - Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. Précautions à prendre pour le transport Désigner 2 personnes ou plus pour déplacer la machine en la tenant par les endroits indiqués. bizhub 164 1-17 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie 1 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie Certains types d'originaux ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies de tels originaux pour les originaux. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère, ou de copier des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature d'un original, consultez un conseiller juridique. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-18 bizhub 164 1.9 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.9.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque susceptible d'endommager la machine ou les originaux. Suivez les instructions pour éviter les dommages matériels. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Ce numéro au format "1" représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du Control Panel pour accéder à un élément de menu souhaité. L'Écran correspondant apparaît. dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Les procédures d'opération sont décrites par des illustrations. bizhub 164 1-19 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 Symboles clés [ ] Les noms des touches sur l'Afficheur ou sur l'écran de l'ordinateur sont placés entre des parenthèses du format suivant. Texte en gras Les noms des touches du Control Panel, les noms de pièces, de produits et d'options sont tous imprimés en gras. 1.9.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Format papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indication papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-20 bizhub 164 1.9 2 Nomenclature et fonctions bizhub 164 2-3 2.1 Options 2 2 Nomenclature et fonctions 2.1 Options N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale L'original est numérisé par la section scanner, puis l'image numérisée est imprimée par la section imprimante. Désigné dans tout ce manuel par les termes "machine", "unité principale", ou "bizhub 164". 2 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 (Option) Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles. Désigné dans ce guide sous le terme Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 1 2 2 Unité principale 2-4 bizhub 164 2.2 2.2 Unité principale 2.2.1 Extérieur de l'unité principale L'illustration représente l'unité principale équipée du Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 en option. N° Nom 1 Couvre-original 2 Presse-original 3 Control Panel 4 Capot côté 1 5 Levier d'ouverture du capot côté 1 6 Plateau d'introduction manuelle (Option) 7 Magasin 1 8 Porte frontale 9 Bac de sortie 10 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 11 Cordon d'alimentation 12 Port USB (Type A) USB2.0/1.1 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 12 11 10 bizhub 164 2-5 2.2 Unité principale 2 2.2.2 Intérieur de l'unité principale L'illustration représente l'unité principale équipée du Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 en option. N° Nom 1 Vitre d'exposition 2 Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation 3 Unité de fixation 4 Tambour 5 Rouleau prise papier 6 Cartouche toner 7 Réglette Original 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 2 Unité principale 2-6 bizhub 164 2.2 2.2.3 Control Panel N° Nom 1 Écran 2 Quick Settings 3 + , , , * , ) 4 Menu/Select 5 Back/Stop/Reset 6 Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 Découvrir cette machine bizhub 164 3-3 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine 3 3 Découvrir cette machine 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine 0 Les réglages par défaut sont les paramètres qui sont immédiatement actifs juste après la mise sur Marche de l'Interrupteur et avant que toute sélection soit effectuée sur le Control Panel, ainsi que ceux qui sont immédiatement actifs après que la touche Back/Stop/Reset a été actionnée en vue d'annuler toutes les sélections effectuées sur le Control Panel. Il est possible de modifier les sélections par défaut. 0 Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps spécifié, la machine revient automatiquement aux réglages par défaut. 0 Si aucune opération n'a lieu pendant le délai spécifié, la machine passe automatiquement en mode d'économie d'énergie. Ceci caractérise ce que l'on désigne par mode Veille. Quand la machine est en mode Veille, le voyant de la touche Start reste allumé en vert, mais l'Écran s'éteint. La machine quitte le mode Veille lorsqu'une quelconque touche du Control Panel est actionnée. 0 [Préchauffage] apparaît à l'Écran lorsque l'Interrupteur est mis en position Marche ou que la machine quitte le mode Veille. Charger un original et presser la touche Start lorsque la touche Start est allumée en vert permet de mettre en réserve une tâche de copie. Une fois que la machine a fini de chauffer, l'original est numérisé. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt lorsqu'une tâche ou des données stockées sont en attente d'impression. Les tâches qui restent à imprimer seraient supprimées. 0 Les réglages qui n'ont pas été enregistrés et les tâches qui se trouvent dans la file d'impression sont effacés dès que l'Interrupteur est mis sur la position Arrêt. 0 Avant de remettre l'Interrupteur sur Marche lorsqu'il vient d'être mis sur Arrêt, il faut attendre au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt lorsque des images sont en cours de numérisation, d'envoi ou de réception. Les données en cours de numérisation, d'émission ou de réception seraient supprimées. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt pendant le processus de copie ou d'impression. Cela pourrait causer un bourrage. 1 Pour mettre la machine sous tension, n appuyez sur l'Interrupteur pour le mettre en position Marche. Vérifier que l'Écran s'allume. 2 Pour mettre la machine hors tension, o appuyez sur l'Interrupteur pour le mettre en position Arrêt. dPour info Pour changer les réglages par défaut du mode Copie : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE]. Pour changer le délai avant de passer au mode Veille : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ö [MODE VEILLE]. Pour changer le délai à l'issue duquel la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle intervient : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ö [INIT. P de CONTROL]. 3 Opérations de base 3-4 bizhub 164 3.2 3.2 Opérations de base 3.2.1 Charger du papier Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans chaque magasin papier. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Tirez le Magasin 1. 2 Appuyez vers le bas sur la Plaque guide document jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 3 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. % Pour charger un format personnalisé, chargez le papier, puis ajustez les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 5 Fermez le Magasin 1. 6 Spécifiez le format et le type papier pour Magasin 1. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MAG. PAPIER 1]. 1 Paramètres [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format papier. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer un format personnalisé, voir page 3-6. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type papier. bizhub 164 3-5 3.2 Opérations de base 3 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle 0 Le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est en option. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Ouvrez le Plateau d'introduction manuelle et faites glisser les Guides latéraux pour ménager plus d'espace entre elles. % Pour charger du papier de grand format, tirez l'Extension plateau. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 2 Insérez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction, en orientant la face à imprimer vers le bas (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % L'image sera imprimée sur la face du papier orientée vers le bas. % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 3 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. L'écran Réglage papier intro manuel apparaît. % Poussez les Guides latéraux fermement contre les bords du papier. 4 Permet de spécifier le type et le format du papier pour le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. % Pour spécifier le papier en utilisant la fonction Menu, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [PAPIER INTRO MANU]. 1 Paramètres [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format papier. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer un format personnalisé, voir page 3-6. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type papier. 3 Opérations de base 3-6 bizhub 164 3.2 Configurer un format personnalisé 1 Pour charger un format personnalisé dans le Magasin 1, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [FORMAT PAPIER MAG 1] ö [FORMAT] ö [ENTRÉE FORMAT]. Pour charger un format personnalisé dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [FORM.PAP. INTRO MANU] ö [FORMAT] ö [ENTRÉE FORMAT]. 2 Spécifiez la longueur [X] du papier en appuyant sur la touche + ou ,, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select. 3 Spécifiez la largeur [Y] du papier en appuyant sur la touche + ou ,, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select. Le format papier spécifié apparaît à l'Écran. 3.2.2 Placer les originaux 0 Ne placez pas un original d'un poids supérieur à 2kg (4-7/16 lb) sur la Vitre d'exposition. De plus, n'appuyez que modérément pour maintenir un livre ou tout autre original ouvert sur la Vitre d'exposition Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 0 Pour numériser des livres épais ou des objets volumineux, procédez à la numérisation sans refermer le Couvre-original. Lorsqu'un original est numérisé avec le Couvre-original ouvert, veillez à ne pas regarder directement la surface de la Vitre d'exposition d'où provient une lumière de forte intensité. La lumière émise à travers la Vitre d'exposition n'est pas un rayon laser, cela n'expose donc pas l'utilisateur aux risques associés. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Relevez le Couvre-original. pour l'ouvrir. 2 Placez l'original, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Chargez l'original de manière à ce que le bord haut soit en face de l'arrière ou du côté gauche de la machine. X Y bizhub 164 3-7 3.2 Opérations de base 3 3 Alignez l'original sur le repère situé dans le coin arrière gauche de la Réglette Original. % S'il s'agit de documents transparents ou translucides, placez une feuille blanche de même format par-dessus le document. % Pour la Copie carte d'identité, éloignez l'original de 4mm (3/16 pouces) de Réglette Original. % Pour des originaux en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert, orientez le haut de l'original vers l'arrière de la machine et alignez l'axe médian de l'original avec le repère de la Réglette Original. 4 Refermez le Couvre-original. 3.2.3 Opérations élémentaires de copie 1 Placez l'original, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. 2 Sur le Control Panel, sélectionnez les réglages Copie voulus. % Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Copie, voir page 5-5. % Permet de combiner les sélections Copie le plus souvent utilisées et de les enregistrer sur cette machine sous forme de programmes. Ces programmes peuvent ensuite être facilement rappelés. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes, voir page 5-15. 3 Spécifiez le nombre de copies désiré. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour augmenter ou diminuer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois. % Pour effacer le nombre de copies spécifié, appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset ö [QUANTITÉ]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Start. L'original est numérisé et copié. % Pour interrompre l'opération Copie en cours d'exécution, appuyez sur la Back/Stop/Reset touche. % Si l'écran suivant apparaît, placez le nouvel original sur la Vitre d'exposition, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select pour le numériser. Pour lancer l'impression, appuyez sur la touche Start. 3 Opérations de base 3-8 bizhub 164 3.2 4 Touches du Control Panel bizhub 164 4-3 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions 4 4 Touches du Control Panel 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions N° Nom Description 1 Écran Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. 2 Quick Settings Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner un élément de menu sur l'écran du mode Copie. 3 +, ,, *, ) Appuyez sur la touche correspondante pour sélectionner un élément de menu sur l'Écran ou changer son réglage. 4 Menu/Select Appuyez sur cette touche pour valider l'écran du menu. Appuyez également pour appliquer l'élément de menu ou le réglage précédemment sélectionné. 5 Back/Stop/Reset Pendant les opérations Copie/Impression : Suspend l'opération en cours. Écran de Menu : Appuyez pour revenir à l'écran précédent. Écran mode Copie : Appuyez pour effacer les réglages. 6 Start Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer l'opération Copie. 7 Voyant LED S'allume en continu pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Veille ou est disponible pour recevoir une tâche. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4-4 bizhub 164 4.2 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran <Écran de base> <Écran de menu> N° Indication à l'écran Description 1 Nombre de copies Indique le nombre de copies qui a été spécifié. 2 Magasin papier Indique le magasin papier qui est sélectionné. 3 Format papier Indique le format papier sélectionné. 4 Type Papier Indique le type de papier sélectionné. Indique que du papier ordinaire est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier ordinaire est sélectionnée. Indique que du papier carte est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier carte est sélectionnée. Indique que le papier recyclé est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier recyclé est sélectionnée. Indique que le papier dédié est sélectionné. bizhub 164 4-5 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4 5 Taux Zoom Indique que le taux zoom fixe/manuel a été sélectionné. 6 Qualité Indique le réglage Qualité sélectionné. 7 Densité Indique le niveau de densité pour le réglage Densité sélectionné. 8 Icône/Message Affiche l'icône qui représente un état spécifique de la machine ou une fonction activée. Affiche également un message qui indique l'état de la machine. [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] est actif. [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] est actif. [TRI] est actif. [EFFACEMENT] est actif. [SÉPARATION LIVRE] est actif. Plus de papier. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 10-4. Toner presque épuisé. Pour la procédure de remplacement des cartouches toner, voir page 10-6. Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Une opération de maintenance est requise et le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. Les données d'impression sont en attente dans une file avant impression. N° Indication à l'écran Description 4 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4-6 bizhub 164 4.2 9 Curseur Affiche la touche à utiliser pour spécifier le nombre de copies à réaliser. Appuyez sur la touche + , , , * , ou ) pour spécifier le nombre de copies. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour spécifier le nombre de copies. 10 Menu ou fonction Affiche le menu, la fonction ou le réglage. 11 Curseur Affiche la touche à utiliser pour sélectionner et spécifier les réglages. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour sélectionner un menu et changer les réglages. Appuyez sur la touche * ou ) pour changer les réglages. N° Indication à l'écran Description 5 Fonction Copie bizhub 164 5-3 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles 5 5 Fonction Copie 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles Voici les fonctions Copie qui peuvent être utilisées sur cette machine. Paramètres Copie taille réelle Copie agrandie/réduite [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] [2en1] (Portrait) [2en1] (Paysage) [4en1] ([MODÈLE 1]) [4en1] ([MODÈLE 2]) 5 Fonctions Copie disponibles 5-4 bizhub 164 5.1 [TRI] [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] [EFFACEMENT SUP.] [EFF. DES BORDS] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [EFF. DES BORDS] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [EFFAC. CENTRE] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [CENTRE + EFF. DES BORDS] Paramètres bizhub 164 5-5 5.2 Paramètres de base 5 5.2 Paramètres de base Permet de configurer les réglages élémentaires nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour plus de détails sur les opérations Copie élémentaires, voir page 3-7. 0 La touche + ou , permet d'augmenter ou de diminuer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois indépendamment de l'élément de menu sélectionné. 0 Si le réglage Qualité [PHOTO] est sélectionné, le réglage Densité [AUTO] ne peut pas être sélectionné. 0 Si les conditions suivantes sont remplies, l'autre magasin papier remplace automatiquement le magasin sélectionné qui viendrait à manquer de papier au cours de l'impression des copies. - Installez Plateau d'introduction manuelle en option. - Chargez du papier de même type et format dans le Magasin 1 et Plateau d'introduction manuelle, en veillant à respecter l'orientation du papier. 1 L'élément de menu change en appuyant sur la touche Quick Settings comme illustré ci-dessous. 2 Appuyez sur la touche * ou ) pour changer les réglages. N° Nom Description 1 Nombre de copies Spécifiez le nombre de copies désiré. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour changer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois et sur la touche * ou ) pour changer le nombre de copies de dix unités à la fois. 2 Magasin papier Sélectionnez le magasin papier contenant le papier désiré. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 3-4. 3 Format papier Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. A3w, A4w, A4 v, A5w, A5v, B4w, B5w, B5 v, FLSw, 8Kw, 16Kw, 16Kv, 11 e 17w, LGLw, LTRw, LTRv, INVw, INVv, MEM1w, MEM2w MEM1 et MEM2 sont des formats personnalisés. 5 Paramètres de base 5-6 bizhub 164 5.2 dPour info Pour configurer des formats personnalisés : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO]. 4 Taux Zoom Définissez le taux zoom de l'image à copier. Zoom fixe Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom prédéfini pour copier un original d'un format fixe sur du papier de format fixe. : 50%, 70% (A4%A5, A3%A4), 81% (B4%A4), 100%, 115% (B4%A3), 141% (A5%A4, A4%A3), 200% : 50%, 64% (11 e 17%LTR), 78% (LGR%LTR), 100%, 121% (LGL%11 e 17), 129% (LTR%11 e 17), 200% Zoom manuel Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre 50% et 200%. Il faut d'abord sélectionner un zoom fixe, cela permet ensuite de régler le zoom manuel. 5 Qualité Permet de sélectionner le réglage du type d'image de l'original de manière à optimiser la qualité et la densité de la copie. [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte du texte et des photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. 6 Densité Permet de régler la densité de la copie. [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. Manuelle : Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. L'image reproduite est plus claire lorsque la densité est réglée du côté et plus sombre lorsque la densité est réglée du côté . N° Nom Description bizhub 164 5-7 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour chaque image copie finie, voir page 5-3. Pour plus de détails sur les opérations Copie élémentaires, voir page 3-7. Pour revenir à l'écran de base une fois que les réglages Application ont été définis, appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset jusqu'à ce que l'écran de base s'affiche. 5.3.1 [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] Cette fonction permet de copier sur une seule page, l'image du recto et l'image du verso d'un carte, un permis de conduire ou une carte d'identité par exemple. L'image du recto issue de la première passe de numérisation est temporairement enregistrée, puis l'image du verso est numérisée puis placée à côté de la première image afin de produire une copie des deux images sur une seule page. 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté gauche de la machine. 0 Positionnez l'original à 4mm (3/16 pouces) de la Réglette Original. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] ö [ACTIVÉ]. Sous-menu [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] Cette fonction permet de copier sur une seule page, l'image du recto et l'image du verso d'un carte, un permis de conduire ou une carte d'identité par exemple. p. 5-7 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être réduits pour être ensuite copiés sur une seule feuille de papier. p. 5-8 [TRI] Lorsque des originaux de plusieurs pages sont copiés en plusieurs jeux, les copies sont délivrées en jeux dont chacun contient une copie de chacune des pages originales. p. 5-10 [EFFACEMENT] Il est possible de produire des copies sur lesquelles ont été effacées les zones indésirables à la périphérie du texte de l'original. p. 5-11 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] Une original en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert peut être copié sur deux pages distinctes. p. 5-12 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-8 bizhub 164 5.3 5.3.2 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être réduits pour être ensuite copiés sur une seule feuille de papier. La fonction Originaux mixtes permet d'économiser le nombre de feuilles utilisées pour la copie. [2en1] Permet de copier les images de deux pages d'original sur une seule feuille de papier. Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 70% Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 70% Format original : A3, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 50% Format original : 11 e 17, Format papier : 8-1/2 e 11, Taux zoom : 50% 0 Le taux zoom est automatiquement réglé sur 70% (Pouce : 64%). Sélectionnez du papier de même format que l'original. 0 Si le format de l'original diffère de celui du papier utilisé, changez manuellement le taux zoom. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] ö [2en1]. bizhub 164 5-9 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 [4en1] Permet de copier les images de quatre pages d'original sur une seule feuille de papier. Deux présentations sont disponibles pour l'ordre de combinaison 4en1 de l'original. Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 50% Format original : A5, Format papier : A3, Taux zoom : 100% Format original : 5-1/2 e 8-1/2, Format papier : 11 e 17, Taux zoom : 100% 0 Le taux zoom est automatiquement réglé sur 50% (Pouce : 50%). Chargez du papier de même format que l'original. 0 Si le format de l'original diffère de celui du papier utilisé, changez manuellement le taux zoom. 0 Si des originaux sont placés comme illustré ci-dessous, les images ne sont pas copiées dans l'ordre. Format original : A3, Format papier : A3, Taux zoom : 50% % Appuyez sur al touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] ö [4en1]. [MODÈLE 1] [MODÈLE 2] 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-10 bizhub 164 5.3 dPour info Pour changer l'ordre de copie 4en1 : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [4en1 ORDRE COPIE]. 5.3.3 [TRI] Lorsque des originaux de plusieurs pages sont copiés en plusieurs jeux, les copies sont délivrées en jeux dont chacun contient une copie de chacune des pages originales. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [TRI] ö [ACTIVÉ]. [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] Lorsque des copies triées doivent être réalisées dans les conditions suivantes, chaque jeu de copies est automatiquement trié en sortie selon une disposition croisée. - Installez le Plateau d'introduction manuelle en option. - Du papier de même type et de même format doit être chargé dans le sens w dans un magasin papier et dans le sens v dans l'autre magasin papier. - Spécifiez [MODE CROISÉ]. 0 Sélectionnez le magasin papier chargé dans le même sens que l'original. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [TRI] ö [ACTIVÉ]. dPour info Pour spécifier le mode Croisé : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] ö [MODE CROISÉ] ö [MODE CROISÉ]. bizhub 164 5-11 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 5.3.4 [EFFACEMENT] Il est possible de produire des copies en effaçant l'ombre des perforations et des agrafes, ainsi que les zones indésirables à la périphérie du texte de l'original. [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] [EFFACEMENT HAUT] [EFF. DES BORDS] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 La largeur d'effacement varie selon le réglage du taux zoom. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [EFFACEMENT]. dPour info Pour spécifier la largeur d'effacement : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [EFFACER RÉGLAGE]. Paramètres [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] Efface le côté gauche de l'original. [EFFACEMENT HAUT] Efface le côté supérieur de l'original. [EFF. DES BORDS] Efface les quatre côtés de l'original. 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-12 bizhub 164 5.3 5.3.5 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] Une original en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert peut être copié sur deux pages distinctes, l'image de l'original étant divisée environ au niveau du repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. [RELIURE GAUCHE] [RELIURE DROITE] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 Alignez le centre de l'original avec le repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. 0 Placez l'original dans le sens w et chargez le papier dans le sens v. 0 Chargez du papier dont le format est égal à la moitié du format de l'original. 0 La longueur du papier qui peut être chargé ne devrait pas excéder 216mm (8-1/2 pouces). % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. Paramètres [RELIURE GAUCHE] Sélectionnez cette option si l'original est relié à gauche. La page de gauche de l'original ouvert en double-page est copiée en premier. [RELIURE DROITE] Sélectionnez cette option si l'original est relié à droite. La page de droite de l'original ouvert en double-page est copiée en premier. bizhub 164 5-13 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 [EFFACEMENT] + [SÉPARATION LIVRE] La Séparation Livre permet de produire des copies sur lesquelles l'ombre du pli intérieur de reliure et les zones indésirables autour du texte de l'original ont été effacées. [EFF. DES BORDS] [EFFAC. CENTRE] [EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 Alignez le centre de l'original avec le repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. 0 Placez l'original dans le sens w et chargez le papier dans le sens v. 0 La longueur du papier qui peut être chargé ne devrait pas excéder 216 mm (8-1/2 pouces). 0 Chargez du papier dont le format est égal à la moitié du format de l'original. 0 La largeur d'effacement varie selon le réglage du taux zoom. 0 Spécifiez préalablement [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-14 bizhub 164 5.3 % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [EFFACEMENT]. dPour info Pour spécifier la largeur d'effacement : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [EFFACER RÉGLAGE]. Pour spécifier la Séparation Livre : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. Paramètres [EFF. DES BORDS] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles ont été effacées des zones entières autour du texte de l'original en double-page. [EFFAC. CENTRE] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles a été effacé le pli interne de la reliure de l'original en double-page. [EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles ont été effacées des zones entières autour du texte de l'original en double-page et aussi le pli interne de la reliure. bizhub 164 5-15 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE] 5 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE] Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. Les réglages Copie suivants peuvent être enregistrés. - Nombre de copies - Magasin papier - Taux zoom - Fonctions disponibles avec [FONCTION COPIE] (Copie car.identité, Originaux mixtes, Tri, Effacement, Séparation livre) - Qualité - Densité Enregistrer les réglages Copie Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. 1 Configurez les réglages Copie à enregistrer. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MODE MÉMOIRE] ö [ENREGISTREMENT] 3 Sélectionnez le numéro du programme sous lequel vous voulez enregistrer les réglages. Les réglages Copie en cours sont enregistrés. Rappeler un programme de copie Permet de rappeler un programme enregistré. 1 Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MODE MÉMOIRE] ö [RAPPEL]. 2 Sélectionnez le numéro du programme à rappeler. L'Écran indique les réglages Copie enregistrés sous le numéro du programme. 5 Tableau d'association des fonctions 5-16 bizhub 164 5.5 5.5 Tableau d'association des fonctions Matrice de combinaison des fonctions pour le bizhub 164. Codes de combinaison de fonctions o : Les fonctions peuvent être associées. e : Quand on sélectionne le mode B, le mode A est automatiquement annulé. - : Les fonctions ne peuvent être associées. Le mode B ne peut pas être sélectionné. \ : Cette possibilité de combinaison ne peut exister pendant le fonctionnement de la machine. (1) : [SÉPARATION LIVRE] peut être combiné à [TRI]. Cependant, indépendamment du réglage Tri sélectionné, le résultat final est le même. (2) : Si le réglage Qualité [PHOTO] est sélectionné, le réglage Densité [AUTO] ne peut pas être sélectionné. (3) : Après avoir sélectionné le réglage Qualité [PHOTO], la densité passe en mode Manuel. (4) : La fonction est disponible seulement si [SÉPARATION LIVRE] est Activé. (5) : Lorsque le mode B est sélectionné, le taux zoom change pour passer à 100%. Sélection papier manuelle (Magasin 1) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Avec papier Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Sans papier Quantité de copies Taux Zoom programmé Taux Zoom Agrandissement/Réduction Texte/Photo Texte Photo Densité manuelle Densité auto Séparation Livre Copie Carte d'identité Copie 2en1 Copie 4en1 Gauche Supérieur Bord Centre Bords + Centre Copie Non-tri Copie Tri Sélection papier manuelle (Magasin 1) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Avec papier Quantité de copies Taux Zoom programmé Taux Zoom Agrandissement/Réduction Texte/Photo Texte Photo Densité manuelle Densité auto Séparation Livre Copie Carte d'identité Copie 2en1 Copie 4en1 Gauche Supérieur Bord Centre Bords + Centre Copie Non-tri Copie Tri o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x xx xx x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x - - o(1) o(1) Mode B: Définir en dernier Mode A: Définir en premier Papier Zoom Qualité Densité Nen1 Effacement Tri Tri Effacement Nen1 Densité Qualité Zoom Papier o(1)o(1) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(2) x(3) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Sans papier (4) (4) (4) (4) 6 Installer le pilote bizhub 164 6-3 6.1 Précautions d'installation 6 6 Installer le pilote 6.1 Précautions d'installation La section ci-dessous apporte des informations nécessaires à l'installation du pilote d'imprimante/scanner. 6.1.1 Environnement Voici les critères d'environnement d'exploitation pour utiliser le pilote d'imprimante/scanner. 6.1.2 Raccordement à l'ordinateur Connectez cette machine à l'ordinateur par un câble USB. Utilisez un câble USB avec une extrémité de type A (4 broches, mâle) et l'autre de type B (4 broches, mâle). Environnement Système d'exploitation 32bit Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur) Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 64bit Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 UC Tout processeur de spécifications égales ou supérieures selon les recommandations applicables à votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire Capacité de mémoire recommandée pour votre système d'exploitation Votre système d'exploitation et les applications à utiliser nécessitent des ressources mémoire suffisantes. Interface USB2.0 (Haute vitesse) Lecteur Lecteur CD-ROM Langue Arabe, Catalan, Tchèque, Danois, Néerlandais, Anglais, Finnois, Français, Allemand, Italien, Coréen, Norvégien, Portugais, Espagnol, Suédois, Chinois (traditionnel), Chinois (simplifié), Thaï, Hongrois, Lituanien, Polonais, Roumain, Russe, Slovaque, Turc 6 Installation Plug and Play 6-4 bizhub 164 6.2 6.2 Installation Plug and Play Le pilote d'imprimante/scanner peut être installée par Plug and Play. L'installation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. Si le pilote est installé par Plug and Play, le pilote scanner est installé en premier, et le pilote d'imprimante en dernier. La procédure décrite dans ce manuel concerne l'installation du pilote scanner, puis du pilote d'imprimante. Référence - Le Plug and Play est un moyen facile d'installer le pilote. Cependant, il est possible de recourir à un assistant supplémentaire pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. Pour utiliser cet assistant d'imprimante, sélectionnez le port USB port à raccorder en cliquant sur [Sélectionner un port imprimante]. - Sous Windows 7, utilisez le programme d'installation pour installer le pilote. 6.2.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/Server 2008 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Cliquez sur [Rechercher et installer le pilote (recommandé)]. La boîte de dialogue demandant d'insérer le disque (CD-ROM) apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] ou [Continuer]. 4 Cliquez sur [Je ne possède pas ce disque. Indiquez-moi d'autres options]. 5 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 6 Sélectionnez [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)], puis spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installer quand même le logiciel de ce pilote]. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 9 Répétez les étapes 3 à 8 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 10 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes]. 11 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. bizhub 164 6-5 6.2 Installation Plug and Play 6 6.2.2 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/Server 2003 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 3 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. % Si une boîte de dialogue contenant le message [Windows Update] apparaît, sélectionnez [Non]. 4 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (avancé)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant >]. 5 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 6 Spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 7 Cliquez sur la touche [Suivant >], puis appliquez les instructions des pages suivantes. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Test d'obtention du logo Windows] ou [Signature numérique] apparaît, cliquez sur la touche [Continuer] ou sur [Oui]. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 9 Répétez les étapes 4 à 8 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 10 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 11 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. 6.2.3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 3 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 5 Sélectionnez [Chercher le pilote adapté à mon matériel (recommandé)], et cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 Sélectionnez [Spécifier un emplacement], puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 Installation Plug and Play 6-6 bizhub 164 6.2 7 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 8 Spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 9 Cliquez sur [OK], puis appliquez les instructions des pages suivantes. 10 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 10 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes]. 13 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. bizhub 164 6-7 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6.3.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7 Le pilote d'imprimante/scanner peut être installé avec le programme d'installation. L'installation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Ne connectez pas le câble USB à la machine avant que l'instruction correspondante ne soit apparue. 0 Le cas échéant, quittez toutes les applications en cours. 1 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. % Double-cliquez sur [Setup.exe] sur le CD-ROM, puis passez à l'étape 2. % Si la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser], [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 2 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez la langue voulue, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 4 Pour accepter tous les termes de l'accord de licence, sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du Contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 5 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez le modèle approprié, puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 L'installation du pilote commence. % Si la fenêtre de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installer quand même le logiciel de ce pilote]. 7 Une fois seulement que l'instruction s'est affichée, connectez la machine à l'ordinateur par le câble USB. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. 6 Désinstaller le pilote 6-8 bizhub 164 6.4 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote La section ci-dessous explique la procédure de désinstallation du pilote. 6.4.1 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante Lorsque vous devez enlever le pilote d'imprimante, par exemple lorsque la réinstallation du pilote d'imprimante est nécessaire, utilisez la procédure suivante. La désinstallation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Imprimantes], [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône de l'imprimante à désinstaller. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer] de l'ordinateur pour désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante. % Sous Windows 7, faites un clic droit sur l'icône, puis cliquez sur [Supprimer matériel]. 4 Suivez ensuite les instructions des pages suivantes. Lorsque le pilote d'imprimante a été supprimé, l'icône disparaît de la fenêtre [Imprimantes], de la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou de la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 5 Ouvrez [Propriétés du serveur] ou [Propriétés du serveur d'impression]. % Sous Windows 7, ouvrez la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. Cliquez sur une icône dans la liste [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] et les [Propriétés du serveur d'impression] apparaissent sur le menu. Cliquez sur [Propriétés du serveur d'impression] dans le menu. % Sous Windows Vista/Server 2008, faites un clic droit dans la zone vierge de la fenêtre [Imprimantes], cliquez sur [Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur] - [Propriétés du serveur]. % Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur le menu [Fichier], puis sur [Propriétés du serveur]. % Si la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Pilote]. % Sous Windows 7, cliquez sur [Changer les paramètres du pilote] situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre pour opérer en disposant des droits d'administration. 7 Dans la liste [Pilotes d'imprimante installés :], sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante à supprimer, puis cliquez sur [Supprimer...]. % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, passez à l'étape 8. % Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, passez à l'étape 9. 8 Dans la boîte de confirmation des élément à supprimer, sélectionnez [Supprimer le pilote et les programmes associés.], puis cliquez sur [OK]. 9 Dans la boîte de dialogue vous demandant de confirmer si vous êtes sûr(e) de vouloir supprimer l'imprimante, cliquez sur [Oui]. % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, la boîte de dialogue apparaît pour vous permettre de confirmer votre décision. Cliquez sur [Désinstaller]. 10 Fermez les fenêtres et redémarrez l'ordinateur. % Le redémarrage de l'ordinateur est une opération nécessaire. La suppression du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. bizhub 164 6-9 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote 6 Référence - Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, même si le pilote d'imprimante est supprimé par la méthode précédente, le fichier d'information sur le modèle sera conservé sur l'ordinateur. Pour cette raison, le pilote d'imprimante risque de ne pas pouvoir être écrasé lors de la réinstallation de la même version. Dans ce cas, enlevez également le fichiers suivants. – Vérifiez le dossier "C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\w32e86" (dossier "C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\e64" dans le dossier e64 system, et "C:\WINNT\system32\spool\drivers\w32e86" de Windows 2000), et s'il y a un dossier (fichier décrit dans "oem*.inf" représenté ci-dessous dans Windows 2000) du modèle correspondant, supprimez-le. – Dans le dossier "C:\WINDOWS\inf" (dossier "C:\WINNT\inf" dans Windows 2000), supprimez "oem*.inf" et "oem*.PNF" ("*" inclus dans le nom de fichier indique un numéro différent en fonction de l'environnement de l'ordinateur). Avant de supprimer ces fichiers, ouvrez le fichier inf et vérifiez le nom de modèle décrit dans les toutes dernières lignes pour confirmer qu'il s'agit bien du modèle voulu. Le numéro du fichier PNF est le même que celui du fichier inf. – Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, cette opération est inutile si vous avez sélectionné [Supprimer le pilote et les programmes associés.]. 6.4.2 Désinstaller le pilote scanner Lorsque vous devez supprimer le pilote scanner, par exemple lorsque la réinstallation du scanner est nécessaire, utilisez la procédure suivante. La désinstallation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sélectionnez [Tous les programmes] (ou [Programmes]) - [KONICA MINOLTA :*** Scanner] - [UnInstScan]. ("***" indique un nom de modèle.) % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, lorsque la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue vous demandant de confirmer si vous êtes sûr(e) de vouloir supprimer le scanner, cliquez sur [Oui]. 4 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. 5 Fermez les fenêtres et redémarrez l'ordinateur. % Le redémarrage de l'ordinateur est une opération nécessaire. La suppression du pilote scanner est terminée. 6 Désinstaller le pilote 6-10 bizhub 164 6.4 7 Fonctions Imprimante bizhub 164 7-3 7.1 Opérations Impression 7 7 Fonctions Imprimante 7.1 Opérations Impression Les tâches d'impression sont spécifiées depuis le programme d'application. 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, et cliquez sur [Fichier]. Cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimer] dans le menu. 2 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante a été sélectionné dans [Nom de l'imprimante] (ou [Sélectionner une imprimante]). % Si l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionnée, cliquez pour sélectionner l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez l'étendue d'impression et le nombre de copies à imprimer. 4 Cliquez sur [Propriétés] (ou [Préférences]) pour changer les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante selon les besoins. % Cliquez sur [Propriétés] (ou [Préférences]) dans la fenêtre [Impression] pour afficher la page d'[Options d'impression] du pilote d'imprimante d'où vous pouvez configurer plusieurs fonctions. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-4. 5 Cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'impression commence. % Si aucune opération Copie n'a lieu pendant 30 secondes lorsque [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] est réglé sur [PRIORITÉ COPIE], l'impression commence automatiquement. Annuler une tâche d'impression Il est possible d'annuler une tâche d'impression depuis le Control Panel si la machine est en mode Imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que [MODE IMPRIMANTE] apparaît sur l'Écran de la machine et appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset. 2 Le message de confirmation [ABANDON TRAVAIL] apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez [OUI]. Mode Veille Si des données d'impression sont reçues pendant que la machine est en mode Veille, ce mode est annulé. Lorsque les données d'impression ont été reçues, elles sont imprimées dès que le préchauffage de la machine est terminé. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-4 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Voici une description des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante disponibles permettant d'imprimer depuis un ordinateur. Référence - L'écran de configuration du pilote d'imprimante peut être invoquée depuis la fenêtre [Imprimantes], la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur la touche [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. Sous Windows Vista/Server 2008, cliquez sur la touche [Démarrer] pour ouvrir le [Panneau de configuration], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes] dans [Matériel et audio]. Sous Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sélectionnez [Paramètres] - [Imprimantes]. Sous Windows 7, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 7.2.1 Paramètres communs Cette section décrit les réglages et les touches communs aux divers onglets. Nom d'élément Fonctions [OK] Cliquez sur cette touche pour activer les changements apportés aux paramètres et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour désactiver (annuler) les changements apportés aux paramètres et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés. [Appliquer] Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés sans refermer la fenêtre Propriétés. [Aide] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher l'Aide relative aux éléments de la fenêtre affichée. [Aperçu] Affiche un aperçu des paramètres papier spécifiés ou affiche l'état de l'imprimante. • Sélectionner [Aperçu Page] affiche la mise en page découlant des réglages en vigueur afin de vérifier l'image du résultat en sortie. • Sélectionner [Aperçu Imprimante] affiche une représentation de l'imprimante. Les magasins sélectionnés dans [Source papier] sur l'onglet [Installation] apparaissent en bleu clair. [Conf. aisée] Cliquez sur cette touche pour enregistrer les réglages actuels afin de pouvoir les rappeler ultérieurement. Si [Réglages d'usine par défaut] est sélectionné, tous les réglages reviendront à leurs valeurs par défaut. Un maximum de 32 programmes peut être enregistré (y compris [Réglages d'usine par défaut]). Le nom enregistré peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. bizhub 164 7-5 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.2 Onglet [Installation] Permet de configurer les fonctions élémentaires d'impression comme le format et le type de papier ainsi que la méthode de sortie. Il est possible de sélectionner les même formats et types de papier utilisés avec la machine. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Nom Fonction Description [Orientation] Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. [Format doc. original] Sélectionnez le format papier de l'original. [Personnaliser...] Les formats personnalisés souvent utilisés peuvent être enregistrés pour être rappelés ultérieurement lors de la sélection du format de papier. Un nom peut être assigné au format de papier défini pour l'enregistrer. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 32 formats. Le nom enregistré peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. [Format papier sortie] Spécifiez le format de papier en sortie. S'il est différent du format de l'original et que le zoom est réglé sur [Auto], l'image en sortie sera agrandie ou réduite pour s'adapter au format. [Zoom] Sélectionner un taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction. [Copie] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. [Assembler] Cochez cette case pour assembler les pages séquentiellement lors de l'impression de plusieurs jeux de copies. [Source papier] Sélectionnez un magasin papier à utiliser. Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée quand le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est installé sur la machine. Si [Auto] est sélectionné, le magasin papier contenant du papier au format sélectionné dans [Format doc. original] sera utilisé. [Type de média] Sélectionnez un type papier à utiliser pour l'impression. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-6 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2.3 Onglet [Mise en page] Sélectionnez le nombre de pages de document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. Nom Fonction Description [Combinaison] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être imprimés sur une seule feuille de papier. [Détails Combinaison...] Spécifiez l'ordre des pages et l'utilisation de la bordure. [Combinaison] Sélectionnez la condition de combinaison. Il s'agit du même réglage sélectionné dans la liste [Combinaison] de l'onglet [Mise en page]. [Ordre] Sélectionnez le sens et l'ordre des pages à imprimer. Cette opération est possible lorsque Nen1 a été spécifié pour [Combinaison]. [Bordure] Cochez cette case pour imprimer un cadre autour de chaque page. Cette opération est possible lorsque Nen1 a été spécifié pour [Combinaison]. bizhub 164 7-7 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.4 Onglet [Réglages par page] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non ajouter une page pour la face de couverture. Nom Fonction Description [Couverture recto] Sélectionnez s'il faut joindre une page face de couverture. Vous pouvez choisir d'imprimer la face de couverture comme page vierge ou comme page contenant une image. [Source Papier Couverture] Sélectionnez le magasin papier pour la feuille destinée à la face de couverture. Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée quand le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est installé sur la machine. [Type de média] Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la face de couverture. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-8 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2.5 Onglet [Filigrane] Permet d'imprimer le document avec un filigrane (Tampon texte) en surimpression. Nom Fonction Description [Sélection Filigrane] Sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer. [Nouveau...] / [Édition...] Permet d'enregistrer un nouveau filigrane. Un filigrane enregistré peut aussi être modifié ainsi que ses paramètres. Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 32 filigranes (y compris [Sans Filigrane]). [Texte du filigrane] Entrez le texte à imprimer en filigrane. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères. [Police] Sélectionnez la police. [Gras] Sélectionnez s'il faut utiliser un texte en gras. [Italique] Sélectionnez s'il faut utiliser un texte en italique. [Format] Spécifiez la taille. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage entre 7 et 300 points. [Angle] Spécifiez l'angle selon lequel le texte doit être imprimé sur le papier. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 0° à 359°. [Noirceur] Indiquez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10% à 100%. [Décaler à partir du centre] Sélectionner la position verticale et la position latérale. Vous pouvez spécifier les positions à l'aide des barres de défilement situées sous et à droite de l'image. [Supprimer] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer le filigrane sélectionné. [Premiere page uniquement] Cocher cette case pour imprimer le filigrane sur la première page uniquement. bizhub 164 7-9 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.6 Onglet [Qualité] Spécifiez la qualité d'impression. 7.2.7 Onglet [À propos] Affiche les informations sur la version du pilote d'imprimante. Nom Fonction Description [Définition] Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. [600 e 600] Les originaux sont imprimés à 600 e 600 dpi. [300 e 600] Les originaux sont imprimés à 300 e 600 dpi. [Réglages] Cliquez sur cette touche pour corriger la qualité d'image. [Brillance] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image imprimée. [Contraste] Permet de régler la balance de densité de l'image imprimée. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-10 bizhub 164 7.2 8 Fonction de numérisation bizhub 164 8-3 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8 8 Fonction de numérisation 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN Cette section décrit les fonctions du pilote scanner TWAIN. 8.1.1 Numériser un document L'opération de numérisation peut être effectuée depuis des applications compatibles TWAIN. Le mode opératoire dépend de l'application utilisée. À titre d'exemple, c'est la procédure avec Adobe Acrobat 7.0 Professionnel qui est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Pour plus de détails sur le positionnement des originaux, voir page 3-6. 2 Lancez l'application sur l'ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur [File]. 4 Pointez sur [Create PDF], puis cliquez sur [From Scanner]. 5 Sélectionnez le périphérique dans la boîte de dialogue, spécifiez les réglages voulus, et cliquez sur [Scan]. 6 Spécifier les réglages nécessaires. % Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-4. 7 Cliquez sur [Scan]. La numérisation commence. % Pour arrêter la numérisation, cliquez sur [Cancel] ou appuyez sur [Esc]. 8 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8-4 bizhub 164 8.1 8.1.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN Paramètres [Document Size] Sélectionnez le format papier à numériser. [Scan Mode] [Text] Convient à la plupart des documents texte. [Photo] Convient à la plupart des documents photographiques. [Resolution] [150 dpi e 150 dpi] C'est la résolution normale pour des caractères de taille standard (par ex. documents dactylographiés/ traitement de texte) et pour une numérisation optimale. [300 dpi e 300 dpi] Résolution supérieure pour les caractères de petite taille (par ex. sur des journaux). [600 dpi e 600 dpi] Résolution la plus élevée pour les données image. [Brightness] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image. [Help] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher les fichiers d'aide. [About] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher les informations sur la version. [Scan] Cliquez sur cette touche pour numériser une image. [Close] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. bizhub 164 8-5 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA 8 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA Cette section décrit les fonctions du pilote scanner WIA. 8.2.1 Numériser un document L'opération de numérisation peut être effectuée depuis des applications compatibles WIA. Le mode opératoire dépend de l'application utilisée. À titre d'exemple, c'est la procédure avec Adobe Photoshop 7.0 qui est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Pour plus de détails sur le positionnement des originaux, voir page 3-6. 2 Lancez l'application sur l'ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur [Fichier]. 4 Pointez sur [Importer], puis cliquez sur [Support WIA]. % Si un message apparaît dans une boîte de dialogue, vérifiez son contenu et cliquez sur [OK]. 5 Spécifier les réglages nécessaires. % Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-5. 6 Cliquez sur [Numériser]. La numérisation commence. % Pour arrêter la numérisation, cliquez sur [Annuler] ou appuyez sur [Esc]. 8.2.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA Paramètres [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] L'image est numérisée avec la qualité prédéfinie. [Résolution] : 300 [Luminosité] : 0 [Paramètres personnalisés] Permet de régler la qualité de l'image numérisée. [Aperçu] Une image numérisée apparaît. Faites glisser le rectangle de sélection sur l'image pour déterminer une zone. [Numériser] Cliquez sur cette touche pour numériser une image. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. 8 Pilote scanner WIA 8-6 bizhub 164 8.2 Régler la qualité depuis les [Paramètres personnalisés] % Sélectionnez [Paramètres personnalisés], puis cliquez sur [Ajuster la qualité de la photo numérisée]. Paramètres [Apparence] Affiche une image test. [Résolution] [150] C'est la résolution normale pour des caractères de taille standard (par ex. documents dactylographiés/ traitement de texte) et pour une numérisation optimale. [300] Résolution supérieure pour les caractères de petite taille (par ex. sur des journaux). [600] Résolution la plus élevée pour les données image. [Luminosité] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image. [Type d'image] [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] est actif. [Remise à zéro] Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les réglages précédents. [OK] Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les réglages modifiés. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. Réglage usine [Résolution] [300] [Luminosité] [0] [Type d'image] [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] 9 [MENU] bizhub 164 9-3 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE] 9 9 [MENU] Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de multiples fonctions Copie sur le Control Panel. La section suivante décrit le [MENU] qui apparaît à l'Écran ainsi que les fonctions qui peuvent être sélectionnées. 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE] Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-7. Paramètres [FONCTION COPIE] Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. p. 9-3 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] Configurez le papier destiné au magasin ainsi que la qualité et la densité voulues pour réaliser des copies. p. 9-4 [MODE UTILITAIRE] Configurez les fonctions et réglages de cette machine. p. 9-5 [TOTAL PAGES] Vous pouvez vérifier le nombre total d'impressions depuis la mise en service de la machine. p. 9-10 9 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] 9-4 bizhub 164 9.2 9.2 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] Configurez le papier destiné au magasin papier. Spécifiez aussi la qualité et la densité pour régler la qualité de l'image sur la copie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE]. Paramètres [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] Sélectionnez le magasin papier contenant le papier désiré. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 3-4. [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TAUX ZOOM] [FIXE] Permet de sélectionner un zoom constant pour copier un original d'un format fixe sur du papier de format fixe. [MANUEL] Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre 50% et 400%. [QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte du texte et des photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. [MANUEL] Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. [MODE MÉMOIRE] Permet de combiner les sélections Copie le plus souvent utilisées et de les enregistrer sur cette machine sous forme de programmes. Ces programmes peuvent ensuite être rappelés aisément. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 2 programmes. [RAPPEL] Permet de rappeler un programme. [ENREGISTREMENT] Permet d'enregistrer un programme. bizhub 164 9-5 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] La section suivante décrit les fonctions Copie/Impression qui peuvent être sélectionnés dans le [MODE UTILITAIRE]. Réglage usine [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] [MAG.1] [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] [DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Paramètres [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] Permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs au système d'exploitation de la machine. p. 9-6 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 2 formats personnalisés. p. 9-7 [GESTION UTILISAT.] Permet de procéder aux opérations de maintenance nécessaires au bon fonctionnement de la machine. p. 9-7 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] Permet de configurer les réglages pour chaque magasin papier et chaque sortie. p. 9-8 [PARAM. COPIE] Permet de configurer les valeurs initiales des réglages Copie. p. 9-9 9 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9-6 bizhub 164 9.3 9.3.1 [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] Permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs au système d'exploitation de la machine. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE]. Paramètres [INIT. P de CONTROL] Spécifiez un délai à l'issue duquel la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle interviendra, si aucune opération n'a été effectuée pendant ce délai. Lorsque la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle intervient, la machine revient automatiquement aux réglages initiaux. [MODE VEILLE] Spécifiez le délai à l'issue duquel le mode Veille interviendra si aucune opération n'est effectuée. [VEILLE RAPIDE] Spécifiez si le mode Veille doit être immédiatement restauré après l'exécution d'une tâche d'impression effectuée alors que la machine est en mode Veille. [DÉSACTIVER] Passe en mode Veille lorsque le délai spécifié dans le réglage du [MODE VEILLE] s'est écoulé. [ACTIVER] Passe en mode Veille immédiatement après que la tâche d'impression a été réalisée. [DENSITÉ (LIVRE)] Permet de régler le niveau de densité de l'image. [MODE1] Dans ce mode, les copies sont effectuées avec la même densité que l'original. [MODE2] Dans ce mode, la densité de la copie est éclaircie avec pour avantage de réduire les tâches sur la copie. [DENSITÉ IMPRESS.] Sélectionnez l'un des 7 niveaux de densité pour imprimer depuis un ordinateur. [CONTRASTE LCD] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'Écran. [RGL VITESSE TOUCHE] [HEURE DÉBUT] Spécifiez un délai avant que la valeur ne commence à changer lorsqu'une touche est maintenue enfoncée. [INTERVALLE] Spécifiez le délai avant que la valeur ne change pour le nombre suivant. [LANGUE] Spécifiez la langue de dialogue à l'Écran. Réglage usine [INIT. P de CONTROL] [1 min] [MODE VEILLE] [15 min] [VEILLE RAPIDE] [ACTIVER] [DENSITÉ (LIVRE)] [MODE1] [DENSITÉ IMPRESS.] [CONTRASTE LCD] [RGL VITESSE TOUCHE] [HEURE DÉBUT] : [1s] [INTERVALLE] : [0.1s] [LANGUE] [FRANÇAIS] bizhub 164 9-7 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3.2 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] Les formats de papier personnalisés fréquemment utilisés peuvent être enregistrés et rappelés en cas de besoin. Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 2 formats personnalisés. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO]. 9.3.3 [GESTION UTILISAT.] Lorsque la température ambiante change de manière considérable (quand le chauffage est allumé en hiver par exemple) ou lorsque la machine fonctionne dans un endroit très humide, de la condensation peut se former sur la surface du Tambour à l'intérieur de la machine, avec pour effet une dégradation de la qualité d'impression de la machine. Utilisez cette fonction pour sécher le Tambour et éliminer la condensation. 0 L'opération de séchage du tambour prend environ 1 minute. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [GESTION UTILISAT.]. Paramètres [MÉMOIRE 1] Permet d'enregistrer les formats papier personnalisés. La longueur du papier [X] peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432mm. [MÉMOIRE 2] La largeur du papier [Y] peut être réglée entre 90mm et 297mm. Réglage usine [MÉMOIRE 1] [X] : 140mm, [Y] : 90mm [MÉMOIRE 2] [X] : 140mm, [Y] : 90mm Paramètres [DÉHUM. PHOTOCOND.] Permet de démarrer le séchage du tambour. 9 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9-8 bizhub 164 9.3 9.3.4 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] Permet de configurer les réglages papier pour chaque magasin papier et chaque sortie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL]. Paramètres [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] Spécifiez le magasin papier à afficher pour le réglage initial. [MAG.1] Affiche Magasin 1 comme magasin papier par défaut. [INTRO MULTI MAN.] Affiche le Plateau d'introduction manuelle comme magasin papier par défaut. [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] Spécifiez s'il faut donner la priorité aux tâches d'impression lorsque la machine reçoit une tâche d'impression alors que des copies sont en cours d'impression. [COPIE] L'opération Copie devient prioritaire 30 secondes après l'impression des copies. Si aucune opération n'est effectuée dans les 30 secondes qui suivent l'impression des copies ou la dernière opération Copie, la machine exécutera la tâche d'impression éventuelle. [IMPRIMER] Si les tâches d'impression ont été définies comme prioritaires, la machine exécute une tâche d'impression immédiatement après l'impression des copies. [MODE CROISÉ] Spécifiez si les copies doivent ou non être délivrées en mode décalé alternatif lorsque les conditions nécessaires au mode Croisé sont remplies. bizhub 164 9-9 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3.5 [PARAM. COPIE] Permet de configurer les valeurs initiales des réglages Copie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE]. Réglage usine [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] [MAG.1] [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] [COPIE] [MODE CROISÉ] [OFF] Paramètres [RÉGLAGE QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte texte et photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. [MANUEL] Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. [NIVEAU DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Sélectionnez l'un des 3 niveaux de densité pour le paramètre de densité [AUTO]. [MANUEL] Sélectionnez l'un des 9 niveaux de densité pour le paramètre de densité [MANUEL]. [EFFACER RÉGLAGE] Spécifiez la largeur d'effacement entre 5 mm et 20mm (par pas de 1mm) lorsque des copies sont à réaliser avec le réglage [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE], [EFFACEMENT HAUT] ou [EFF. DES BORDS] sélectionné pour le paramètre [EFFACEMENT]. [GAUCHE] Efface le côté gauche de l'original. [HAUT] Efface le côté supérieur de l'original. [CADRE] Efface les quatre bords autour de l'original. [PRIORITÉ TRI] Spécifiez si les copies doivent être triées au moment où elles sont éjectées dans le bac de sortie. 9 [TOTAL PAGES] 9-10 bizhub 164 9.4 9.4 [TOTAL PAGES] Vous pouvez vérifier le nombre total d'impressions depuis la mise en service de la machine. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [TOTAL PAGES]. [ORDRE COPIE 4en1] Spécifiez l'ordre de combinaison de l'original pour la fonction 4en1. [MODÈLE 1] [MODÈLE 2] Réglage usine [PRIORITÉ QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] [PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ] [AUTO] [NIVEAU DENSITÉ] [AUTO] : [MANUEL] : [EFFACER RÉGLAGE] Réglage Effacement : [GAUCHE] Largeur d'effacement : [GAUCHE] : 10mm [HAUT] : 10mm [CADRE] : 10mm [PRIORITÉ TRI] [OFF] [ORDRE COPIE 4en1] [MODÈLE 1] Paramètres Paramètres [TOTAL COMPT] Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées depuis la mise en service de la machine. [COMPT FORM] Indique le nombre total de copies ou d'impressions réalisées sur le format de papier spécifié. C'est le technicien SAV qui devrait configurer la machine pour déterminer le format papier qui fait l'objet du comptage. [TOTAL SCAN] Affiche le nombre total de pages numérisées depuis la mise en service de la machine. (Les numérisations effectuées dans le cadre de la copie ne sont pas prises en compte.) 10 Entretien bizhub 164 10-3 10.1 Papier 10 10 Entretien 10.1 Papier 10.1.1 Vérifier le papier Message de rechargement Si un magasin papier manque de papier au cours de l'impression, le message [MAGASIN VIDE CHARG.PAP] apparaît. Vérifiez le magasin papier, puis chargez du papier dans le magasin papier. Précautions relatives à l'utilisation du papier Ne pas utiliser les types de papier suivants. Négliger ces précautions peut conduire à une réduction de la qualité d'impression, de bourrage ou de détérioration de la machine. - Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre - Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré - Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps - Papier humide, papier perforé, ou papier présentant des trous de perforation - Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal - Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible - Papier torsadé ou gaufré - Papier de forme non-standard (papier non rectangulaire) - Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones - Papier étiqueté - Papier avec rubans, crochets, boutons, etc. - Transparent Stockage du papier Rangez le papier dans un endroit frais, sombre et peu humide. Si le papier devient humide, cela peut entraîner un bourrage. Rangez le papier à plat et non sur le côté. Du papier gondolé peut entraîner un bourrage. 10 Papier 10-4 bizhub 164 10.1 10.1.2 Charger du papier Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans chaque magasin papier. Si l'impression s'arrête parce que le magasin papier est vide, chargez du papier dans le magasin. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Tirez le Magasin 1. 2 Appuyez vers le bas sur la Plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 3 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. % Pour charger un format personnalisé, chargez le papier, puis ajustez les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 5 Fermez le Magasin 1. 6 Appuyez sur la touche Start pour redémarrer l'impression. 1 bizhub 164 10-5 10.1 Papier 10 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle 0 Le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est en option. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux pour ménager un espace entre eux. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 2 Insérez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction, en orientant la face à imprimer vers le bas (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % L'image sera imprimée sur la face du papier orientée vers le bas. % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 3 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. % Poussez les Guides latéraux fermement contre les bords du papier. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Start pour redémarrer l'impression. 1 10 Toner 10-6 bizhub 164 10.2 10.2 Toner 10.2.1 Vérifier le toner Message de Remplacement Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer la cartouche toner, un message d'avertissement apparaît en bas de l'Écran. Quand ce message apparaît, préparez-vous à remplacer la Cartouche Toner selon les instructions de votre contrat d'entretien. Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer la cartouche toner, le message ci-dessous apparaît et la machine s'arrête. Remplacez la Cartouche Toner selon les instructions figurant dans votre contrat d'entretien. Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 0 N'utilisez que des cartouches toner prévues spécifiquement pour cette machine. L'utilisation de tout autre type de cartouches peut endommager la machine. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner - Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. 7 ATTENTION Maniement du toner et des bouteilles de toner - Ne pas brûler le toner ni les cartouches de toner. - Des projections de toner peuvent causer des brûlures. bizhub 164 10-7 10.2 Toner 10 1 Ouvrez le Panneau avant de la machine. 2 Faites tourner la cartouche vide en sens anti-horaire pour la déverrouiller. 3 Tirez la cartouche toner vers l'extérieur. 4 Déballez la cartouche de toner, et secouez-la en effectuant de 5 à 10 mouvements de va-et-vient. 5 Insérez légèrement la cartouche dans la machine. Tout en maintenant la protection de la cartouche vers le haut, enlevez l'adhésif de protection. 10 Toner 10-8 bizhub 164 10.2 6 Insérez la cartouche toner dans la machine. % Veillez à ce que la flèche sur le fond de la cartouche soit en face du repère , figurant sur la machine, comme illustré ci-contre. 7 Faites tourner la cartouche toner en sens horaire pour la verrouiller. 8 Fermez le Panneau avant de la machine. % Quand le Panneau avant est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. bizhub 164 10-9 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage 10 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage REMARQUE Assurez-vous d'éteindre la machine avant de la nettoyer. Vitre d'exposition, Control Panel REMARQUE N'appuyez trop fort pas sur le Control Panel cela pourrait endommager les touches et l'Écran. % Nettoyez la surface avec un chiffon doux et sec. Parois externes, Presse-original REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais de dissolvants ou de solvants comme le benzène pour nettoyer le Presse-original. % Essuyez la surface avec un chiffon doux humidifié avec un détergent ménager neutre. 10 Procédure de nettoyage 10-10 bizhub 164 10.3 11 Dépannage bizhub 164 11-3 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) 11 11 Dépannage Ce chapitre décrit les procédures de dépannage. 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) Si l'incident qui s'est produit ne peut pas être corrigé par l'utilisateur, le message [PROBLÈME MACHINE APPEL S.A.V. (C####)] (écran Appel services techniques) apparaît. Normalement le code d'incident commençant par "C" apparaît sur l'écran Appel services techniques. REMARQUE Quand ce message apparaît, éteignez la machine, et attendez environ 10 secondes avant de la rallumer. Si le message reste affiché, il se peut que la machine soit endommagée. Dans ce cas, il convient de contacter immédiatement votre SAV selon la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Notez pas écrit le code d'incident affiché sur l'écran Appel SAV. 2 Mettez l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt. 3 Débranchez la machine. 4 Contactez le S.A.V. et indiquez le code d'erreur que vous avez noté. 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-4 bizhub 164 11.2 11.2 Tableau de dépannage Dépannage élémentaire Voici les procédures de dépannage élémentaire. Si le problème subsiste à l'issue de l'opération décrite, contactez votre S.A.V. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède La machine ne démarre pas quand l'Interrupteur est mis sur la position Marche L'alimentation électrique est-elle présente à la sortie de la prise murale ? Insérez correctement la prise de courant dans la prise murale. La protection du circuit électrique ne s'est-elle pas déclenchée ? Réarmez le disjoncteur du circuit électrique. Rien ne s'affiche à l'Écran Le voyant de la touche Start estil allumé en vert ? La machine est passée en mode Veille. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du Control Panel pour annuler le mode Veille. (p. 3-3) L'opération de copie ne démarre pas. Le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation/1er capot supérieur de la machine est-il ouvert ? Refermez soigneusement le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation/1er capot supérieur de la machine. La machine vient d'être allumée et se trouve encore en préchauffage. Le préchauffage de la machine prend environ 30 secondes après qu'elle a été mise sous tension. Attendez la fin du cycle de préchauffage. Un message d'erreur ou une icône sont-ils affichés à l'Écran ? Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'Écran. L'impression est trop claire. La densité est-elle réglée vers le pôle le plus clair ? Appuyez sur la touche ) (foncé) dans le paramètre de densité pour sélectionner la densité voulue. (p. 5-5) Le papier est-il humide ? Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) L'impression est trop foncée. La densité est-elle réglée vers le pôle le plus foncé ? Appuyez sur la touche * (clair) dans le paramètre de densité pour sélectionner la densité voulue. (p. 5-5) L'original a-t-il été suffisamment plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition ? Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit bien plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition. (p. 3-6) L'image est partiellement obscurcie ou floue. Le papier est-il humide ? Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) L'original a-t-il été suffisamment plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition ? Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit bien plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition. (p. 3-6) bizhub 164 11-5 11.2 Tableau de dépannage 11 Il y a des taches ou des points sombres sur toute la page imprimée. Les sorties imprimées présentent des rayures. La Vitre d'exposition est-elle sale ? Essuyez la surface de la Vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. (p. 10-9) Le Presse-original est-il sale ? Nettoyez le Presse-original avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 10-9) L'original a-t-il été imprimé sur un support très translucide, comme du papier photosensible diazo ou des transparents de rétroprojection ? Placez une feuille de papier vierge par-dessus l'original. (p. 3-6) La copie concerne-t-elle un original recto-verso ? Si vous copiez un original fin recto-verso, le contenu du verso risque par transparence d'être reproduit sur le recto de la copie. Appuyez sur la touche * (clair) dans le paramètre de densité pour régler le niveau de densité. (p. 5-5) L'image est imprimée en biais. L'original est-il correctement positionné ? Positionnez correctement l'original contre la Réglette Original. (p. 3-6) Les Guides latéraux sont-ils correctement positionnés contre le bord du papier ? Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le bord du papier. Du papier recourbé a-t-il été chargé dans le plateau ? Aplatissez le papier avant de le charger. La page imprimée est gondolée. Le papier utilisé se gondole-t-il facilement (le papier recyclé, par exemple) ? Enlevez la ramette de papier du magasin papier, retournez-la et rechargez-la dans le magasin. Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) Le bord de l'image imprimée est sale. Le Presse-original est-il sale ? Nettoyez le Presse-original avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 10-9) Le format papier sélectionné est-il plus grand que l'original ? (Avec un taux zoom de 100%) Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi réaliser une copie agrandie par un taux zoom approprié permettant de l'adapter au format du papier. (p. 5-5) Le format ou l'orientation de l'original sont-ils différent de ceux du papier ? (Avec un taux zoom de 100%) Sélectionnez une orientation papier identique à celle de l'original. La copie a-t-elle été réduite à un format plus petit que l'original ? (lorsqu'un taux zoom réduit a été spécifié) Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui ajuste le format de l'original au format de papier souhaité. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi réaliser une copie réduite par un taux zoom approprié permettant de l'adapter au format du papier. (p. 5-5) Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-6 bizhub 164 11.2 Apparition du message "Imprimante non connectée" ou "Erreur d'impression" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Le pilote d'imprimante spécifié lors de l'impression peut ne pas être pris en charge par le contrôleur d'imprimante. Vérifiez le nom de l'imprimante spécifiée. Il se peut que le câble USB soit débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Erreur possible sur la machine. Vérifiez l'Écran de cette machine. Mémoire insuffisante. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Le processus d'impression sur l'ordinateur est terminé mais l'impression ne démarre pas. Le pilote d'imprimante spécifié lors de l'impression peut ne pas être pris en charge par le contrôleur d'imprimante. Vérifiez le nom de l'imprimante spécifiée. Il se peut que le câble USB soit débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Erreur possible sur la machine. Vérifiez l'Écran de cette machine. Tâches encore en attente de traitement. Attendez que le traitement de la tâche en cours soit terminé. Mémoire de l'ordinateur insuffisante. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Impossible de sélectionner des éléments dans le pilote d'imprimante. Certaines fonctions ne peuvent pas se combiner. Les éléments qui apparaissent en gris ne peuvent pas être configurés. Apparition d'un message de "conflit" indiquant "Configuration impossible" ou "La fonction va être annulée". Vous essayez de configurer des fonctions qui ne peuvent pas être combinées. Vérifiez les fonctions spécifiées, et ensuite spécifiez des fonctions qui peuvent être combinées. Impression impossible à partir des paramètres configurés. Le paramétrage est peut-être incorrect. Vérifiez le réglage de chaque élément du pilote d'imprimante. Les fonctions sélectionnées peuvent être combinées dans le pilote d'imprimante, mais pas forcément sur cette machine. Il se peut que le format papier et l'orientation spécifiés dans l'application priment sur les réglages du pilote d'imprimante lors de l'impression. Configurez les réglages correctement dans l'application. La combinaison échoue ; les pages ne sont pas combinées, mais imprimées séparément. Des originaux de différentes orientations ont été combinés. Rectifiez les orientations des originaux. Les images ne sont correctement imprimées. Mémoire de l'ordinateur insuffisante. Simplifiez les images pour réduire le volume des données. Le papier n'est pas prélevé dans la source papier spécifiée. Le papier n'est pas prélevé dans la source papier spécifiée si cette source papier contient du papier de format ou d'orientation différents. Chargez du papier de format ou d'orientation appropriés dans la source papier désirée. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède bizhub 164 11-7 11.2 Tableau de dépannage 11 Principaux messages et leurs solutions En cas d'affichage d'un message autre que ceux mentionnés ci-dessous, suivez les instructions données dans le message. "#" indique le magasin papier. 1 représente le Magasin 1, et représente le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. "XXX" indique le format papier. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Scanner pas prêt" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. La machine n'a pas démarré. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Il se peut qu'un "crash" système se soit produit sur l'ordinateur ou sur la machine pendant la transmission. Le câble USB n'était pas correctement connecté pendant la transmission. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Scanner occupé" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Si une tâche de numérisation TWAIN est envoyée en même temps qu'une tâche de copie, la machine risque de s'arrêter pendant la numérisation. Attendez que l'opération Copie/ Numérisation soit terminée. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Erreur en lecture données" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Une erreur s'est produite alors que la machine était en train de lire les données pendant la numérisation. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Erreur machine" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Il pourrait y avoir un problème avec la transmission des commandes entre le pilote TWAIN et la machine. Vérifiez le câble USB connecté à la machine. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède Message Origine Remède [BOURRAGE PAPIER OUVRIR PORTE CÔTÉ 1] Un bourrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 et enlevez le papier coincé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 11-9) Tout le papier coincé n'a pas été retiré de l'intérieur de la machine. Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 et enlevez tout le papier coincé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 11-9) [MÉMOIRE PLEINE] Le volume des données de l'image numérisée a dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque du Control Panel ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Les données numérisées et/ou les données image reçues seront effacées.) Diminuez la résolution et réessayez. (p. 7-9, p. 8-4, p. 8-6) Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur ont dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. [MÉM. FICHIER PLEINE] Le nombre des fichiers de données image numérisées par le scanner a atteint le maximum. 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-8 bizhub 164 11.2 [ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER RÉINSÉR.PAP. (#XXX)] Les images sont imprimées sur du papier d'un format différent de celui de l'original. Recharger du papier d'un format approprié dans le magasin papier, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 10-4) Les images sont imprimées sur du papier d'un format différent de celui spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante. [PAPIER NON CONFORME CHARGER PAPIER (XXX)] [Auto] est sélectionné dans la liste [Source papier] du pilote d'imprimante, mais le papier du format spécifié n'est pas chargé. [FORMAT PAP.INCORRECT (#XXX)%(#XXX)] Le papier du format spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié. [MAGASIN VIDE CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX)] Le magasin a manqué de papier pendant la copie/impression. [ERREUR TYPE MÉDIA (#XXX)%(#XXX)] Le papier du type spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié dans le magasin papier et changez le type papier dans le mode Menu, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 9-4) [PORTE AVANT OUVERTE FERMER PORTE AVANT] Le Panneau avant de la machine est ouvert ou mal fermé. Fermez correctement le Panneau avant de la machine. [PORTE COTÉ1 OUVERTE FERMER PORTE COTÉ 1] La Porte côté 1 de la machine est ouverte ou mal fermée. Fermez correctement la Porte côté 1 de la machine. [TONER VIDE REMPLACER TONER] Le toner est épuisé. La copie ou l'impression ne sont plus possibles. Remplacez la cartouche vide par une cartouche de toner neuve. (p. 10-6) [APPEL MAINTENANCE (M1) APPEL SAV] Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. [APPEL MAINTENANCE (M2) APPEL SAV] Le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. [ÉCHEC CONNEXION PC] Une erreur s'est produite alors que la machine était en train de lire les données pendant la numérisation. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Si l'erreur subsiste, contactez votre service après vente. Message Origine Remède bizhub 164 11-9 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier Si un bourrage papier se produit, le message [BOURRAGE PAPIER OUVRIR PORTE COTÉ 1] apparaît. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour dégager le bourrage papier. 7 ATTENTION - La zone autour de l' Unité de fixation est extrêmement chaude. Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux qui sont indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. % 1. Unité de fixation 7 ATTENTION - Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. REMARQUE Toucher la surface du Tambour peut causer une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du Tambour. % 1. Tambour 1 1 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-10 bizhub 164 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical 1 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 2 Ouvrez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation. % Relevez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en position. 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation. 5 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. bizhub 164 11-11 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier 1 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 2 Retirez lentement le papier. 3 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 4 Tirez le Magasin 1. 5 Enlevez tout le papier du Magasin 1, et rechargez le magasin à nouveau. 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-12 bizhub 164 11.3 6 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que les Guides latéraux sont bien poussés contre les bords du papier chargé. 7 Fermez le Magasin 1. Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie 1 Retirez lentement le papier. Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau Plateau d'introduction manuelle (en option) 1 Enlevez tout le papier du Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 2 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. bizhub 164 11-13 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 5 Rechargez le papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-14 bizhub 164 11.3 12 Caractéristiques bizhub 164 12-3 12.1 Papier 12 12 Caractéristiques Ce chapitre décrit les spécifications du papier, de la machine, et des options. Dans un souci d'amélioration constante, cette spécification produit est susceptible de modification sans préavis. 12.1 Papier Types papier et capacités * Papier fin et autres papiers spéciaux. En ce qui concerne le grammage du papier, contactez votre SAV. REMARQUE Si le format papier ou le type papier n'est pas correctement spécifié, cela peut entraîner un bourrage ou une dégradation de l'image. Assurez-vous de spécifier correctement les réglages papier. Si vous devez charger du papier ordinaire, du papier recyclé, carte 1, ou carte 2, et dont une face comporte des images imprimées, sélectionnez [***-R] pour chaque type papier dans le paramètre Papier. ("***" indique un type papier.) Type papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier Papier ordinaire Papier recyclé Papier spécial* 64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb) Magasin 1 : 250 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 100 feuilles Carte 1 91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb) Magasin 1 : 20 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 20 feuilles Carte 2 121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb) Magasin 1 : 20 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 20 feuilles 12 Caractéristiques machine 12-4 bizhub 164 12.2 12.2 Caractéristiques machine bizhub 164 Caractéristiques Type Imprimante/Scanner de bureau Porte-document Fixe Photo conducteur OPC Source lumineuse LED Système copie Copie laser électrostatique Système développement Système de développement HMT bi-composant à sec Système de fixation Rouleau de fixation Définition 600 dpi e 600 dpi Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. A3 (11 e 17) Poids 2 kg (4-7/16 lb) (Objets en 3 dimensions) Type papier copie Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb)), Carte 1 (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb)), Carte 2(121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb)) Format du papier copie A3w à A5 v, 11 e 17w à 8-1/2 e 11 v, FLS*, 16Kw/v, 8Kw Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm (3-9/16 à 11-11/16), Longueur : 140mm à 432mm (5-1/2 à 17) * Cinq types de format FLS sont disponibles : 220mme 330mmw, 8-1/2 e 13w, 8-1/4 e 13w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4w, et 8 e 13w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. Capacité du magasin (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Magasin 1 Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial : 250 feuilles Carte 1/2 : 20 feuilles Capacité Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire/ Papier recyclé/ Papier spécial 250 feuilles (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11v)) 125 feuilles (Sauf A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Carte 10 feuilles Temps de préchauffage 29 sec. ou moins (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) La durée de préchauffage peut varier en fonction de l'environnement d'exploitation et de l'utilisation. Largeur de rognage d'image Bord supérieur, Bord inférieur, Bord droit, Bord gauche : 4mm (3/16) Première copie (en impression sur A4 v (8-1/2 e 11v)) 8,0 sec. ou moins Le délai avant production de la première copie dépend du mode utilisé. Vitesse de copie (Avec impression A4v (8-1/2 e 11v)) Papier ordinaire : 16 feuilles/min. Carte 1/2 : 7 feuilles/min. Agrandissement copie : Taille réelle : 100% Agrandissement : 115%, 141%, 200% Réduction : 81%, 70%, 50% Manuel : 50% à 200% (par pas de 1%) : Taille réelle : 100% Agrandissement : 121%, 129%, 200% Réduction : 78%, 64%, 50% Manuel : 50% à 200% (par pas de 1%) bizhub 164 12-5 12.2 Caractéristiques machine 12 Nombre de copies réalisées en continu 1 à 99 feuilles Réglage de la densité Réglage automatique de densité, Réglage manuel de densité (9 niveaux) Alimentation AC 220 V à 240 V, 3,5 A, 50/60Hz Consommation électrique max. 800W ±10% Dimensions Largeur 570mm (22-7/16) Profondeur 530 mm (20-7/8) Hauteur 449 mm (17-11/16) Encombrement machine Largeur 928mm (36-9/16) Profondeur 530 mm (20-7/8) Hauteur 449 mm (17-11/16) (Lorsque le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est utilisé) Taille mémoire 32Mo Poids Approx. 23,5 kg (Approx. 51-13/16 lb) Caractéristiques 12 Option 12-6 bizhub 164 12.3 12.3 Option Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 Caractéristiques Type papier copie Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb)), Carte 1 (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb)), Carte 2 (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb)) Format du papier copie A3w à A5 v, 11 e 17w à 8-1/2 e 11 v, FLS*, 16Kw/v, 8Kw Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm (3-9/16 à 11-11/16), Longueur : 140mm à 432mm (5-1/2 à 17) * Cinq types de format FLS sont disponibles : 220mme 330mmw, 8-1/2 e 13w, 8-1/4 e 13w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4w, et 8 e 13w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. Capacité du magasin (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial : 100 feuilles Carte 1/2 : 20 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 8W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 446mm (17-9/16) Profondeur 469 mm (18-7/16) Hauteur 82 mm (3-1/4) Poids Approx. 1,6 kg (Approx. 3-1/2 lb) 13 Annexe bizhub 164 13-3 13.1 Glossaire 13 13 Annexe 13.1 Glossaire Les termes utilisés pour les fonctions Copie, Impression, et Numérisation sont expliqués ci-dessous. Terme Description Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression ou la numérisation proprement dite. Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les données. BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement de données images. (L'extension de fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement utilisé sur les platesformes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format compressé. Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression. Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux, plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée. Désinstaller Désinstaller. DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Pouce (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier. L'extension de fichier, précédée par un point, est ajoutée à la suite du nom d'un fichier. Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur. Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors tension, d'autres pas. Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de la mise en marche de la machine, ou des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document formaté électroniquement et présente l'extension de fichier ".pdf". Le PDF est basé sur un format PostScript, et il peut être affiché grâce au logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader. Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une imprimante. Pilote Scanner Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un scanner. Pixel La plus petite unité constitutive d'une image. Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour rendre le périphérique opérationnel. Propriétés Informations d'attribut. Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Système d'exploitation Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows est un OS. Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique d'impression. 13 Glossaire 13-4 bizhub 164 13.1 TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques à un ordinateur. WIA Acronyme de Windows Imaging Acquisition. Fonction permettant d'importer les données image depuis des périphériques d'acquisition d'image, y compris les scanners et appareils photo numériques. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible WIA, il faut installer le pilote WIA approprié Terme Description 14 Index bizhub 164 14-3 14.1 Index des éléments 14 14 Index 14.1 Index des éléments 2en1 5-8 4en1 5-9 A Affichage 2-6, 4-3 Alimentation 1-16 Appel S.A.V. 11-3 Avec mode mémoire 5-15 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-14 B Bac de sortie 2-4 Back/Stop/Reset 2-6, 4-3 C Capacités papier 12-3 Capot côté 1 2-4 Caractéristiques 12-3 Caractéristiques machine 12-4 Cartouche toner 2-5 Chargement du papier 3-4, 10-4 Chargement du papier dans l'introducteur manuel 3-5 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d'introduction manuelle 10-5 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 3-4, 10-4 Combinaison 7-6 COMPT FORM 9-10 Configurer un format personnalisé 3-6 Conseils de sécurité 1-6 CONTRASTE LCD 9-6 Copie 7-5 COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ 5-7 Cordon d'alimentation 2-4 Couvercle supérieur de l'unité de fixation 2-5 Couvre-original 2-4, 10-9 Curseur 4-6 D Densité 4-5, 5-6 Déclarations réglementaires 1-10 Définition 7-9 Déhum. photocond. 9-7 Désinstaller le pilote 6-8 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante 6-8 Désinstaller le pilote scanner 6-9 E Effacement 5-11 Effacement + Séparation livre 5-13 Enregistrer les réglages Copie 5-15 Entretien 10-3 Environnement 1-16, 6-3 Espace requis 1-15 Extérieur de l'unité principale 2-4 F Face 2-4 Fonction Copie 5-3, 5-7, 9-3 Fonction de numérisation 8-3 Fonctions Imprimante 7-3 Format de l'original 7-5 Format de sortie 7-5 Format papier 4-4, 5-5 G Gestion Utilisateur 9-7 I Icône/Message 4-5 Incidents 11-3 Indications affichées 4-4 Init. P de Control 3-3 Initialisation automatique 9-6 Installation Plug and Play 6-4 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6-7 Installer le pilote 6-3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000 6-5 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7 6-7 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/ Server 2008 6-4 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/ Server 2003 6-5 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 2-4 Intérieur de l'unité principale 2-5 L Langue 9-6 Levier d'ouverture du capot côté 1 2-4 M Magasin 1 2-4 Magasin papier 4-4, 5-5 Marques déposées et copyrights 1-4 Menu 9-3 Menu ou fonction 4-6 Menu/Select 2-6, 4-3 Message de rechargement 10-3 Message de Remplacement 10-6 MÉM.FORMAT PERSO 9-7 Mode croisé 9-8 Mode Veille 3-3, 7-3, 9-6 14-4 bizhub 164 14 Index des éléments 14.1 N Nombre de copies 4-4, 5-5 Numérisation d'un document 8-5 Numériser un document 8-3 O Onglet À propos de 7-9 Onglet Configurer 7-5 Onglet Disposition 7-6 Onglet Filigrane 7-8 Onglet Qualité 7-9 Onglet Réglages par page 7-7 Opérations Impression 7-3 Option 12-6 Options 2-3 Ordre copie 4en1 9-10 Orientation 7-5 ORIGINAUX MIXTES 5-8 P Page face de couverture 7-7 Panneau de contrôle 2-4, 2-6, 4-3, 10-9 Papier 10-3, 12-3 Param. base 5-5 PARAM. COPIE 9-9 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-4 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN 8-4 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA 8-5 PARAMÈTRES MACHINE 9-6 Paramètres Tâche 9-8 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8-3 Pilote scanner WIA 8-5 Placer les originaux 3-6 Plateau d'introduction manuelle 2-4 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles 2-3, 12-6 Port USB (type A) USB2.0/1.1 2-4 Priorité Tri 9-9 Procédure de nettoyage 10-9 Programmes 9-4 Q Qualité 4-5, 5-6 Quick Settings 2-6, 4-3 R Raccordement à l'ordinateur 6-3 Rappeler un programme de copie 5-15 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-9 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie 11-12 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier 11-11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical 11-10 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau du Plateau d'introduction manuelle 11-12 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 10-6 Revêtement 10-9 RÉGLAGE EFFACENT. 9-9 Réglage Travail Copie 9-4 Réglages Application 5-7 Régler la qualité depuis les Réglages personnalisés 8-6 Réglette Original 2-5 RGL VITESSE TOUCHE 9-6 Rouleau prise papier 2-5 S Séparation Livre 5-12 Source papier 7-5 Start 2-6, 4-3 T Tableau d’association des fonctions 5-16 Tableau de dépannage 11-4 Tambour 2-5 Taux zoom 4-5, 5-6 Tâches copie en file d'attente 3-3 Toner 10-6 TOTAL COMPT 9-10 TOTAL PAGES 9-10 TOTAL SCAN 9-10 Tri 5-10, 7-5 Tri+ Mode croisé 5-10 Type papier 4-4, 7-5 Types de papier 12-3 U Unité de fixation 2-5 Utilitaires 9-5 V Veille rapide 9-6 Vitre d'exposition 2-5, 10-9 Voyant LED 4-3 Vue 7-4 Z Zoom 7-5 bizhub 164 14-5 14.2 Index des touches 14 14.2 Index des touches 2en1 5-8 4en1 5-9 A Ajustement 7-9 C COMPT FORM 9-10 CONTRASTE LCD 9-6 COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ 5-7 D DEHUM. PHOTOCOND. 9-7 Densité 9-4 DENSITÉ (LIVRE) 9-6 DENSITÉ IMPRESS. 9-6 Définition 8-4, 8-6 Départ 2-6, 4-3 Détails Combinaison... 7-6 Disposition Copie 4en1 9-10 E EFF. DES BORDS 5-11, 5-14 EFFAC. CENTRE 5-14 EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE 5-14 EFFACEMENT 5-11, 5-13 EFFACEMENT GAUCHE 5-11 EFFACEMENT SUP. 5-11 ENREGISTREMENT 5-15 F FONCTION COPIE 5-7, 9-3 I INIT. P de CONTROL 9-6 L Langue 9-6 Luminosité 8-4, 8-6 M MAG. PAPIER 1 9-4, 9-8 Menu 9-3 Menu/Sélect. 2-6, 4-3 MÉM.FORMAT PERSO 9-7 Mode croisé 5-10, 9-8 MODE MÉMOIRE 5-15, 9-4 Mode Scanner 8-4 Mode Utilisateur 9-7 Mode Veille 9-6 Modifier format personnalisé... 7-5 N NIVEAU DENSITÉ 9-9 O ORIGINAUX MIXTES 5-8 P PAPIER INTRO MANU 9-4, 9-8 PARAM. COPIE 9-9 PARAMÈTRES MACHINE 9-6 Paramètres Tâche 9-8 PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ 9-9 PRIORITÉ IMPRESS 9-8 PRIORITÉ MAG 9-8 PRIORITÉ QUALITÉ 9-9 PRIORITÉ TRI 9-9 Q Qualité 9-4 R RAPPEL 5-15 Relié gauche 5-12 RELIURE DROITE 5-12 Retour/Arrêt/Réinitialiser 2-6, 4-3 RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE 9-4 RÉGLAGE EFFACENT. 9-9 Réglages personnalisés 8-6 Réglages rapides 2-6, 4-3 RGL VITESSE TOUCHE 9-6 S SÉLECTION MAGASIN 9-4 Séparation Livre 5-12, 5-13 T TAUX ZOOM 9-4 TOTAL COMPT 9-10 TOTAL PAGES 9-10 TOTAL SCAN 9-10 TRI 5-10 U Utilitaires 9-5 V VEILLE RAPIDE 9-6 14 Index des touches 14-6 bizhub 164 14.2 Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) User’s Guide . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-4 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] .................................................................................................................. 3-5 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-4 Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-6 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-6 [Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-7 [Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-8 [Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Operating instructions...................................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Touch Panel .................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Contents-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13 List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [History] ............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 [Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18 4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-20 4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-8 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-8 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-3 6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-8 Scanning a document ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-9 Retrieving a document from an external memory............................................................................ 6-10 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-11 6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-14 [Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-15 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-16 Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-17 Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-17 [Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-19 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-19 6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-22 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-23 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-24 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-3 Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-4 [OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-5 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-3 Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-3 Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-3 Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-5 Contents-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [Language Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-9 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................. 9-10 [Default Tab Density Settings].......................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Address Book Index Default] .......................................................................................................... 9-11 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-12 [Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-13 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-15 Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-15 Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-15 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-16 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-3 Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book ..................................... 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document............................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................. 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively, please read this User's Guide. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on user box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connection 1 Use conditions 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. 1.2 Use conditions Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP. Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country where this machine is used. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.3.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function The following describes the overview of each function. Reference - To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required. - A Hard Disk must be installed in the MFP in order to use the advanced function. - For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. - To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application. 2.1.1 Supported function table The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications. 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel. - The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as application keys. - Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added function. - To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed. For details, refer to page 3-3. Web Browser Image panel PDF processing Searchable PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Overview of each function 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below. Reference - When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used. Function Overview Reference Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents. Also, through a Web browser, you can operate PageScope Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading to sending a document. You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using Page- Scope Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel. p. 6-3 PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 in the MFP. Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function. p. 7-3 Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions. p. 8-3 My Panel This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. p. 9-3 My Address This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. p. 10-3 3 Assigning Application Keys bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Overview 3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel. 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys. Reference - The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. - The My Panel function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. No. Name Description 1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key. If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details, refer to page 3-4. 2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. 1 2 3 3 Overview 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Application Menu] Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu]. To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from the [Application Menu]. 3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. No. Name Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed. 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings]. 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [System Settings]. 5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings]. 6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function. 3 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Select a function to be assigned. 8 Press [OK]. The function is assigned to the application key. 4 Web Browser Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Overview 4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations. - Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet. - Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet. - Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet or intranet. - Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using PageScope Web Connection. - When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. dReference For details on using PageScope Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-3. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Overview 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Specifications Specifications for Web Browser The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Restrictions on Flash Player There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser. - The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported. - The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported. - The context menu is not supported. - The print function of Flash is not supported. - The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported. - The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported. - The favorite function of Flash is not supported. - The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported. - The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported. Item Specifications Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup language HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2 Supported script language Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript) Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2 Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier Supported SSL/TLS versions SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Supported character codes Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859- 1), Unicode (UTF-8) Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed. Reference - If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed. - When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. [Web Browser Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Network Settings]. 5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting]. 6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK]. Reference - If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. [Function Permission] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track]. 5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration]. 6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit]. % If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public]. 7 Press [Function Permission]. 8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. Reference - This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings] ö[Web Browser Setting]. - Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User Access]. - If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings] ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser. The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required. Reference - For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative. [Web browser contents access] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Security Settings]. 5 Press [Security Details]. 6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4 Basic operation 4.4.1 Screen components The Web browser screen has the following components. Reference - When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11. No. Name Description 1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always displayed on the Web Browser screen. For details, refer to page 4-12. 2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen. Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen. 3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using the tab located at the bottom of the screen. Press [e] in the active tab to close the window. 4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents. If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed. 1 4 3 2 4 Basic operation 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Operating instructions Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad of the Control Panel. Reference - Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort. Operation using the Touch Panel Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. - To select an item, press a desired item. - If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it. - If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen. - To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar. Operation using the Keypad You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list. 4.4.3 How to enter text If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. Entering text Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen. - To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift]. - You can also enter numbers using the Keypad. Reference - To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number. - To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel. - To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo]. - Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. - When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.4 Screen display mode There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen. [Normal] This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. (The default is set to [Normal]. ) [Just-Fit Rendering] The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. [Smart-Fit Rendering] The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed. dReference For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16. 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser. Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume. - To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel. - To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel. - Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon. 4 Toolbar 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Toolbar The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure various settings. 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar. Icon Name Description Back Brings you back to the previous page. Next Brings you to the next page. Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents. If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops. Home Displays the page registered as the home. By default, "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" is registered. For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16. [Favorites] - [List] Displays the list of registered favorites. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Favorites] - [Add] Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL. For details, refer to page 4-14. [History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then. For details, refer to page 4-14. [Print] Prints the currently displayed contents. For details, refer to page 4-15. [Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List] Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you to access the corresponding URL. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. List of favorites Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add] (Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. ) Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press [OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites. - To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen. - It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title. Reference - For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user. Item Description [List View]/[Thumbnail View] Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view. [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of favorites. Item Description [Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window. [Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite. Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Up] Brings you above the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Down] Brings you below the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Delete] Deletes the selected favorite. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. 4 Toolbar 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Address] Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address. Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press [OK] or [Open New Window]. Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold up to 100 input history records. Reference - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all data entries. - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user. 4.5.5 [History] Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each user. [Display History] Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. Item Description [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display history between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of display history. Item Description [Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window. [Delete] Deletes the selected display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.6 [Print] Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.5.7 [Menu] Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-16. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. 4 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu screen, and enter the administrator password. 4.6.1 [Page Operation] In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. 4.6.2 [Display] In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display. Item Description [Use for Home Page]* Registers the displayed page as the home page. [Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the list displays the corresponding page. Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. [Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is. [Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display size. Press the key to adjust the page display size. Item Description [Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering], and [Smart-Fit Rendering]. For details, refer to page 4-11. [Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents. [Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents. • [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]). bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings]* Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security]* Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies]* Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache]* Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy]* Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information]* Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log]* Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-3. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries. 5 Screen components 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.2 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta. com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again. 5 Using the User Box function 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-8. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name. 5 Using the User Box function 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility]. 5 Using the User Box function 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents )] check box to select all documents. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted. 5 Using the User Box function 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6 Displaying the Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-17. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Operating Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-10. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-11. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-12. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-16. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-16. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List] bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-17. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-18. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixed bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. dReference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-18. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Operating Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Description 6 Operating Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings] ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytes 6 Registering a photo in the address book 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted. 7 PDF Processing Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-5). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-5). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-8). dReference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. 7 PDF document properties 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level. 7 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-3. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description 7 Direct Print 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8 Searchable PDF function bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. dReference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-5. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 pt 8 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. dReference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-5. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. 8 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 My Panel Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information dReference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-3. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9 Overview 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. dReference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-22. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel,etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-15. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. dReference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-16. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-9. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-11. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-13. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-14. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-15. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-16. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. dReference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. dReference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-15 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing]. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. 10 My Address function bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel. 10 Overview 10-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.1 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.]. 10 Registering and editing a destination 10-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.2 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. dReference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. dReference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10 Copying destinations between address books 10-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.3 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. 10 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.4 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search]. 11 Index bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing 5-3 Acquiring my panel 9-4 Address book 10-5 Application key 3-3, 3-5 Application menu 3-4 C Cache 5-3 Cellular phone/PDA 6-11, 6-18 Customizing 3-5, 6-22, 9-6 D Deleting 5-10 Display mode of web browser 4-11 Displaying 4-20 E Entering text in web browser 4-10 External memory 6-16 F Flash player 4-4 G Group 10-6 I Image panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-22 Image panel operation 6-6 J Just-fit rendering 4-11 L Logging in 5-5 Logging out 5-5 M Main menu 9-5 My address 2-4, 10-3 My address book 10-3, 10-10 My address book acquisition 10-4 My panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-5 My panel settings 9-6 O OCR 8-4 Opening user boxes 5-6 Operating web browser 4-10 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 PDF processing 2-4, 7-3 Photo 6-19 PIN code 6-18 Print 6-15 Printing 4-18, 5-8 Public address book 10-3 R Restriction of web browser 4-6 Restrictions on my address 10-4 Restrictions on my panel 9-4 S Saving 4-21 Scanning 6-8 Screen components of image panel 6-5 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection 5-4 Screen components of web browser 4-9 Searchable PDF 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Send tray 6-17 Smart-fit rendering 4-11 Speaker 4-11 Specifications 4-4, 6-19 Specifications for web browser 4-4 T Toolbar 4-12 U Upload 4-22 User box 5-6, 6-9 W Web browser 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Web browser information 4-17 Web browser settings 4-16 11-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button A Access log 4-17 Address 4-14 Address Book (Personal) 10-5 Address Book Index Default 9-11 Application key 1 3-3 Application key 2 3-4 Application Key Settings 3-5 Application menu 3-4 Application menu key 3-3 Authentication information 4-17 C Cache 4-17 Cellular Phone 6-11 Color Selection Settings 9-14 Combine Documents 6-13 Cookie 4-17 Copier Settings 9-9 Copy to Personal Addr. 10-8 Copy to Shared Addr. 10-9 D Default Address Book 9-12 Default Address Type 9-12 Default Tab 9-9, 9-11, 9-13 Default Tab Density Settings 9-10 Destination List 6-16 Digital ID 7-6 Direct Print 7-8 Display 4-16 Document Settings 6-14 Document Source List 6-9 Document/Page 6-12, 6-13, 6-14 E Edit Document 6-12 Encryption 7-5 External memory 6-10, 6-16 F Favorites (Add) 4-13 Favorites (List) 4-13 Function Permission 4-7 G Group 10-6 H History 4-14 I Initial Screen Settings 9-16 L Language Setting 9-8 M Main Menu Settings 9-15 Manage windows 4-17 Measurement Unit Settings 9-8 Menu 4-16 My Panel Settings 9-6 O OCR operation setting 8-4 P Page Operation 4-16 Password 7-5 PDF Document Properties 7-4 Photo/Icon 6-20 Preview 6-12 Print 4-15, 6-15 Proxy 4-17 Q Quick Settings 9-10 R Return to Scan Dest. 6-14 S Scan 6-8 Scan/Fax Settings 9-11 Security 4-17 Settings 4-17 Shortcut key 9-9, 9-12, 9-13 U User Box Settings 9-13 W Web browser contents access 4-8 Web browser setting 4-6 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option) Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge ............................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles ................................................................................................. 2-4 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Menu Application] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2...................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] ............................................................................................................ 3-5 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web................................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................. 4-4 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web................................................................................................. 4-4 Restrictions avec Flash Player ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web ........................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web ........................................ 4-6 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction...................................... 4-6 [Réglage Navigateur Web] ................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée................................................................ 4-7 [Autoriser Fonction]............................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux.......................................................................................... 4-8 [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] .......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Fonctionnement de base................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation ................................................................................................................... 4-10 Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile ................................................................................................. 4-10 Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique............................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.3 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Table des matières-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran ............................................................................................................ 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Rendu Parfait] ................................................................................................................................. 4-11 [Rendu intelligent] ............................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils ........................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Signet] – [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................ 4-13 Liste des favoris ............................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.3 [Signet] – [Ajout] ............................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.4 [Adresse] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [Histor.]............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 [Afficher Historique].......................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Impr.] ............................................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web............................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Opération Page] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.6.3 [Gérer fenêtres] ................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.6.4 [Réglages] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-18 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document ............................................ 4-19 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document.......................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document............................................................................................................ 4-21 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document....................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document ....................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.2 Chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé ............................................................................ 4-23 4.8.3 Chargement d'un fichier de document dans une boîte ................................................................... 4-25 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 5-3 5.1.1 Vérification préalable.......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Modalité d'accès................................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.2 Composition de l'écran .................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte ................................................................................................................. 5-6 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte............................................................................................................................ 5-6 [Connexion de boîte].......................................................................................................................... 5-6 [Liste de fichiers] ................................................................................................................................ 5-7 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document .............................................................................................................. 5-8 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ...................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Opérations générales......................................................................................................................... 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Table des matières-3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document...................................................................................................................... 6-8 Numérisation d'un document ............................................................................................................ 6-8 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur .................................................................................................. 6-9 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe ............................................................................ 6-10 Utilisation de données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA ................................... 6-11 6.3.4 Editer le document........................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Aperçu]............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] – [Modifier document] ......................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] – [Combiner Documents] .................................................................................... 6-14 [Document/Page] – [Réglages Document] ....................................................................................... 6-14 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] ................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination ................................................................................................................. 6-16 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16 Spécifier des destinations................................................................................................................ 6-17 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe...................................................................... 6-18 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi ............................................................................................................... 6-18 Magasin Envoi.................................................................................................................................. 6-18 [Vérifier Mag. EMI]............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA............................................................... 6-20 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses...................................................................... 6-21 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo .................................................................................... 6-21 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo........................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel .......................................................................................................... 6-24 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données ................................................................................ 6-24 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document ................................................................................. 6-25 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée................................................................................ 6-26 7 Fonction de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF.................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF..................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique ................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe ............................................................................................ 7-5 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique ............................................................................................ 7-6 7.4 Impression directe .......................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables................................................ 8-3 Taille de caractère reconnaissable .................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR....................................................... 8-4 [Réglage Opération ROC] .................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable ................................................................................... 8-5 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) 9.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec My Panel.............................................................................................. 9-3 Eléments personnalisables ................................................................................................................ 9-3 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web .................................................................................... 9-4 Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Panel ................................................................................................ 9-5 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Panel .............................................................................. 9-5 9.2 Afficher My Panel ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.2.1 Menu principal ................................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal .............................................................................................................. 9-6 Table des matières-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] ................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] ............................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] ............................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure]................................................................................................................. 9-9 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-10 [Régl. rapides 1] – [Régl. rapides 4] ................................................................................................. 9-11 [Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité] ........................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] ....................................................................................................... 9-12 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut]........................................................................................................ 9-12 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-13 [Carnet d'adresses par défaut] ........................................................................................................ 9-13 [Type adresse par défaut] ................................................................................................................ 9-13 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] ............................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-14 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] .............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] ............................................................................................................... 9-15 Touche Menu principal .................................................................................................................... 9-15 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal ............................................................................... 9-16 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran par défaut] .............................................................................................................. 9-16 10 Fonction My Address 10.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses ............................................................................................. 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................. 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Address Book ................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Address........................................................................ 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination .................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet d'adresses............................................................................................................................ 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses.................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book ................................ 10-8 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book ................................ 10-9 10.4 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document............................................................ 10-10 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations.............................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations ......................................................................................................... 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option sur la machine. Il décrit aussi les fonctions disponibles dès qu'une application est connectée. La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux chacune de ces fonctions. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Manuel sur papier Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce manuel contient aussi des notes et des précautions dont il faut tenir compte pour exploiter cette machine en toute sécurité. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. Ce manuel fournit des informations détaillées sur les marques commerciales et les droits de reproduction. • Marques de fabrique et copyrights Manuels Guide de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Écran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions Boîte. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission WebDAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC 1 Conditions d'utilisation 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à tous les types d'utilisateurs, depuis les utilisateurs novices jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Veuillez noter qu'une connaissance de base du produit est requise afin de permettre aux utilisateurs d'effectuer les opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. En cas de problèmes, veuillez contacter le SAV. 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation L'activation de l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le Panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. Les contenus auxquels les utilisateurs ont accès et qu'ils téléchargent et transmettent à l'aide du navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction ou par tout autre moyen restent de leur responsabilité. Les utilisateurs doivent respecter les règles de l'entreprise et les lois en vigueur dans le pays d'implantation de la machine. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. et les sociétés du groupe n'assumeront aucune responsabilité pour l'exploitation d'Internet par les utilisateurs. [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement du kit de licence et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF adressable • Fonctions My Panel et My Address Manuels Guide de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Respectez les consignes afin d'éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Le chiffre "1" ainsi formaté représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle pour accéder à l'élément de menu souhaité. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures opératoires sont décrites à l'aide d'illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Les noms de touches du panneau de contrôle, de pièces, de modèles et d'options sont tous indiqués en texte gras. 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 2 Présentation bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Présentation des fonctions 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Référence - La disponibilité de la fonction avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau UK-203 fourni en option. - Un Disque dur doit être installé dans le MFP (Produit multifonctions) pour pouvoir utiliser les fonctions avancées. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement du kit de licence et sur l'activation de fonctions sur les imprimantes multifonction, reportez-vous au [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/ Numérisation]. - Pour associer la fonction à l'application, vous devez l'activer depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, reportez-vous au manuel relatif à l'application. 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions prises en charge pour les kits licence et les applications. 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou My Panel modifie l'utilisation des touches Boîte, Fax/Numérisation et Copie du panneau de contrôle. - La touche Boîte fonctionne comme une touche du Menu Application et les touches Fax/Numérisation et Copie fonctionnent comme des touches d'application. - Appuyez sur Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application] qui vous permet de basculer vers la fonction ajoutée. - Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier la fonction qui doit être assignée à la touche d'application. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-3. Navigateur Web Image Panel Traitement PDF PDF adressable Option Internet LK-101 v2 o o − − Option Internet LK-102 − − o − Option Internet LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Présentation des fonctions 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous à la référence décrite ci-dessous. Référence - Si le dispositif de gestion de compte est installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible. Fonction Présentation Référence Navigateur Web Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Ce "panneau" vous aide à facilement visualiser le cycle d'opérations complet depuis le chargement jusqu'à l'émission d'un document. Vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la liste d'adresses d'Image Panel. p. 6-3 Traitement PDF Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-102 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Exécute le cryptage de PDF commandé par mot de passe ou ID numérique, ajoute une signature numérique et configure les réglages des propriétés pour la distribution de documents au format PDF à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. p. 7-3 PDF adressable Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en collant les données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF à l'aide des fonctions Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. p. 8-3 My Panel (Mon Panneau) Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur en fonction de l'application (My Panel), puis obtention de My Panel sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 9-3 My Address (Mon adresse) Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée du carnet d'adresses personnel (My Address Book) par le serveur, puis obtention de My Address Book sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 10-3 3 Attribution des touches d'application bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Présentation 3 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation La description suivante présente la distribution des touches et le [menu Application] du panneau de contrôle. 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou My Panel permet à la touche Boîte de fonctionner comme une touche Menu Application et à Fax/Numérisation et Copie comme des touches d'application. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel de l'imprimante multifonction. - La fonction My Panel est utilisée en association avec PageScope My Panel Manager. N°. Nom Description 1 Menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous ajoutez une fonction, fixez un autocollant Menu Application (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour modifier le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-4. 3 Présentation 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Menu Application] Appuyez sur la touche Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Si vous désirez utiliser une fonction qui n'est pas affectée à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez permuter les fonctions de la touche concernée dans le [Menu Application]. 2 Touche d'application 1 La fonction Fax/Numérisation est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. 3 Touche d'application 2 La fonction Copie est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. N°. Nom Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier les fonctions qui doivent être assignées aux touches d'application 1 et 2. 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] Pour attribuer une fonction aux touches d'application 1 et 2, utilisez [Réglage Touche Application]. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Système]. 5 Dans [Réglage Système] (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. 6 Sélectionnez une touche d'application ([Touche 1] ou [Touche 2]) pour y attribuer une fonction. 3 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. La fonction est attribuée à la touche d'application. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Présentation 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web imprime, affiche et enregistre des contenus Internet ou Intranet en y accédant depuis le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Afficher et imprimer les contenus Web sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Afficher, imprimer et enregistrer un fichier document sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Téléchargement d'un fichier de document numérisé ou d'un fichier de document enregistré dans une Boîte utilisateur sur un serveur sur Internet ou l'Intranet. - Partager les documents des boîtes utilisateur des imprimantes multifonction sur le réseau à l'aide PageScope Web Connection. - Lorsque la fonction My Panel est disponible, vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à My Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection depuis le panneau de contrôle, voir page 5-3. Pour plus d'informations sur My Panel, voir page 9-3. 4 Présentation 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction sont les suivantes. Restrictions avec Flash Player Les restrictions liées au module Flash Player installé dans le Navigateur Web. - La fonction permettant de générer un événement par une pression de touche n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant de coller ou d'obtenir des données telles que des chaînes de caractères du presse-papier ne sont pas prises en charge. - Le menu contextuel n'est pas pris en charge. - La fonction d'impression de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou d'exploiter Flash depuis JavaScript ne sont pas prises en charge. - Les écrans ne comportant pas de fenêtres instantanées ne sont pas pris en charge. - La fonction Signet de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction de communication via XMLSocket n'est pas prise en charge. Élément Caractéristiques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Langage de balisage pris en charge HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/De base Feuille de style prise en charge Partie de CSS1 et 2 Langage script pris en charge Partie de JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3e édition, Ajax (limité au contenu pris en charge par JavaScript) DOM pris en charge Partie du niveau 1 et 2 Format pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 et antérieur Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Maj_JIS), japonais (ISO-2022-JP), japonais (EUC-JP), chinois simplifié (GB2312), chinois traditionnel (Big5), Europe occidentale (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Mode d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web 4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Navigateur Web]. La page spécifiée comme page d'accueil apparaît. Référence - Si un utilisateur connecté utilise le navigateur Web associé à My Panel et que cet utilisateur appuie sur [Navigateur Web], le réglage Navigateur Web et les informations associées à l'utilisateur sont téléchargés du serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction. Si l'utilisateur a défini une page d'accueil personnelle, celle-ci s'affiche. - Au lancement du navigateur Web, vous pouvez spécifier l'affichage de la page d'accueil ou de la dernière page visitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-18. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. Pour plus d'informations sur My Panel, voir page 9-3. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. Vous pouvez également interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. [Réglage Navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Réseau]. 5 Dans [Réglages Réseau] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Navigateur Web]. 6 Sélectionnez [Non valide] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Si [Réglage Navigateur Web] est réglé sur [Non valide], [Navigateur Web] est masqué dans le [Menu Application]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée Si la gestion des utilisateurs est effectuée sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. [Autoriser Fonction] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]. 5 Dans [Système d'Authentification], appuyez sur [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 6 Sélectionnez l'utilisateur auquel vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web et appuyez sur [Modifier]. % Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web aux utilisateurs publics, appuyez sur [ ] et sélectionnez [Public]. 7 Appuyez sur [Autoriser Fonction]. 8 Dans [Autoriser Fonction] (3/3), réglez [Navigateur Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Le réglage n'est pas disponible si [Non valide] est spécifié dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglage Navigateur Web]. - La configuration de l'autorisation de la fonction aux utilisateurs publics est disponible lorsque l'accès utilisateur public est autorisé dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte]ö[Système d'authentification]ö[Accès Util. Public]. - Si la gestion des utilisateurs est réalisée sur le serveur externe, vous pouvez configurer les réglages par défaut d'autorisation de la fonction pour les utilisateurs qui se connectent à l'imprimante multifonction en utilisant l'Authentification Serveur Externe la première fois. Pour procéder à cette configuration, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Identification Utilisateur]ö[Param. admin.]ö[Autoris. par défaut Fonction]ö[Navigateur Web]. Pour plus d'informations sur [Autoris. par défaut Fonction], reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux Si le navigateur Web est utilisé en interaction avec une application, vous pouvez accéder par le navigateur Web aux fichiers (contenus préinstallés, fichiers d'images, fichiers d'aide, etc.) enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction. L'administrateur peut interdire l'utilisation des fichiers enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction depuis le navigateur Web selon les besoins. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur l'interaction de l'application avec le navigateur Web, contactez le SAV. [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Sécurité]. 5 Appuyez sur [Détails Sécurité]. 6 Dans [Détails Sécurité] (4/4), réglez [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants. Référence - Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Vous pouvez régler le son du haut-parleur avec l'icône. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. N°. Nom Description 1 Barre d'outils Permet d'exploiter le Navigateur Web ou de configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Elle est affichée en permanence sur l'écran Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. 2 Barre de défilement Apparaît à droite de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran verticalement. Apparaît en bas de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran horizontalement. 3 Fenêtre En cas d'affichage de plusieurs fenêtres, vous pouvez changer de fenêtre en vous servant des onglets situés au bas de l'écran. Appuyez sur [e] de l'onglet actif pour fermer la fenêtre. 4 Icône L'icône qui représente l'état de connexion apparaît au chargement du contenu. L'icône apparaît si le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction. 1 4 3 2 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. Vous pouvez effectuer certaines opérations à partir du pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Le stylet procure un confort d'utilisation sur l'écran tactile. Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. - Pour sélectionner un élément, il suffit d'appuyer dessus. - Si un lien figure dans le contenu, appuyez dessus pour y accéder. - Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Tapez les caractères sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur [ ], [ ], [ ] ou sur [ ] de la barre de défilement. Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique Vous pouvez utiliser le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour entrer des valeurs numériques ou sélectionner des articles dans la liste. 4.4.3 Saisie de texte Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Saisie de texte Appuyez sur le caractère que vous voulez saisir sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. - Vous pouvez aussi saisir des nombres à l'aide du pavé numérique. Référence - Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, puis appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. - Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle. - Pour annuler le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. - Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. - Si la saisie de codes de caractères sur plusieurs lignes est autorisée, le bouton de saut de ligne apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran Il existe trois types de mode d'affichage de l'écran Navigateur Web. [Normal] Ce mode d'affichage correspond à celui d'un navigateur Web normal. L'affichage du contenu n'est pas ajusté à la taille de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. (Le défaut est réglé sur [Normal]). [Rendu Parfait] La disposition du contenu est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. [Rendu intelligent] Le tableau est divisé et redistribué verticalement pour correspondre à la largeur de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. La disposition peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir page 4-17. 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Si un haut-parleur est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction, l'icône haut-parleur s'affiche en bas à gauche du navigateur Web. Appuyez sur l'icône haut-parleur pour afficher l'écran Volume qui vous permet de régler le volume du haut-parleur. - Pour augmenter le volume au niveau supérieur, appuyez sur [Plus clair] ou sur la touche # du panneau de contrôle. - Pour réduire le volume au niveau inférieur, appuyez sur [Plus foncé] ou sur la touche * du panneau de contrôle. - Une pression sur [Sourdine] coupe le son. De plus, l'icône de haut-parleur se change en icône de hautparleur muet. 4 Barre d'outils 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer différentes opérations et de configurer différents paramètres. 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions des touches de la barre d'outils. Icône Nom Description Verso Retour à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/ Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche pendant que vous chargez une page, le chargement est interrompu. Home Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" est la page enregistrée par défaut. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir page 4-16. [Signet] – [Affichage] Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Signet] – [Ajout] Ajoute l'URL de la page actuellement affichée à la liste des favoris. L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Adresse] Affiche l'écran de saisie des URL. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Histor.] Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Impr.] Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. [Menu] Configuration des paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.2 [Signet] – [Affichage] Appuyez sur [Liste] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés à l'aide de vignettes. La sélection d'un favori permet d'accéder à l'URL correspondante. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des favoris de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Liste des favoris Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. 4.5.3 [Signet] – [Ajout] (L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur). En appuyant sur [Ajout], vous êtes invité(e) à entrer le mot de passe administrateur. Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'écran d'enregistrement apparaît. Vérifiez le contenu et appuyez sur [OK]. L'URL de la page affichée est ajoutée à la liste des favoris. L'imprimante multifonction peut gérer 100 favoris au maximum. - Pour enregistrer les vignettes de la pages à ajouter aux favoris, cochez la case [Enregistrer Vignette] dans l'écran d'enregistrement. - L'enregistrement est effectué sous le titre donné précédemment au contenu. Pour changer le titre, appuyez sur le champ de saisie du titre dans l'écran d'enregistrement et modifiez le titre. Référence - L'accès au navigateur Web en association avec My Panel ne nécessite pas l'autorité administrateur. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 favoris par utilisateur. Élément Description [Vue Liste]/ [Vue Vignettes] Permet de choisir entre afficher la liste des favoris ou leurs vignettes. [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher les favoris en visualisant au choix leur adresse ou leur titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme la liste des favoris. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Ouvre le favori sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Editer] Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. La modification de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Haut] Vous positionne au-dessus du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Bas] Vous positionne au-dessous du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Supprimer] Supprime le favori sélectionné. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. 4 Barre d'outils 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Adresse] Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie de l'adresse. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. Entrez l'URL de la page à afficher et appuyez sur [Valider] or [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste de l'historique de saisie. Vous pouvez référencer les saisies précédentes. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique de saisie. Référence - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrées de données. - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des dossiers d'historique de saisie de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique de saisie par utilisateur. 4.5.5 [Histor.] Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran Afficher Historique. Dans la liste d'affichage de l'historique, sélectionnez la page que vous voulez afficher à nouveau. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique d'affichage. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des dossiers d'historique d'affichage de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique d'affichage par utilisateur. [Afficher Historique] Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. Élément Description [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher l'historique en visualisant au choix l'adresse ou le titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime toutes les entrées enregistrées dans l'affichage de l'historique. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Ferme la liste d'affichage de l'historique. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Charge l'affichage d'historique sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Supprimer] Supprime l'affichage d'historique sélectionné. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.6 [Impr.] Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le contenu affiché est imprimé. Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer une page Web ou une image JPEG ou autre qui utilise une grande partie de la mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4.5.7 [Menu] Appuyez sur [Menu] pour configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-16. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le [Titre], l'[URL], la [Date/Heure], ainsi que le [Numéro Page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web Le fait d'appuyer sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils permet d'afficher le menu de l'utilisateur. Les utilisateurs peuvent seulement visualiser les réglages opératoires et les informations du navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer l'environnement d'exploitation et les paramètres sécurité en plus des réglages opératoires du navigateur Web. Pour afficher le menu administrateur, appuyez sur [Administrateur] dans l'écran du menu, puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. 4.6.1 [Opération Page] Con